Home

Prerequisites - Photo Finale Wiki

1. Canvas Height 4 00 The Finish option can be either glossy or matte m Canvas DPI 6 Translation needs to match the name that is seh 300 specified in the server xml file generated by the Shick glossy Photogize XConnect See Setting up Photogize Translation 4x6 Glossy XConnect earlier in this appendix This field is Sizing beoe lll case sensitive 7 Sizing should be set to Crop Deleting a Product Product Translation Window 1 Select the size you wish to delete from the Configure Translations window 2 Press the Delete button Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail 202 Assigning Products to the XConnect Interface After the Photogize XConnect interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print zioz Ble Help 1 Click on the Products Printed Here Printers option in the Primary Navigation Pane I Seed prodas bo differert preders based on thee sulace gosey malel ga PG Prictogae Wonnert Aera T Send products to dierent pritars bared on the hliiment express pickup msi 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a checkmark ne
2. Folio Edit Screen Note Photos labeled with a green checkmark have already been added to the current product You can add an image multiple times to a product but only one checkmark will appear Alternatively if you chose the autofill option then the images will be marked as you enter the Folio Edit screen One you have inserted your image you can apply some basic edits to the image Use the red directional arrows to move the image and align it properly Use the and buttons to zoom in or out of the photo Use the Rotate Photo button to rotate the image 54 If you wish to color correct the photo press the Edit Photo button Use the automatic correction and brightness contrast buttons to make changes to the image To restore your photo to its original settings press the Reset Photo button When you are finished editing the image press the Done button Note You must select an image to see the available editing options Selected images will have an orange border Fill out the page with photos and text Switch between different layouts and backgrounds Adjust Photo S Position a g gt gt Enhance Photo Zoom a Add or Remove Page TS S 9 Q Q Contrast 100 Done Image Selected on Page Image Editing Screen Some pages allow the addition of text in pre defined areas To add text simply touch or click the area that says Touch to Enter Text Use the on screen keyboard
3. EQ Gifting Offers over 600 products from over 20 vendors through one module and one monthly invoice from Lucidiom Choose to offer ship to customer or ship back to your store Kiosk must be online to sign up for this service and you will need to sign up for the EQ Gifting program through your regional sales representative before using this feature EQ Pro APM Kiosk EQ Pro APMs include the above features as well EO Pro software can also be added to a Standard APM Kiosk EQ Pro Luci amp Photo Folio Formerly sold separately EQ Pro now contains both Photo Folio and Luci products Photo Folio products are items that are multi page or duplex printed including photo books folded cards envelopes and calendars Luci products include scrapbook pages posters collages and flat cards Optional Add Ons Additional purchase required can be added to a Standard APM or an EQ Pro APM DVD Cinema A simple way to make and share a photo slideshow DVD Cinema allows the user to create DVD slideshows using various frames styles and music tracks DVD Cinema also appears in the Prints workflow as an up sell product APM Stack Scanner To use the Kodak stack scanner this additional license must be purchased 13 Product Selection Workflow To select a product for ordering you can select an option from one of the featured products buttons Selecting one of these buttons will take you directly to the ordering options for
4. 3 Photo Index Screen Touch a thumbnail to select it Selected images will show a green checkmark over them Use the rotate button in the right corner of each thumbnail to rotate the image in 90 degree increments Press the Back button to return to the style selection for that product This area gives a recommendation for the number of images that will fit within the product you have chosen It will also report the number of photos that can be added if you select to add more pages as presented in the next screen and the number of images currently selected 5 Use these buttons to scroll through your list of images If a scroll button is disabled faded either the end or the beginning of the image set has been reached 6 Press the Deselect All button to uncheck all of the photos that had previously been selected 7 Use the options in the Sort By tabs to order the thumbnails by the method indicated Continue Description of Features gt a e Name orders the thumbnails alphabetically from A Z ascending based upon the filename of the images This is the default selection e Oldest sorts the thumbnails from oldest to newest based upon the file creation date and time of the image 52 e Newest sorts the thumbnails from newest to oldest based upon the file creation date and time of the image Note The Oldest and Newest tabs use the actual file creation date time of the image file to determine the sort On
5. 6 Check the Autorun checkbox if you want this application to run when the Hardware Attendant starts Application Settings Initialization Application name e ooo Executable name with fully qualified path Po Command line parameters p ooo Autorun Run minimized Request ID Cancel Recover Options Max seconds of unresponsivity bu Do nothing After subsequent failures Do nothing After first failure Application Settings Screen 7 Check the Run Minimized checkbox if you want the application to run in a minimized state Note Most applications will need both Autorun and Run minimized options checked 8 If you want to set the recovery options set the time and select what should be done after the first and second failures For the first and second failures you can configure the system to either reboot the computer restart the application or shutdown the system 9 When finished click the OK button The Hardware Attendant starts the applications in the order in which they are listed You can change the run order by highlighting the application name in the Hardware Attendant and using the Move Up or Move Down buttons 102 Starting amp Stopping Applications You can use the APM Hardware Attendant to easily start or stop the applications that it controls To start an application in the Hardware SC APH Hardee M Attendant Appication Mode Pame Sd RAS
6. Tax Settings Screen your location s tax rate With this option enabled customers will be charged tax based upon the address information they enter during an order rather than the tax charged at the store location VAT Settings Click on the VAT Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane to change or set the VAT rates used in the APM software Change Location Used to change the default location if the information is not correct This button will take you directly to the Location Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane Click on VAT Settings again to return to this screen VAT Rate Displays the default VAT rate for the current location TOTAL VAT Rate Use this field to increase decrease the amount of tax charged per order If your location uses state provincial city or local taxes add them to the base tax rate here VAT Settings Set VAT Rates Enter the appropriate TOTAL VAT rate If your location uses sate provice or city local taxes add them together for the total tax rate Change Location Current Location VAT Rate 0 00 Enter the total VAT rate as a percentage value Ex 4 5 4 50 TOTAL VAT Rate 0 00 I VAT is already induded in prices VAT Settings Screen VAT is already included in prices Toggle this option to specify whether the VAT rate is included in your pricing or should be added to the order total Touch Screen Calibration Click on the Touch Screen Calibrat
7. 1 Click on the product in the product list on the left side of the screen 2 Click on the Delete this Product button at the bottom of the Customization Pane 85 Special Product Features Duplexing and Output Format When you add a Photo Folio product to a given fulfillment additional options are available that allow for the product to be created as a single PDF file or as separate JPEG files for each page of the product You can also choose to enable or disable product duplexing two sided printing These options appear below the Quantity Pricing fields once the product has been added to a fulfillment Folio Settings iY This product will be duplexed when printed Output format POF Fulfillment Override The fulfillment override feature allows individual products to be sent to a folder different from the print setting defaults the four options discussed earlier in this chapter This is an advanced feature and should only be used in special circumstances that require a particular product to go to another location for fulfillment A good example would be a Product Hame 1188 5 Hard 20p Black Linen Override Fulfilment scenario where there are three stores and only one store has Product Description 1126 5 Hard Cover 20 Page Black the equipment and capabilities to create and fulfill Photo Folio Base Price 0 00 products Order Export Override In this scenario all three locations would offer the
8. Configuring Products To add or edit a product click on the Configure Products icon This screen with offer a wide variety of choices for managing the products printed to the EQ 9800 9850 e Add Product Use this button to add anew product to the list Further explanation detailed below Comore e Configure Product Highlight a product and press this button to change the settings Further explanation detailed below E eee terre ree SSSEMS SESS SESS SSssessesn ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee SCP ECE EC eee eee eee eeee SEESHS ELS SETS ELST ELST e Turn On Full Bleed Highlight a product a ast Sete and press this button to enable full bleed Se eee while printing This may also be configured in the product settings window rotinment 1 express ER runament 2 Pick Up BD turttenent 3 Mai e Turn Off Full Bleed Highlight a product ABE aen 144 00 Components and press this button to disable full bleed ma a while printing This may also be configured in the product settings window Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen e Reset All Products Will erase all existing product channel settings and restore the default settings as defined by Lucidiom e Delete Product Highlight a product and press this button to delete it 223 Adding Editing Products To add a product click on the Add Product button or to edit an exisiting product click on the Configure Product button The Product Settings scre
9. Multipurpose Tray Any Other Size t Varies Varies Short Edge Varies Recommended Metric Tray Settings Tray Product Type Paper Size Paper Type Paper Feed Binding Tray 1 5x7 Folded Cards 10x7 801b Cover Short Edge Short Edge Tray 2 A5 Hard Books A 1001b Text Short Edge Short Edge Tray 3 A4 Hard Books A4 801b Cover Long Edge Long Edge Tray 4 12x12 Books 12x12 1001b Text Long Edge Long Edge Tray 5 12x18 Calendars Tabloid Extra 80lb Cover Short Edge Long Edge Multipurpose Tray Any Other Size t Varies Varies Short Edge Varies Must be configured as PostScript Custom Page Size in driver and software t Includes 6x6 Books 8x8 Books Envelopes Banners etc 119 Consumable Items The EQ 9800 9850 uses a set series of components that are considered consumables These items need to be replaced over time through regular usage Note Expected yields are calculated using industry standards such as 5 coverage and 3 pages per job Creative photographic products generally require substantially more toner per page These parts and their expected output yields are e Toner o Approximately 15 000 pages e Imaging Drum o Approximately 30 000 pages e Transfer Belt o Approximately 100 000 pages e Fuser Unit o Approximately 100 000 pages e Toner Waste Bottle o Approximately 30 000 pages Toner in Printer Note There are a number of variables that will affect these output numbers including the size of any g
10. Noritsu Software Installed on Noritsu Printer 3 This will then bring up a screen similar to the below 4 Navigate to the machine where the Order directory was created and shared In the example used Order folder is shared out and configured to store all of the incoming APM orders Browse For Folder Select folder AG My Computer E My Network Places Fi Entire Network i Microsoft Windows Network Fa Workgroup as Apm 7265 aS APMHoth older fa YES OK NO Cancel 2 E Noritsu Browse for Folder Window 5 Click Yes OK If you already have orders in this directory the folder will look something like the sample on the next page The orders will reside in this folder on the APM and or Lab 50 machine until they are imported or deleted 185 File Selection Input Media Network CT 1 Folder Apm 265 O0rder Select File name 2108510694 C10851069b 0851069 0851069d 0851069e 0851069F 2108510699 C0851070a C10851070b 20851070C C10851070d 0851070e 0851070F 0951070 IV Digital Image Auto Correction Digital Camera a Sr l Digital Image Auto Correction Others Normal Print YES OK NO Cancel Noritsu File Selection Window The name of the order folder tells you several things about the order For example lets reference order 0851070 e 085 indicates that it is from APM 7285 due to folder naming limitations by Noritsu only the last 2 digi
11. Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Select the Add Printer option In the menu at the right select Agfa D Workflow Interface In the Printer Name field enter DWF or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Agfa D Workflow option in the top left corner to display the options for this 2 2 a iS a interface rr File Help Printer Configuration DWE Agfa d workflow Interface Printers E General Settings DWF Agfa d workflow Interface DB45 Path ci APM_FOLDERS agfa_db Sy Add Printer Debug Mode False Dealer Name Dealer Number dWorkflow host Machine ID Machine Type Operator Name Operator Number 0 Connection port 5001 Purge complete orders False Back print template ORDER Ye_ ITEM _ PRODUCT FINISH OTY Glossy Surface Sp General Print Settings Matte Surface 2 a Print Station Settings Products Printed Here Index Book Settings Product Matrix All Fulfillments Settings Canvases 23 products configured a Kiosk Settings N Fulfillment 1 Express N Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail ut APM Add On Components Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 142 Agfa D Workflow Options e DB45 Path This setting should not be changed This contains the path for the necessary D Workflow folder file structure to interface with D Workflow properly Def
12. Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the Photogize machine across the local area network and vice versa 2 The products and auto harvest option need to be setup prior to the APM or Lab 50 setup for the XConnect interface 3 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot on below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options IV Enable this fulfillment mESAM aaaea This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent st Setting Up Photogize XConnect The first step in setting up Photogize and the APM Lab 50 software to interface with one another is to setup the XConnect feature in Photogize This feature allows for 3 party applications such as the APM to connect and send orders to Photogize On the Photogize main screen click on the Orders folder on the left Click on the Account Properties button It s the button with the A and the hammers on it In the Account Properties window select the XConnect tab Check the Auto Harvest b
13. sufficient PCN Name aR Border Size Standard 1 5000 Example 4 inches should be entered as 4 0200 instead of PEE EE ee E EEN Biso 4 0000 Width Inches 599000 10 The Orientation field allows the lab to set the orientation Ean iE prior to getting to the Konica software thus saving the operator time by not having to rotate images Set the orientation for each size as needed 11 Click OK once completed 12 Repeat the above steps for each size Adding Editing a Product Channel Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Deleting a Product 1 Select the product to delete and highlight it 2 Click on the Delete button Assigning Products to the Konica DPOF Interface After the Konica DPOF interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 1 Click on the Products Printed Here option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multip
14. 000909009090000 KANERION PX MOOOOGOO0CC6CEs K00000000000m han Add Text Screen Once the image has loaded and the text appears use the buttons to the right to move the text around on the template Use the Color Font and Size buttons to adjust the text appearance You can also use the Edit Text button to change the text entered Note Itis not recommended to place text at the edge of a template By doing so any cropping that is done may cut off a portion of the text To make additional changes to the text click on the More Options button Select the alignment of the text by pressing the Left Center or Right buttons to align the text within the background Toggle the Text Background or Text Shadow boxes to show or hide these options Choose Previous Options to return to the main text editing screen Press the Done button once you have completed all text changes Adjust Text Alignment Left Comer Right Text Background More Options Text Editing Screen Additional Text Options Once the image and text have been added to the card and you are satisfied with the way it looks press the Finished button 36 The Order Options screen allows you to increase or decrease the quantity you would like to order of the exclusive card you have Product Quantity created by pressing the or buttons You can also increase by Erter he qvanty of 75 x 7 Exclusive product
15. Add Border Add Text C Ph 050 jpg MRAR Sooo lt a 4x6 5x7 8x10 8x12 11x14 12x18 16x20 16x24 x24 gt Magnify and Edit Screen Description of Features Use this button to return to the Photo Index screen once editing has been completed Use the View Next and View Previous buttons to view other photos in the image set Use the Rotate Photo button to change the orientation of the image in 90 degree increments Use the rest of the buttons to edit your photo These features are described in detail on the following pages Use these buttons to increase or decrease the number of prints you would like to order for the photo A list will appear on the left containing the print sizes you have selected for this photo Use the arrows to the left and right oe Se Ye of the size listing to view more print sizes for ordering Remove Red Eye Select the Remove Red Eye button on the Magnify and Edit screen to bring up the red eye correction options By default the Auto Correct Tools tab is displayed 22 To automatically adjust red eye in a print Z Touch the Auto Remove button to remove red eyes from your photo AF Then use the Take Out More Less Red buttons to fine tune the correction if necessary Wi 1 Press the Auto remove all red eyes from photo button to automatically fix the red eyes in your photo 2 Use the Take out more red or Take out less red buttons to make further adjustments 3 When finished pr
16. Printers a PIC Fug Fronser PIC 2 6 avai T Send peocucts to different painters based on the fulllment express pickup mal Sy Add Printer T Send products to different panters bared on thai suface iglogty mattel ww Product Matrix Al Sufiiments TI 4x 12 Panccamc Print 4 5x6 Print SxS Print 5x6 Print ae Kiosk Settings r Fulfillment 1 Express a Fulfilment 2 Pick Up b a Fulfillment 3 Mai s Le APM Add On Components A Printer Configuration 2 Products Printed Here Screen SelupWizard F aio xj fle Hep Printer Configuration CONT Printers z z npr p oe en TIN Axis Piet PIC Fuj Fanner PIC 6 gt AS 2003 0x10 Prt 4007 4 6 GC 400G x10 GC Pic Fup Frorias PIC 2E GOUT 446 Flat Cards FIC Fup Froris PIC 26 AlO Wall Ae 6003 x10 Wall An FIC Fug Froetiee PIC 26 p Sekine z Generel Print Setengs a Print Stator Settings j Products Printed Mere Index Book Settings ss Product Matix Al Fufiiments a S l A Fulfillment 1 Express a Fulfilment 2 Pick Up E Fulfilment 3 Hail ABE APH Add On Components A Printer Configuration Product Matrix Screen 161 Appendix E Fuji PIC PRO The Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 PRO interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format a Fuji machine running the PIC PRO software version 2 6 can accept and pri
17. repeat for each matrix 4 When you are finished save the settings by selecting the File menu then Save Congratulations Your printer is now configured to work with the APM software SetupWizard oj xj File Help Printer Configuration Product Matrix Printers By HotFolder Prn1 Hotfolder Interface 2006 3x5 HotFolder Prm1 Hotfolder Interface 2011 4x5 HotFolder Prn1 Hotfolder Interface 2012 4 5 33 HotFolder Prn1 Hotfolder Interface 2001 4x6 HotFolder Prni Hotfolder Interface 2002 5x7 HotFolder Prn1 Hotfolder Interface 2003 8x10 HotFolder Prn1 Hotfolder Interface 2010 8x12 HotFolder Prn1 Hotfolder Interface 2004 1114 HotFolder Prn1 Hotfolder Interface 2005 12218 2211 20x24 Settings 4 General Print Settings EA Print Station Settings A Products Printed Here a5 Product Matrix Fulfillment 2 Pick Up pa ow Product Matrix Fulfillment 3 Mail _ 5 Kiosk Settings a Printer Configuration Product Matrix Screen 99 General Print Settings If the APM is printing the orders locally instead of through Lab 50 you can adjust several settings These settings will apply only to the fulfillments that are assigned to print locally on the APM itself To access these settings 1 Click on the Printer Configuration option in the Category Navigation Pane Click on the General Print Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane e Print separator p
18. 138 Q What is a configuration page and how do I print one A The configuration page shows all of the printer settings It can also tell you when the printer was last calibrated what type of setup the printer thinks it has as far as media types and sizes in the trays what network settings are configured and other useful information for general support and troubleshooting purposes Support will ask for this page to be printed out when problems occur to help narrow down what may be causing the issue To print one put Letter or A4 paper in Tray 1 in the long edge feed orientation Next use the arrow keys to select Print Pages on the menu screen and then select Configuration The printer will then produce 3 5 pages of configuration settings which may be scanned or faxed to support General Scanner Troubleshooting Q When a customer tries to scan the screen says that the scanner cannot be detected A Check that the scanner is plugged in and turned on If the error still appears try to scan using the scanner driver outside of the software If it does not scan there it may be a hardware issue and or the incorrect scanner driver is installed If the scanner works using the driver then it means that the incorrect scanner model is chosen in the Add On Components gt Scanner section of the Setup Wizard Please see Chapter 6 for help changing the model selected in the Setup Wizard Q How do I calibrate the scanner A Calibration and co
19. 20 99 Back button Once a plan has been chosen select Gold Membershi 2 Q Continue You will then be prompted to enter and 2 Offer Goid Mameta Pars verify the email address associated with the new es 9 99 i account Ingo s Exclusive Beta Membership Club Aaa io manba oriy apaci ct 2 If the membership plan you selected is not free then 9 99 you will be taken to the Order Summary screen as outlined later in this chapter to complete and purchase an order for the selected membership plan Once the Continue order is complete you can return to the main Photo Membership Selection Screen Finale Account screen and login to your new account If you do not wish to sign in to or create an account choose the No Thanks button to continue on with the order process After any of these options have been selected you will be taken to the Insert Media screen Inserting Media The APM accepts the following types of digital storage media e CD ROM oa Please insert your media into the appropriate slot then press Continue e CompactFlash e DVD ROM e Memory Stick e Mini SD e MSDuo e MSPro e Multimedia Card e RS MMC e Sandisk U3 e Secure Digital e S Media a O 0O Q Continue Import images Import images 3 i Photos from from a Bluetooth from an infrared can photos e USB Device wireless device device Photo Finale e Other media types using adapters Insert Media Screen Note Sand
20. 300 19 products configured Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 151 C8 Settings Options e Hot Folder Change the path to the C8Spool folder on the machine with the C8 software installed The default value is FRONTEND C8spool e Printing Mode In this field select Fuji C8 if it is not chosen already e Device Name Enter the unique name of the C8 machine in the field Default is SPISRGB e ID Enter the same name as entered in the Hot Folder section Default is APM e Resizing Method Select how you would like the printer to crop the images The choices are FILLIN FITIN or NONE The default is FILLIN e Leave the Wait for print Indicate success on timeout and Timeout Seconds as is unless otherwise instructed for troubleshooting purposes PrintPix NC 1000 Settings Options e Hot Folder This should be setup to match the settings in the FujiFilm Printpix NC 1000 application The default path is C APM_Folders Fuji_NC1000_Hotfolder e Printing Mode In the field select Fuji NC 1000 if it is not chosen already e Device Name Enter NC 1000 in the Device Name field Default is SP1ISRGB e ID Enter the same name as entered in the Hot Folder section Default is APM e Resizing Method Select how you would like the printer to crop the images The choices are FILLIN FITIN or NONE The default is FILLIN e Leave the Wait for print Indicate success on timeout and Timeout Seconds as is unless otherwise i
21. 4x 5 5 Print 4x 7 Print 4 General Print Settings a Print Station Settings fae Products Printed Here Index Book Settings s7 Product Matrix All Fulfillments P Kiosk Settings N Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail ue APM Add On Components Printer Configuration 4x 8 APS Print 4x 9 Print 4x 10 Print 4x 12 Panoramic Print 4 5 x 6 Print 5x 5Print 5 x 6 Print 5x 6 5 Print 5x 7 Print 5 25 x 7 25 Envelope Print 5x 7 5 Print 5 x 14Print 6 x 6 Print 6x8 Print 6 x 9 Print 6x 12Print 7x 10 Print 8 x 8 Print 8x 9 Print IOODODOOOOOUE I KIOL 8 x 10 Print _ 8x 12Print Ry 14 Drint j Products Printed Here Screen option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments KL Li ax e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Fulfillments option in the Primary Na
22. Click on the Pickup Locations option in the Primary Navigation Pane This screen offers the option for customers to pick up their order at an alternate location Up to 99 pickup locations may be offered Adding a Pickup Location 1 Click on the Add button to add an additional pickup location 2 Enter the contact information and the APM ID of that location and hit Return when complete 3 Repeat for each location that you wish to add edit or delete 66 Pickup Locations Location Name Add Kara s Scrapbooking Comer New York Helo Photo Center West Chester APM ID fi 234 optional Edit Name Kara s Scrapbooking Corner Delete Address 367 Angel Parkway City NewYork State Province Ne Zip Postal Code 20045 Phone Number 878 3895512 Return Pickup Locations Screen Adding a Pickup Location Pricing Model The APM offers two different pricing models for Image CDs and Index Prints You can edit the pricing option for both of these products by clicking on the Pricing Model option in the Primary Navigation Pane e Flat Rate The customer is charged a flat amount no matter how many CDs and or Index Print pages are required to complete the order e PerCD Per Print The product price is determined based on the number of CDs or Index Prints required to complete the order This is calculated by the software and presented to the customer as the price for that particular product Pricing Model CD Pricing ie Flat ra
23. Exclusive 7 00 in 5 00 in 300 8x10 Exdusive 10 00 in 3 00 in 300 4x8 Exclusive 8 00 in 4 00 in 300 8x12 Exclusive 12 00 in 8 00 in 300 Passport Photo 6 00 in 4 00 in 300 4x6 Flat Card 6 00 in 4 00 in 300 5x7 Flat Card 7 00 in 5 00 in 300 8x 10 Poster 10 00 in 8 00 in 300 8x12 Poster 12 00 in 8 00 in 300 8x8 Scrapbook 8 00 in 8 00 in 300 12x12 Scrapbook 12 00 in 12 00 in 300 Product Rendering within the Fuji JobMaker Interface Adding Editing Products Click on the Add button or select an existing product and click the Edit button Select the product from the Product drop down menu Enter the Width and Height in inches Ex 4x6 Width 6 00 and Height 4 00 Enter the DPI in the field labeled DPI The default value is 300 In the Code field enter the Fuji product code that will be used to print this product In the Bordered Code field enter the Fuji product borders code If this field is left blank the software will use the information in the Code field Click OK to save the settings for that product 8 Repeat for each product as needed St IS a aS e Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders
24. JE APM Add On Components eS Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 147 Copal Copal Dye Sub Printer Debug Mode Time Out Seconds E Printer Settings 1 Printer ID 0 Color Ribbon Size 4x6 10x15cm Print Smaller Prints True Use Color Correction False Sharpness Brightness Contrast Saturation Red Balance Green Balance Blue Balance Copal Dye Sub Printer General Settings Copal Dye Sub Printer Options e Debug Mode The default setting is false This should only be set to true for troubleshooting e Time Out Seconds The default setting is 120 seconds This value should not be changed e Printer ID The ID as shown on the LED display of the printer itself e Color Ribbon Size Use the drop down menu to select the ribbon size that is loaded in the printer e Print Smaller Prints If the Color Ribbon Size option is setup for 6x9 and you want to use this printer to also print 4x6s set this option to True This is not as fast as 4x6s using the windows driver but it will work It will also cost more per print as well e Use Color Correction To manually apply color correction to all prints set to True Default is False Change the Sharpness Brightness Contrast Saturation Red Balance Green Balance and Blue Balance as desired If more than one printer is connected repeat the above steps for Printer Settings 2 but change the Printer ID on the printer and in the Setup Wizard so it is a d
25. Note Each card has a unique ID Creative Collections Click on the APM Add On Components option in the Category Navigation Pane Click on the Creative Collections option in the Primary Navigation Pane Click on the Enable Creative Collections Add On checkbox at the top of the Customization Pane Click on a template in the list to view a thumbnail image of that template To enable disable a template double click on it in the list By default all installed templates are enabled To view a list of installed package prints click on the Package Prints option and any given template may be available in more than one size so when enabling or disabling templates please be sure to enable the card in all sizes that are available for the given template Adding Creative Collections Products Creative Collections products are treated as unique products in the APM Software In other words a 4x6 print and a 4x6 Card are two separate products However the process for adding them as an option in one or more fulfillments is the same as adding regular print products within the Setup Wizard Additionally this means that each will need to be accounted for when configuring a printer interface 88 M Enable Creative Collections Add On Enabled ID Name Wedding 5x Wedding 428 Wedding 4x6 Graduation_5x Graduation_4x8 Graduation_4 6 Its4Boy 5x Its4Boy_ 4x8 ItsABoy_4x6 Its4Girl_ 5x lf Its4Girl_4x8 i ie pase A
26. Step 3 Infrared Devices If you have an Infrared reader installed on the kiosk and configured in Windows you can enable the APM software to accept images from Infrared devices Press the Import Images from an Infrared device button and follow the instructions to send images from your Infrared device to Import images the APM You may need to consult your device s instruction manual for details on transferring ec images from your device Infrared Import Button Send Photos via Infrared Send photos from your infrared device to the APM Press Done when you have transferred all the desired photos Done Transferring Photos Send Photos via Infrared Screen Photos from Photo Finale The ability to download online collections albums from Photo Finale Web accounts has been Photos from added in version 7 0 of the APM software To do this press the Photos from Photo Finale button Sno DIDAS to begin the process Note retailers can customize the text of this button in the APM s Setup Wizard Import from Photo Finale Button The next screens present the option to log into your Photo Finale account Once logged into an account a list will be presented containing all of the online collections available in the account Place a check mark next to the album you wish to order photos from and then press the Continue button While you may only select one collection at a time you can use the Add More Photos options outlined
27. This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting up the PDF Printer Interface Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the PDF Printer Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 224 3 Assigning printable products to the interface Editing the PDF Printer Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer m o YS Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch Once you have the Setup Wizard open gt fe eS a pa Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select PDF Printer In the Printer Name field enter PDF or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created PDF Printer Interface option in the top left corner to display the options for th
28. While the calibrations steps for each densitometer will vary included below are the standard steps to calibrate the printer using the X Rite 11 Photo LT densitometer sold by Lucidiom To perform a calibration using the X Rite i1 Photo LT densitometer a ee 11 12 13 14 15 16 Begin by confirming that you have plain 201b letter size paper in tray one of the printer This should not be glossy paper The unit is hard coded to print this page on plain media and the use of glossy paper for the calibration page may cause print quality issues Click START ALL PROGRAMS FIERY COMMAND WORKSTATION 4 Choose Log in Log out from the Server menu CW54 will start searching for Fiery servers Choose the device that matches the correct IP Address Bq ColorWise Pro Tools fo amp Click the Login button next to the Fiery name to she Siecle MINILABS800_3640A3 establish the connection A Select the Administrator option and then click san Log In Calibrator Color Editor Profile Manager Color Setup Choose Manage Color from the Server Menu Click on Calibrator ColorWise Pro Tools Window For Select Method choose ES 1000 Spectrometer from the drop down menu For the Screen Setting choose 12x6 Dot Screen from the drop down Calibrator MINILAB9800 369083 bes menu Standard Expert 1 Select Measurement Method Click Print EFi Spectrometer ES 1000 On the Print Options Menu keep the default
29. administrators The Admin Jr passcode gives operators access to limited functionality such as restarting a machine reprinting an order or calibrating the touch screen but it does not Receipt Settings Receipt Settings V Check here to print receipt at kiosk Receipt Header Text Touch Prints APM Number of receipts to print with each order 1 Receipt Settings Screen Passcodes amp Order Limits Admin Access Method Single Hidden Button Default Two Touch Hidden Button Passcodes Passcodes must be between 4 and 9 digits in length 1234 Admin Jr Passcode 5678 Order Approval Passcode 1234 Admin Passcode Order Limits M Require minimum order amount of W Limit order amount to maximum of I Require approval for order amounts above Passcodes amp Order Limits Settings 70 provide access to the Setup Wizard or other sensitive admin functions e Order Approval Passcode This code is entered if the order exceeds a set amount or if your gifting products require store employee approval See below to set approval options e Require minimum order amount of When this option is enabled this will only allow orders that meet or exceed this amount to be ordered in the APM software If unchecked the minimum order amount is set to 0 00 which is also the default value when checked e Limit order amount to maximum of When this option is enabled this will limit order totals from exce
30. bold italic align 25 In the name enter a new name for the text 26 Inthe type enter text 27 Inthe ptS enter the size of the font 28 In the face enter the font to be used wi JINN gt lt item gt Note The font name has to match the font name in Windows and also has to be properly loaded into the machine 29 In the bold enter true or false depending on whether boldface will be used or not 30 In the italic enter true or false depending on whether italics will be used or not 31 For alignment of the text enter left center right in align 32 Between the gt lt enter the name of the txt created for the text as it was in the apmlang_custom xm file Example lt item name footer type text pts 10 face times new r roman bold false italic true align center gt txtThankYouFooter lt item gt 33 Repeat steps 22 31 for each line of new text created in the apmlang_custom xmiI file 34 Save the file and then open it in Internet Explorer to check for errors 240 Appendix S Replacing the CD Drive and Card Reader Prerequisites Tips Directions follow for the following hardware models APM 1000 1100 1200 2000 and 2700 Two Phillips screwdrivers are needed one for the larger screws and one Necessary Tools for the smaller ones that connect the parts internally Keep a cup or small container handy to collect all of the small screws APM 1000 and 1100 CD Drive amp Card Reader Re
31. c9 Pr A Print Station Settings plan ees OKIOOULLII 4x 10 Print engine Gg Products Printed Here 4x 12 Panoramic Print Index Book Settings 4 5 x 6 Print Product Matrix All Fulfillments C 5x 5Print 3 The checkboxes at the top of the sabe Sa 5x 6 5Print 5x 7 Print Customization Pane allow the 5 25 x 7 25 Envelope Print 5x 7 5 Print 5x 14Print 6 x 6 Print 6 x 8 Print ability to send one product to 5 s A P 6 x 9 Prin multiple printers based upon Eekan ex 12 Fulfillment 1 Express 8x 8 Prin either the fulfillment or the 5 s 5x5 Prnt y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up 5 5 ii i product finish y Fulfillment 3 Mail ee 8 x 9 Print ae APM Add On Components HOUOL JI IK CA Printer Configuration e If Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment fe Chesca thePodad Marix Products Printed Here Screen option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments REE e If Send products to different cx ae printers based on their surface is Praes i f checked the listing of products in Faama a ao ca the Product Matrix option will te Fat Carde GWU laS Fii Cah O 10 Wal aa 6003 Bx1 0 Wall Art DWF Agia d workflow iintedtace expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Settings _
32. then the customer will continue on to the Thank You screen Contact your regional sales representative for more information on the Back Lab Burner software suite The order is now complete Take your media and your receipt The screen indicates when the prints will be ready as does the receipt The receipt also includes the pick up location and an order number You can customize the on screen instructions and the receipt using the Setup Wizard Use the Place another order button to return to the intro movie If you do not press the button the software will automatically load the intro movie a few minutes after an order is placed Thank you for your order Please insert a blank CD D Thank you the order has been placed Please press the OK button Pick up your photos here tomorrow Place another order Q Disc Burning Screen Thank You Screen 19 Chapter 3 Prints Enlargements amp CDs For standard APM software the prints creative collections plus scanning passport and gifting modules are included with every APM license In this chapter we will cover the standard workflow for ordering prints enlargements and photo CDs DVDs Ordering Prints Enlargements amp CDs To begin an order for Prints Enlargements amp CDs l You have 2 photos PI ch rd the Continue select the Prints Enlargements amp CDs button on the a cbse titslabte Product Selection screen and then cho
33. 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent EEE Setting up the Fuji PIC PRO 2 6 Interface Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Fuji Frontier PIC PRO 2 6 Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 162 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable products to the interface Editing the PIC PRO 2 6 Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch oS oS Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Fuji PIC Frontier PRO 2 6 In the Printer Name field enter PIC PRO or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Fuji Frontier PIC Pro 2 6 option in the top left corner to display the options for this interface a H a FEE File Help Printer Configuration PIC PRO Fuji Frontier PIC Pro 2 6 Printers E Fuji Digital Pro Lab 2 6 General Settings PIC
34. APM A Yes it is definitely a good idea to periodically check Windows Update for any applicable updates for the operating system This can help with the overall performance of the system On the APM click Start gt Windows Update to check for current Windows updates APM Updates Q How often do I get APM updates A There are several major APM updates available each year and periodically there may be patches fixes and smaller updates All updates are announced in Lucidiom s electronic newsletter on the Lucidiom website and the user s forum They are available to download from the support web site once they are released Anti Virus Software Q Can I install anti virus software on the APM A The APM systems do not include any anti virus programs As with all computer systems it is highly recommended that you install and regularly update an anti virus program Please keep in mind you may need to make some adjustments to your anti virus configuration settings in order to allow the APM software suite to function properly Firewall Q Can I install firewall software on the APM A The APM systems do not include any firewall programs aside from the built in Windows Firewall which is disabled by default Firewalls can be installed on the system in the same fashion as Anti Virus Software but it is important to make sure that the appropriate ports and protocols such as file sharing FTP and any minilab and toner based printer pr
35. C FujiPrints OrderFiles to PIC390 ADPCPrints Most machines use PIC ADPCPrints 157 Order File Location Temp The UNC path of the temporary drop folder on the local machine printing the order Note If the APM or Lab 50 machine is called LAB then these settings should be changed from C APM XXXX Frontier Frontier Temp to LAB Frontier FrontierTemp Image File Location The UNC path of the image storage folder on the local machine printing the order Note If the APM or Lab 50 machine is called LAB then these settings should be changed from C APM XXXX Frontier Images to LAB Frontier Images PIC Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 E General Settings Order File Location Dest IPIC APDCPrints Order File Location Temp WAPM 1005 Frontier Fronter Temp Image File Location WAPM 1005 Frontier Images Wait for Printer Completion False Frinter Timeout Rush SOUrce Negative Number Prepend Purge Days Order Number Digits Use original file names for images Append surface to customer s name False Canvas 20 products Wait for Printer Completion If enabled will pause all APM or Lab 50 printing until the current order has been processed Recommended setting is False Printer Timeout The amount of time to wait for an order to finish printing before displaying an error communicating with the PIC This value is set to 0 by default and should not be changed Rush Should be set to 0 unless all APM
36. Fee og Per Scan Fee qa oo Sharpening Settings M Enable Scan Sharpening Amount 7425 ae Amount range is 1 200 default value is 125 Radius f pixels Radius range is 1 20 detauk value i 5 Threshold fi iawele Threshold range ts 0 50 default value is 1 Scanning Options Configuring DVD Cinema To Enable DVD Cinema on the APM 1 Click on the APM Add On Components option in the Category Navigation Pane 2 Click on the DVD Cinema option in the Primary Navigation Pane 3 Check Enable DVD Cinema Add On at the top of the Customization Pane 94 DVD Cinema W Enable DYD Cinema Add On Encoding Settings Region Format f NTSC f Pac Photo Archiving IY Archive a copy of the photos on the DYO Cinema Burn Settings f Bum Remotely via BackLab Burner Burn at APh Requires DWD Cinema On Site License DVD Cinema Options Note You will need to enable the DVD Cinema option in the Order Options of your selected fulfillments and set the product pricing in each of the fulfillments See diagram below for enabling the product in Order Options M Order Options V Image CD V White Borders V Special Instructions IV Index Print IY Shrink to Fit MV Auto Enhance All Photos M Glossy Matte M DYD Cinema Auto Red Eye Fix All Photos Encoding Settings e NTSC Used for countries that use the NTSC standard which include the United States Canada Mexico Japan South Korea and several other
37. License Agreement SEVERABILITY In the event any provision of this License Agreement is found to be invalid illegal or unenforceable the validity legality and enforceability of any of the remaining provisions shall not in any way be affected or impaired ENTIRE AGREEMENT This License Agreement and the accompanying Limited Warranty set forth the entire agreement between you and Lucidiom supersedes all prior agreements whether written or oral with respect to the Software and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties Lucidiom Inc 8100 Boone Boulevard Suite 310 Vienna Virginia 22182 www lucidiom com May 2009 Chapter 1 Introduction Get Started Here Thank you for purchasing an Automated Photo Machine APM from Lucidiom Inc This User s Guide provides you with everything you will need to setup customize and begin using the APM In the following pages you will find e An overview of the APM software suite e A walk through and explanation of the APM user interface e Instructions for configuring the APM to align with your business e Descriptions of supporting applications e Anoverview of the APM Network e Information on Additional Software Components e Guides to help you set up specific printer interfaces Please note the information found in this manual will not apply to every installation or setup and the software modules available on your APM may vary To purchase a component not currently available on y
38. Note For proper operation make weni Staton Stirs 7 Products Printed Mere certain that every printable product for EE rect naon u Paina each fulfillment is checked for all available columns A Fulfillment 1 Express a Fulfillment 2 Pick Up The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer I Fulfillment 3 Mail ait APH Add On Components interface 2 Printer Configuration 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Product Matrix Screen Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Agfa D Workflow interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 145 Appendix B Copal Dye Sub Printer The Copal Dye Sub Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to print orders generated from an APM to one or more Copal printers directly attached to the machine This interface enables special Copal capabilities that are not in the Windows driver Note If the Copal is only printing a single size then it is best to load the Windows driver and use the Windows printer interface instead of this one Prerequisites 1 The Windows driver for the Copal printer
39. PRODUCT FINISH OTY The following is a list of available case sensitive parameters that may be used e ORDER Order Number e PRODUCT Product Name e PROD_ ID Product ID e FINISH Finish option glossy matte e QTY Quantity e ORIG_FN Original File Name e ITEM Item Index e YEAR Current 4 digit year e MONTH Current 2 digit month e DAY Current 2 digit day e FNAME Customer first name e LNAME Customer last name e PHONE Customer phone number Create Order Subfolder When this is set to True each order is placed in its own folder within the Hot Folder location If it is set to False all of the images will be placed directly into the Hot Folder Order Subfolder Suffix The suffix to add to the order folder name when the Create Order Subfolder setting is set to true This is usually left blank Copy Order XML File Indicates whether to include a copy of the original xml file to the Hot Folder The default value is false Duplicate for Quantity When this is set to True the software outputs multiple identical images when a customer orders more than one copy of a given print rather than one image with the QTY value tacked on to the end of the filename The default value is false Render Images This setting determines whether or not all the order images are rendered when being sent to the HotFolder Default is True 206 Rendering DPI Enter the desired rende
40. Primary Navigation Pane This screen allows for receipt customization and control over the number of receipts printed after order completion e Check here to print receipt at kiosk Used to enable disable printing the receipt at the kiosk This setting is enabled by default e Receipt Header Text Enter your customized receipt header text as you would like it displayed at the top of the printed receipt e Number of receipts to print with each order Set the number of receipt copies to be printed with each order Note For more advanced customization of the receipt file see Appendix R on Receipt Customization Passcodes amp Order Limits Click on the Passcodes amp Order Limits option in the Primary Navigation Pane Use this screen to set permissions for customers administrators and junior administrators You can also set minimum and maximum order amount values and change the method for accessing the Admin screens within the software e Single Hidden Button Allows access to the Admin screens by single tapping in the bottom left hand corner of the screen during the main animation This is enabled by default e Two Touch Hidden Button Allows access to the Admin screens by single tapping the bottom left hand corner then subsequently tapping the top right hand corner of the screen within two seconds during the main animation e Admin Admin Jr Passcode Use these fields to set passcodes for administrators and junior
41. Print 5 x 6 Print 5x 6 5 Print 5x 7 Print 5 25 x 7 25 Envelope Print 5x 7 5 Print 5x 14Print 6 x 6 Print 6x8 Print 6x 9 Print 6x 12Print 7x 10 Print 8 x 8 Print 8 x 9 Print Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the KF Futhinment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up roduct finish m Printer Configuration z C O O 0 m O 7 a lt ka D v 3 Ee Products Printed Here Screen 170 e If Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment is checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product SetupWizerd Ble tep Printer Configuration Printers Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for gi MasterFiex Gretag Mas terFiexD by Add Printer a oe tv Master lex Gielaa Mataf laD Aaa Re FOOR 610 Print each fulfillment is checked for all r 4001 46 GC wm ey 4003 8x10 GC Maste lex Gietag Mastert lex s mds EDDI 446 Fist Cards MasterFlex Gietag MasherF ked available columns Bel 0 Wi EDOR 8410 Wal Art MastesFlex Giotag MastesFlesd T
42. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch a SS I a Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Noritsu QSS HotFolder In the Printer Name field enter QSS or any name you wish to use ae 1 S 193 5 Click the Add button 6 Click on the newly created Noritsu QSS HotFolder Interface option on the top left to display the options for this interface set wir De File Help Printer Configuration QSS Noritsu QSS Hotfolder Interface Printers O General Settings E OSS Noritsu QSS Hotfolder Interface Folder c NoritsuQSSHotFolder Time Out Seconds Paper Fitting Flag CMS Flag Back Print 1 Order cORDER item ITEM Back Print 2 DD MM Y Surface Glossy 1 Surface Matte lt Success On Time Out True Render Images False Render DPI 300 i fi Settings Product Paper Sizes 1 product configured eq General Print Settings ga Print Station Settings g Products Printed Here Index Book Settings z7 Product Matrix All Fulfillments Product Paper Sizes Click this button to configure the mappings between kiosk product IDs and Noritsu QSS paper sizes i Kiosk Settings N Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail ate APM Add On Co
43. Selection screen Use the category tabs on the right to scroll through the available list of templates Choose the template you would like you use with your photos by selecting it If there are 6 or more categories available use the View More arrow buttons that will appear at the bottom of the tab list to scroll through additional categories Use the Back button to choose a different size or template category Once you have selected a template you will be taken to the Image Selection screen outlined in the next section 33 View a eA A All K 909 O Template Selection Screen Creating an Exclusive Card Product After a template has been selected you will be presented with a screen that shows an image of the exclusive card product as well as an area highlighted for image placement and in some cases text placement If you wish to select a different template press the Change Border button to return to the previous screen and choose a new template If you wish to change the orientation of the template between vertical and horizontal toggle the Rotate Border button To begin the exclusive card creation process simply touch or click the area that says Touch to Enter Photo Touch the photo and text areas to the left to enter text and select pictures Touch to Enter Photo Exclusive Card Template Screen The image selection screen will appear and display all of the images on your media Touch the image that you w
44. The default is 5001 This port must be properly configured or opened for D Workflow e Purge complete orders This should be set to True if deleting orders from the queue after they are processed by D Workflow is desired The default value is False 143 e Back print template This setting is used to specify the information that needs to be collected from the order data file and printed on the back of each print The default is ORDER _ ITEM _ PRODUCT oFINISH OTY The following is a list of available case sensitive parameters that may be used e ORDER Order Number e PRODUCT Product Name e PROD_ ID Product ID e FINISH Finish option glossy matte e QOQOTY Quantity e ORIG_FN Original File Name e ITEM Item Index e YEAR Current 4 digit year e MONTH Current 2 digit month e DAY Current 2 digit day e FNAME Customer first name e LNAME Customer last name e PHONE Customer phone number e Glossy Surface The default value is 4 Please leave this setting as is e Matte Surface The default value is 2 Please leave this setting as is Product Setup within the Agfa D Workflow Interface Configuring Products Product Paper Widths 1 Select the Canvases line to highlight it the ronet Name rape wich area around Canvases will turn blue ne Cancel a rr 2 Click on the small button labeled that 11x14 Print appears on the right hand side Res nor i i i 4x6 Pri
45. This will bypass the image selection screens To continue to the next page make your selection s which will be indicated by a checkmark next to each of your choices then press the Continue button Selecting Individual Images You can select the Choose Photos option from the Quick Order screen to select individual images from your set In this case use the Photo Index screen to indicate the size and quantity of the photos to print Products are displayed according to the configuration of the APM and the print fulfillment option you have selected 20 Taaie E a 4x6 5x7 8x10 8x12 11x14 12x18 16x20 16x24 f Joo ROS o t i OCOCOC C C SNN Photo Index Screen Subtotal 0 00 Continue Description of Features 1 Touch an image to select it The image that is currently selected is highlighted green Press one of the three arrow buttons on the left to select all the images in that row To unselect all the images in a row press the arrow again 3 Press the Add 1 4x6 to each button to quickly add a quantity of 1 4x6 size to every image loaded for the order 4 Press the Reset Order button to clear the sizes selected for each image and begin again 5 Use these buttons to increase or decrease the number of prints you would like to order for the selected photo s A colored tab will appear underneath the image with the quantity and size currently marked for each photo Use the arrows to th
46. Updates connection notifies APM ProfitWatcher if any applicable software updates are downloaded and or installed via the Remote Update Application Configuration The Configuration connection is used to send a copy of the XML configuration on the APM kiosk to Lucidiom support for testing and backup purposes Support Used to transfer files to Lucidiom support for technical assistance EQ Gifting This connection is used to send gifting orders to Lucidiom s EQ Gift fulfillment center The connection is only used if the gifting add on component is setup properly Please contact Lucidiom support for information on creating a gifting fulfillment account APM Dispatcher Connections Exit 2005 10 31 09 40 46 PM Closed connection to server apm apmnetwork com 2005 10 31 09 40 46 PM Copied file 1005_2005 10 31T 12 17 52_registration xml to Server apm apmnetwork com 2005 10 31 09 40 44 PM Starting to copy file 1005_2005 10 31T12 17 52_registration xml to Server apm apmnetwork com 2005 10 31 09 40 44 PM Connected to server apm apmnetwork com 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM Connecting to server apm apmnetwork com 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM Support Starting polling 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM PS Status Starting polling 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM Configuration Starting polling 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM Updates Starting polling 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM Registration Starting polling 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM Stat
47. Wal An GOOI 8x10 Wall Art CO Fup CO Prevx NC 1000 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane Settings 2 For each product listed click on the Sie mentee ote F Products Preted mere Printer column and select the Fuji pee PARS C8 PrintPix NC 1000 interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product 8 Riosk settings Matrix option repeat for each matrix E reiatmnent 91 press BP ruittiment 2 Pick up 4 To assign multiple products to a single E rottnet 031 printer right click anywhere in the ABE APH rad ou components Customization Pane and use the Sap Pee coafossuosa context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all Product Matrix Screen unassigned formats to 155 Appendix D Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 The Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format a Fuji machine running PIC 2 6 can accept and print This interface also works with version 3 0 of the PIC software Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the PIC machine across the local area network and vice versa Note If a firewall is enabled on one or more of the machines it may need to be reconfigured to let each machine modify and write files to the other The Fuji Machine must have the ability to pull files from the APM and or Lab
48. ae Summer 2008 My day at the park 5 photos Summer 2008 My sister za za My best friend 6 photos e March s 26 s L 2009 z Summer 2008 Our day at the beach 5 photos Summer 2008 Summer School 4 photos White Screen 11 nhotns Date Range Screen Folder Select Screen 8 Press the Continue button once all the images you wish to add to the DVD slideshow product have been selected AT Next on the DVD Frame Selection Screen you can select from various frames to give your slideshow a theme or press the No Frame button if you don t want to include a frame The frame will appear as a border around the images when the slideshow is played There are a number of frames available for multiple occasions Once you have chosen a frame press the Continue button Otherwise hit Back to return to the Image Multi Select screen You will then be presented with the DVD Options screen The screen offers several options that can be selected to create a customized DVD slideshow product These options include e Menu Background The background to use for the main DVD menu e Show Style Select from a variety of photo transition styles to use for the slideshow e Music Choose from various music tracks to be played on the DVD If sound is enabled a preview of each track will play e Show Speed This determines how long each photo appears in the slideshow Select a DVD Cinema Frame if de
49. an order priority type matches the setting specified in this field the order will be sent to the path specified as the DKS Alternate Priority Path e Primary and Secondary Priority Cutoff and Path For each of the three fulfillments these settings are explained in the Setting Priorities section below Unless there are specific time sensitive or print count requirements in the order then the priorities can all be set to normal and with a print cutoff of 0 e Back Print Line 1 Template and Back Print Line 2 Template Used to specify the desired back print format using the case sensitive parameters listed below The following is a list of available case sensitive parameters that may be used e ORDER Order Number e PRODUCT Product Name e PROD_ ID Product Id e FINISH Finish option glossy matte e QTY Quantity e ORIG_FN Original File Name e ITEM Item Index e YEAR Current 4 digit year e MONTH Current 2 digit month e DAY Current 2 digit day e FNAME Customer first name e LNAME Customer last name e PHONE Customer phone number e Glossy Index and Matte Index Set these options to 0 and 1 respectively so that they are in line with the default settings on the DKS e Debug Mode If after changing all of the settings the KIS DKS printer interface does not work come back to this screen and set this to True The default value is false 217 e Products Configured This is used to
50. bE Flat Conds ca Korien Konica DPOF Interface printed products to the printer SAN Wal An EDOS 8010 Wal Ast Korica Korica DPOF Intesiace interface Settings 1 Click on the Product Matrix All sp Gerai Prnt Sting a Print Staton Settings 7 Proaucts Printed Here Fulfillments option in the trden Bock Sets Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Konica DPOF interface from the gt a drop down menu Br urttenene 2 Pickup 3 If there is more than one Product pm ma Matrix option repeat for each ee matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a Produce Matic Seren single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 177 Appendix H Noritsu DPOF The Noritsu DPOF interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into the same order structure as a Noritsu CT 1 CT 2 machine with auto print channel and quantity mapping Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the Noritsu machine across the local area network and vice versa 2 On the Noritsu machine the necessary print channels need to be setup prior to the APM Lab 50 setup This includes separate channels for glossy matte finishes 3 The Noritsu machine needs to be on Version E or higher 4 If Lab 50 is not prese
51. change your mind you can choose the No Border symbol in the lower right corner to remove the border Products ordered for this photo rer rl amp rPoee re Choosing a Colored Border Color Border Applied Add Text Press the Add Text button from the Magnify and Edit screen to add text directly to your photo Use the on screen keyboard to enter text then press the Apply Text button ck m l rites a well wie rie Sy oe td i ge Se Please enter your tex pply Text to continue Add Text Screen af Please use the buttons below to adjust your text Press More Options to see Please use the buttons below to adjust your text Press More Options to see 5 additional options Press Done to go back to the main screen _ additional options Press Done to go back to the main screen gt Left Center Right ro Background rio Shadow Previous Opbons Moving Editing Text on Photo More Options Text Alignment and Shadow Once the image has loaded and the text appears use the buttons to the right to move the text around on the image Use the Color Font and Size buttons to adjust the text appearance You may also use the Edit Text button to change the text entered Note It is not recommended to place text at the edge of an image By doing so any cropping that is done may cut off a portion of the text To make additional changes to the text click on the More Options button
52. click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 191 Appendix J Noritsu QSS HotFolder The Noritsu QSS HotFolder interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format the Noritsu QSS Hot Folder software which is an available option from Noritsu can accept and print Note This interface has been superseded by the Noritsu DPOF printer interface It is highly recommended to use the DPOF interface in place of the QSS Hotfolder interface it provides greater control over order placement and processing Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 need to be able to see the Noritsu QSS HotFolder machine across the local area network and vice versa In the Noritsu QSS HotFolder software it is required to enter in the IP Address of the Noritsu Printer and the Hot Folder Directory which should be the same path as the order output folder of the APM or Lab 50 machine amp Noritsu Hot Folder File Edit Tools Help 055 31 Machine Type fass 31 Vers fi 0 303 IP Address Baa ist ia iA mee Browse s Hot Folder Directory Hot Folderi Browse mo Printer Status Status idling Print Disabled Magazine A Width 3 50 EF in Paper Left 787 feet Paper Info Magazine B Width 5 00 KA in Paper Left 394 feet STE CD BF Temperature 38 5 38 5 38 6 HDD Left 3000 M Bytes Image Types JPEG BMP
53. code that will be used to Name eno ePi i print this product Cancel 8 Enter C in the Color field an 12 00 a 9 Set the Crop field to True Height fa 00 Units 10 Leave the Crop code DPL faon blank Optimize Iv 11 If a separate code is used Retouch jo Orient fe C EOE true rode ext 2B jo Code ext 2 color for borders enter the code in the Borders Code field ae If this field is left blank the software will use the information in the Code field 12 Click OK to save the settings for that product 13 Repeat for each product needed Adding a Product and Rendering within PIC 2 6 Interface Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Deleting a Product 1 Select the product to delete and highlight it 2 Click on Delete 3 Repeat for each product 4 Click OK when finished Assigning Products to the Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 Interface After the Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 1 Click on the Products Printed Here option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a c
54. configure the paper size user for each product See the Product Setup section of this appendix for detailed instructions Setting Priorities The DKS Interface allows for setting up priority queues for each fulfillment based on the number of prints There is a Primary and Secondary Priority for each of the three fulfillments as well as a priority setting based on the number of prints To set the primary priority 1 Use the drop down menu on the far right of the field for Express Primary Priority Pickup Primary Priority and or Mail Pickup Priority and set the desired priority The options are not set high normal low hold The orders that are set to fall into the priority path category based on the number of prints will be sent to the location set in DKS Path 2 Set the value for the number of number of prints to differentiate between Priority and Secondary prints so that an order will either go into the Priority or Secondary Queue for the given fulfillment based on how many prints are in the order There is a setting for each fulfillment Express Prints Cutoff Pickup Prints Cutoff and Mail Prints Cutoff The default is 150 If all prints are supposed to go to the same queue no matter how many prints are ordered set the number in this field to 0 all prints will go to the DKS Path 3 To setup a secondary priority use the drop down menu on the far right of the field for Express Secondary Priority Pickup Secondary Priority and or Mail Sec
55. connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options V Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting Up the D Workflow Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the D Workflow Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable products to the interface Editing the D Workflow Interface Settings To configure the APM or Lab 50 software for D workflow make sure a keyboard and mouse are attached then 141 Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the passcode default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch PS eS
56. default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer oS e Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch Once you have the Setup Wizard open OS a a meS at APM Add On Components Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Fuji C8 PrintPix NC1000 In the Printer Name field enter Fuji C8 or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Fuji C8 PrintPix NC 1000 option in the top left corner to display the options for this SetupWizard File Help Printer Configuration Printers a C8 Fuji C8 PrintPix NC 1000 Sy Add Printer L Settings 4 General Print Settings a Print Station Settings g Products Printed Here Index Book Settings z7 Product Matrix All Fulfillments ee Kiosk Settings N Fulfillment 1 Express N Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail da ph x CA Printer Configuration C8 Fuji C8 PrintPix NC1000 Printing Mode Device name ID Resizing method Wait for print Indicate success on timeout Timeout Seconds Configure Product Channels FRONTEND C8Spool Fuji C8 SP 1iSRGB APM FILLIN False True
57. digit year e MONTH Current 2 digit month e DAY Current 2 digit day e FNAME Customer first name e LNAME Customer last name e PHONE Customer phone number Render Images This option will pre render all images before they are sent to the printer providing the correct aspect ratio and border settings Recommended setting is True Default is False Net Order Compatibility Set to True only if you want to send orders to the Noritsu printer in NetOrder mode Note This also assumes that NetOrder Mode is enabled on the minilab Supports Duplexing Enable this setting if your Noritsu printer supports duplexing This feature is only available in DPOF version 1 7 of greater and the printer hard must support his functionality Debug Mode If after changing all the settings the Noritsu DPOF interface does not work come back into this screen and set this to True Default is False GEN CRT VER VUQ VNM VUQ VNM ATR VUQ VER and GEN REV These fields should be left to their default setting GEN CRT NAME This field is set to APM as default This does not need to be changed Use MOC for CD ROMS Used to send Image CD orders to the Noritsu for processing the order This is used with Noritsu software version 6 181 Product Setup within the Noritsu DPOF Interface Each product needs to be setup to match up the appropriate print channel setup in the Noritsu This must be done for each and every product that will go to
58. ese sa apes cst cc cea beseech otoeasta aa ees otene React aceeee edetica ara eueteeeeueetratidnn macau noerna eee ienneaeltandnon 16 Ordetoumma y amp Fay men Essai asses scale cots assigns ete Saar st ues E E E 17 Finalizing Ne OAOT eira a R EE A E E E A EO E EO EE E 18 Chapter 3 Prints Enlarcenvents amp CDS isi sacciessccssist ssatscasdeusiiss star a a r A E tacsnestesosseedsucstasddeseee 20 Ordering Prints Enlargements CDS sisisi inaianei esaea iaae oaa aE DaN Ea TOEREN EN 20 Selecting Individ al Iag essit ae S E E E E S Eaa Ea E N EAEAN E EE 20 Magnifying and Edite a PROtOncsri Ea N N 23 REMOVE RCO BVE E E ya iS tnecaesltatytat entausdetsstyasta tie wtanbatanteaunsuaasaceed seceuetasiabs 23 COP PROTO a en ne ERIS OAT OV a APG RE PTE E EN SARS ee ere reer rR heeeneee ane eae 24 Aduse olore en E ca essen tna E ha ucaoe ceca ae aueeaaen 26 AAL DOr ei gy weerey em cnr re Ot eR ONT REN Im DR POT Sm A ORT eT ee DC Te AE ran eT ene eran ee ere ee re re oe ae ees 27 A TEX a E E A E E E A ee ree are we R 27 Pant orler Up Sel OPIONS drra E EE E E ETO E TE 28 Chapter t Standard APM Cop Or cant sigs at uses san gusssics suk a Ea A E N 33 Bi ere a hie ol es ci 66 a Fol a 1b Kowererene epee over e E A ANTE REE TAP Ien POPPI VO mE Ch Pr eI RRA TE TORT 33 Creatine ait Exclusive ard TTOdUC scs tcseusesteesinsetescatistscacivaetsenyatetacunsstace A acueanueaet aemeaaveeriaaebies 34 pcan eg rint to P rit anid Stack Sennin zares E A A 37 Gemeg Scan
59. in the next section to download additional collections Note In order to use this feature the kiosks must be online and configured to synchronize with Lab 50 For more information on configuring these screens please see Chapter 6 If Lab 50 is not used in your location or the kiosks are not online these settings should not be enabled Enter your web site username and password amp X Select the photo collections to view Email Customer PhotoFinale com a Test Photos 17 photos Password ILovePhotos Summer 2008 22 photos Or 2 o J 5X 6J IX DOl oiz OCS ose Winter 2009 15 photos eX r WXX XNXX XXX 00 D No0 0000000000 K X zXx Xc X vVbXn Am X A oO Er Caps Lock Special I Space Clear Next N EN IN P Continue Continue Photo Finale Login Screen Collection Selection Screen 10 Please wait Your photos are transferring 29 Photo Download Screen Adding More Photos Once the media is detected the APM loads the photos from the media If you have multiple media cards with photos you can choose to add more photos from another media card by clicking on the Wait I have more photos to add button Your images will be copied onto the kiosk and you will then be prompted to remove the previous media card and insert the next one You can use any of the additional import options as stated previously rather than inserting a new media card I
60. internal APM Product ID Configuring Products 1 Select the Product Paper Sizes line to highlight it the area around Product Paper Sizes turn blue 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side 3 This will launch Product Paper Sizes window There are options to Add Edit or Delete each product 195 Adding Editing Products 1 To add a channel click on Add To edit select a size and click Edit This will launch the Product Paper Sizing window 2 Enter the correct Paper width and Paper length in mm 3 Enter the correct Render width and Render length in mm Unless otherwise stated these values can be the same as the Paper width and Paper length Note The Render settings are important to ensuring a proper print Please make sure these values are entered 4 Click OK to save the changes 5 Repeat for each product needed Deleting a Product 1 Select the size you wish to delete from the Product Paper Sizes window 2 Press the Delete button Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Product Paper Sizes 4 x Width mm 2001 4x 6 Print 102 mm
61. intro screen Enter the pass code default is 1234 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer oS e Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch Once you have the Setup Wizard open OS oe oe a Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Copal Dye Sub Printer In the Printer Name field enter Copal or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Copal Dye Sub Printer option in the top left corner to display the options for this interface REE File Help Printer Configuration Copal Copal Dye Sub Printer a Copal Copal Dye Sub Printer Debug Mode False Sy Add Printer Time Out Seconds 120 E Printer Settings 1 Printer ID 0 Color Ribbon Size 4x6 10x 15cm Print Smaller Prints True Use Color Correction False Sharpness 0 Brightness 0 Contrast 0 Saturation 0 Red Balance 0 Settings Green Balance 0 4 General Print Settings Blue Balance 0 a Print Station Settings a Products Printed Here Index Book Settings s7 Product Matrix All Fulfillments Printer Settings 2 Printer Settings 3 Printer Settings 4 i Kiosk Settings N Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail
62. it and play at 24 frames per second Customize Logo Customize Logo L Use Custom Logo in APM software and on receipt Recommended aspect ratio 5x3 Ghange Loga Customize Movie L Use Custom Intro Movie Required resolution 1024x768 Required FPS 24 Ghange Movie Customize Logo 3 Press the Open button in the dialog box after selecting your movie file Your custom movie will then be applied Fulfillment Selection and Print Settings You can configure the APM to provide up to three fulfillment options Each fulfillment can provide different products prices ssn and features based on the capabilities of your lab and your business objectives Selecting and Enabling a Fulfillment 1 Click on a Fulfillment Option 1 2 or 3 from the Category Navigation Pane 2 Check the Enable this fulfillment checkbox located near the top of the Customization Pane 3 Click on the Main Options option in the Primary Navigation Pane if it is not selected Kiosk Settings N Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail att APM Add On Components 2 Printer Configuration Three Fulfillments When configuring a fulfillment one of the most important steps is to consider where the products will be printed and or processed There are four settings to choose from 76 M Enable this fulfillment Print Settings 0 This fulfillment prints on a local printer connect
63. kiosk Calibrate Scanner Colors This will allow you to print out a calibration sheet on an attached express printer and then scan the sheet into the software to calibrate scanner colors This should only be used on older scanners that do not have calibration features in the Windows driver Create Passport ID Photos This option will allow direct access to the Passport creation workflow Admin Screen 2 of 3 APM Setup Wizard This option initializes the Setup Wizard which is the configuration tool for the APM Minimize the APM Software This will allow the operator to access the Windows desktop while the software is still running Quit APM software This will quit the kiosk portion of the software Restart the APM Machine The APM will restart after selecting and confirming this option Shutdown APM Machine The APM will shut down after selecting and confirming this option Admin Screen 3 of 3 Please select an administration function Q Reprint Order Q Calibrate Touch Screen Q Calibrate Scanner Colors Q Create Passport Photos Q Next Menu Save Restore Configuration Admin Screen 1 of 3 Please select an administration function Q APM Setup Wizard Q Minimize APM Software Q Quit APM Software Q Restart APM Machine Shutdown APM Machine Q Next Menu re Configuration Admin Screen 2 of 3 Please select an administration function Q Send Log Files to Support Q Send XML Configura
64. kiosk then it is best to make sure that two different Konica DPOF interfaces are setup and configured so that one handles Glossy and one handles Matte These two interfaces should also be setup to output to different folders 6 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options M Enable this fulfillment i see This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent nG Setting up the Konica DPOF Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to Konica DPOF Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable products to the interface 1 2 Editing the Konica DPOF Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server LS Se tee 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro Konica Konica DPOF Interface Primers cts Cere
65. minilab This requires setting up the Back Lab Image CD DVD Settings Bur Image CD DVD remotely via Back Lab Burner or supported minilab Bum Image CD DVD at APM Burner requires Lab 50 to receive Image CD DVD orders from the kiosk or if an Image CD DVD is to be burned through a supported minilab the correct Image CD DVD product needs to be configured in the Printer Configuration section Image CO DYD Content Settings IY Include copy of original photos on Image CD DYD in addition to edited photos M Archive non photo media files on Image CD DVD Only applicable if burned at APM avLmov mooy po mpeg mp4 wm aac acs ait att ast dive dy mpe m p gt way wma Please contact technical support to find Drive Settings CO R DVD F Drive Letter D CO AADYO R Drive Indes fo out if your minilab is supported for CO Capacity MB BAO DVO Capacity ME 4400 Image CD Settings Screen Image CD DVD burning and for more information on printer configuration e Burn Image CD DVD at APM The APM burns the Image CD or Image DVD locally at the kiosk Selected by default e Include copy of original photos on Image CD DVD When this option is enabled an Image CD or Image DVD will contain copies of the original unedited images in addition to the edited ones If unchecked only the edited versions of images will be burned to an Image CD DVD e Archive non photo media files If this option is enabled non image fi
66. needs to be properly installed and configured to print the correct size on the APM or Lab 50 machine 2 The Copal Printer needs to have the latest firmware installed 3 If more than one printer is installed then each printer needs to have a unique ID This is the number found on the LED display on the front of the printer 4 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options M Enable this fulfillment i see This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent nG Setting up Copal Dye Sub Printer Using Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the Copal Dye Sub Printer Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Assigning printable products to the interface 146 Editing the Copal Dye Sub Printer Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Z 3 Press the bottom left corner of the
67. only the photos that were selected for printing The pies Si 96 photos fon oni 2409 prices for uploading pictures to a Photo Finale account can be D 4 w Upload only the 1 photos selected for configured in the Setup Wizard RS ae n Once an option is selected and after all other order options Photo Finale Upload Option have been chosen you will be presented with a screen prompting for input of the email address associated with the Photo Finale account to which you wish to upload the images Use the keypad to type in the email address and select Enter If you have already signed into your Photo Finale account at the beginning of the ordering process you will not be prompted again to enter the email address If you do not have a Photo Finale account select the Do not have an account button You will then be presented with a screen giving two options You can choose the Sign Me Up button which will return you to the sign up page presented at the beginning of the ordering process and allow you to create a new account If you choose to sign up the current order will be cancelled Alternatively you can select the Cancel Option button to cancel the ordering of the EQ Upload option and proceed to the shopping cart Lastly choose the Return to Upload Options button to return to the screen prompting for the account email address Email Address Entry Screen No Account Screen Once the email address for the account has been entered y
68. photo Cancel changes and exit and exit Crop Photo Screen 25 Adjust Color Select the Adjust Color button on the Magnify and Use the buttons below to automatically enhance your photo s convert it to black and white or apply a sepia tone Edit screen to bring up color correction options The Enhance Photo screen allows you to adjust colors convert to sepia tones or convert a color image to black and white By default the Auto Correct Tools tab is displayed To automatically adjust color in a photo press the Enhance Photo Black and White or Sepia Tone buttons Manual Enhancement by Save changes Cancel changes ans and exit and exit For greater control over the colors in the image you can also make manual adjustments To do so select the Manual Correct Tools tab Use the Color Brightness and Contrast buttons to manipulate the image When finished press the Save changes and exit button to return to the Magnify and Edit screen Note To configure which of these options are available please refer to the chapter covering the Setup Wizard 5 Save changes Cancel changes and exit and exit Enhance Photo Screen Manual 26 Add Border Select the Add Border button on the Magnify and Edit screen to add a colored border to your image When this option is selected you are presented with a choice of colors Touch the desired color and the selection will be applied to your image If you
69. pressing Checkout the customer will be prompted to have a store employee approve the order this option is configurable in the Setup Wizard Enter Continue the passcode and press Enter code Gifting Quantity Screen Press the Continue button to finalize the order Please ask a store employee to approve your order Order Approval Window 44 DVD Cinema Add On Component The DVD Cinema component can be added to a Standard APM or to an EQ Pro APM The DVD Cinema allows customers to create a DVD slideshow featuring their i images transition styles and a choice of background music The DVD Cinema 7 i product may be played in any standard DVD player Note The images themselves can be burned to the disc as well and placed in a separate directory for archiving purposes See Chapter 7 for enabling this option a U hh DVD Cinema creation can take place either at the kiosk or can be sent to the lab for processing and burning via the Back Lab Burner software If you wish to burn the DVD Cinema discs at the APM you will need to purchase a burn at kiosk license Please contact DVD Cinema Button your regional sales representative for more information Creating a DVD Slideshow Once you have enabled DVD Cinema in the Setup Wizard the APM software will display options for customers to select the DVD Cinema option when placing an order There are two ways to create a DVD slideshow in the APM software 1 Select the DVD Cine
70. products are added and priced and you have enabled the Folio Add On option in the Setup Wizard the APM software will display options for customers to order EQ Pro products All EQ Pro products are available for ordering on the Product Selection screen A listing of the currently available EQ Pro products is as follows e Banners e Calendars e Envelopes e Flat Cards e Flip Books e Folded Cards e Mini Books e Note Cards e Notepads e Photo Books e Photo Book Covers e Poster amp Collages 49 e Proof Books e Scrapbook Pages From the Product Selection screen there are two ways to begin the creation of an EQ Pro product 1 Select a product category in the By Product tab 2 Select an occasion category in the By Occasion tab When the Product Selection screen loads it will default to the By Product tab displaying a panel of products that may be ordered Use the arrows to the right and left of the panel to navigate through the available products i Photo Books Mini Books Photo Book Notepads Folded Cards Note Cards Posters amp Covers Collages Q HN Eg h N l f a A wp yo E ne FlipBooks Proof Books Calendars Flat Cards Envelopes Scrapbook Banners Pages By Product Tab You can also select the By Occasion tab to see a panel of products specific to occasions such as holidays birthdays and weddings Use the arrows to the right and left of the panel to navigate through the ava
71. products to different BA Pte i Pr 3C J Notsu USS Hollokder Inter printers based on their surface is We Fla Cae SON AnS Flai Cade USS Nomie USS Hoe Irialace AO Wall Ast 6003 Bx 10 Wall Aa OSS Noritsu OSS Hotfolder Interface checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns A Fuliiiment 1 Fxpress y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up y Fulfillment 3 Mail The last step involves assigning the AB Aen Ad on Components CA Printer Configuration printed products to the printer interface 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Product Matrix Screen Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Noritsu QSS HotFolder interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix To assign multiple products to a single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 197 Appendix K Photogize XConnect The Photogize XConnect interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format the Photogize software version 2 1 or higher can accept and print
72. removes red eyes by selecting an area and pressing a button e Automatic Color Correction This feature provides single touch buttons to apply Image Enhancement Black amp White and or Sepia Tones e Manual Color Adjustment This feature provides slide bars for more refined control of Red Green Blue Brightness and Contrast e Cropping This feature allows customers to focus in on a particular section of their photo e Photo Borders Turns on off the options for adding colored borders to individual images e Text on Photo Turns on off the options for adding text to images e Copy Photo Turns on off the option to make a copy of any photo during the editing process Copying a photo allows a customer to apply different effects to the same image For example they may order one print of a photo in color and another in sepia Fulfillment Options and Order Settings Each fulfillment has several options for gathering information about your customers adding optional fees and configuring payment settings As an example for each fulfillment you can e Prompt the customer for contact information e Allow customers to select an order pickup location e Configure payment types and shopping cart features 80 After selecting a Fulfillment Option 1 2 or 3 from the Category Navigation Pane click on the Order Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane This screen allows you to configure customer information settings quick orde
73. settings should not be enabled To sign into an existing account select the Sign In Now button on the right hand side of the screen A keypad will then appear prompting for the email address of the account Once the email address has been entered press Log In to begin the ordering process Become a Member Today Already a im A membership plan allows you to J Save everyday with exclusive products prices and special produ i 0000000000001 Place kiosk orders faster y hd LOXWEXRITI YI UN U 000 TD i _ As GOTO KYLY Get started now p 7 er IIN ez Eo DEI No Thanks Photo Finale Account Screen Membership Email Screen If the customer does not have a Photo Finale account they may choose to sign up for a new account using one of the membership plans you have configured in Lab 50 The membership login functionality is useful to retailers as a means of tracking customer ordering behavior on an individual basis and it provides a quick and easy way to tie your online and in store promotions together without needing to configure the same settings on multiple machines Please select a membership option er eR NGI _ Share photos with friends and family D To create a new account select the Sign Up button The next screen that appears will give a list of available membership plans associated with the primary Lab 50 pecs to menbercety special dacounts account To return to the previous screen select the s
74. software in the following finished sizes 8Y2x11 6x6 4x4 Actual paper width is double the finished size as it is folded to make the final product The cover of the book is the first page the entire book is made of the same paper The binding this type of book uses is called saddle stitching which requires a special stapler that is deep enough to reach the middle crease of the page 117 Calendars e Available in the software in the following sizes 12x12 12x18 11x8 A4 landscape and A5 landscape e Customers can enter custom text to personalize the days of the week with birthdays and anniversaries e All sizes print out with pictures on one page and the calendar portion on another with the exception of 12x18 which prints everything on one page 12x18 calendars are printed so that they must be turned over on the long edge when the page is flipped to correctly display the months in sequence Photo Folio Products Folded Cards e Available in horizontal 7x5 and vertical 5x7 formats e Use pre scored 10x7 paper e Available in a variety of categories and themes to fit any occasion Other Photo Folio Products e Banners 10x30 12x36 30x10 36x12 e Envelopes 5 25x7 25 e Notecards 3x5 e Notepads 6x9 e Posters and Collages 11x14 12x18 e Scrapbook Pages 5x5 6x6 8x8 10x10 12x12 118 Tray Configuration The EQ 9800 9850 comes with 5 trays standard in addition to a side fed multipur
75. software is first launched The screens that appear in the movie promote the products that you have configured for ordering on the kiosk For example if you offer Photo Books a screen in the movie will appear to promote that product If you have the Photo Books option turned off then the movie will not promote that product Touch the screen to begin the ordering process You may select from up to 18 different language options to guide you through the ordering process by selecting the Choose a Language button Select a language r English Catala Czech im Croatia it Dansk Deutsch Espa ol F J Francais a Italiano Nederlands H Norsk me Polski Jj Portugu s gm Slovakia gg Slovenia ES svenska Suomi APM Intro Movie Language Selection The next screen presents the option to login to the APM using a Photo Finale account This option may or may not appear depending on the kiosk configuration It allows your customers to take advantage of promotions and discounts associated with their online account Additionally this option saves time for your customer at the end of an order since their name address and phone number will not need to be entered every time they place an order Nlote In order to use this feature the kiosks must be online and configured to synchronize with Lab 50 For more information on configuring these screens please see Chapter 6 If Lab 50 is not used in your location or the kiosks are not online these
76. some cameras this may differ from the date time that the image was actually taken 8 Use the options in the Show tabs to filter which thumbnails are displayed based upon the chosen method e All Photos shows all images that have been loaded into the APM software This is the default selection e By Date Range filters the images that are shown based upon a specified date range When selecting this tab a window will display options to specify the date range Use the and buttons to change the dates When finished press Filter e Folder filters the thumbnails based upon certain subdirectories on the inserted media When selecting this tab a window will display a list of the subdirectories of all the media inserted To filter by a particular subdirectory select it and press Filter Select a date range Select a folder Summer 2008 t 42 phatds fom February 1 Summer 2008 My day at the park 5 photos n ER Summer 2008 My sister ran i My best friend 6 photos x i Mar ch Be 26 E L 2009 t Summer 2008 Our day at the beach 5 photos Summer 2008 Summer School 4 photos White Screen 11 nhotns Date Range Screen Folder Select Screen 9 Press the Continue button once all photos have been selected for the product Next you may be given the option to auto fill the layout pages for the product using the selected images by pressing the Autofill button or you may press the Manual Placement butt
77. start so that this connection works as soon as the APM Dispatcher is up and running If you are using an FTP server with a passive connection check the Passive box If you are using an Active FTP server then leave it unchecked NJote Most FIP servers behind a firewall use a Passive connection Unless the FTP server is using a port number different from the standard FTP port leave the port number at 21 Make sure that the Hot Folder settings show the correct folder This should be the same location where the APM is saving the orders By default the setting should be C APM_TRANSFER Orders Fulfillment OR C APM_TRANSFER Orders local Enter the scan time and select either minutes or seconds Five minutes is the default setting If you would like to keep a backup of the orders that will be uploaded enter the file path name in the Backup Folder field Under Processing Options make sure that the Process Folders option is checked and that the Remove files after upload option is checked In the File Folder mask enter order Click on the Apply button Click on the Start button to start the connection Click on the FTP Log tab to confirm that the APM Dispatcher can connect to the FTP server 105 Deleting a Connection 1 Open the APM Dispatcher 2 Click on the connection tab you wish to remove 3 Click on the Connections menu at the top left of the APM Dispatcher then select Delete Connection
78. state selections will affect the tax rate charged by the APM Lab 50 Integration Click on the Lab 50 Integration option in the Primary Navigation Pane This screen is used to configure integration between the APM software and the Lab 50 software for membership pricing and discount updates Please review the Lab 50 documentation for further instruction on setting up APM integration e Lab 50 Configuration Status Reports the current status of integration If this option is configured in the i i Calis has Lab 50 software a green checkmark will be Lab 50 configuration confirmed displayed It will also report the Lab 50 Dealer ID for This APM ID 1027 belongs to Dealer ID 322 which a particular APM is linked Daily Scheduled Connection Time 11 35 00 Last Connection Time 04 30 2009 12 05 52 e Enable Pricing Integration Enables the push of f Lab 50 Settings Tier 1 remote pricing updates from Lab 50 to the APM If V Enable Pricing Integration Update APM products prices remotely from Lab 50 disabled pricing updates will not be applied M Enable Discount Integration Allow customers to use discounts and promotions defined in Lab 50 on the APM Note When this option is enabled any pricing that Lab 50 Settings Tier 2 is configured at the kiosk will be overwritten by the Lab 50 pricing information V Enable Photo Finale membership intergration Allow APM customers to log into or sign up for a members
79. that you want your photos uploaded to With Friends j ri R j Add email addresses of your r Enter the email addresses Add Friend s Email friends and family you want to L of your friends and they will share your photos with you ll Create A New Collection get an invite to view your also get your own confirmation pictures Jennifer picon edu email once your photos are available on the site _ Test Photos 17 photos Summer 2008 22 photos wnerzoocismo O Keep the photos oe private them Continue Album Selection Screen Email Share Screen Special Instructions This order option allows the customer to Special Instructions enter additional details regarding the order They may enter up Add special instructions to the lab printing your photos You will be able to type your instructions on a following to 250 characters of text that will be sent along with your order to setae the printer Once this option is checked and after all other order options have been chosen you will be presented with a screen to enter the instructions The print lab should not turn on this option if they Special Printing Instructions Please print on Lustre paper e Do not have the Lab 50 software or e Donotintend to read the text Finalizing the Order Once all order options have been selected you will be taken to the shopping cart Use the Continue Shopping button to add more produc
80. the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 213 Appendix N KIS DKS Printer The KIS DKS Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an into a format that the KIS DKS printer can accept and print Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the DKS machine across the local area network and vice versa There are some special considerations for the networking and based upon the current network configuration some or all of these items may need to be setup in order to print to the DKS e Since the DKS is not a network aware minilab and orders must be sent to the DKS machine it is imperative that the APM or Lab 50 machine be able create move and edit files in the DKS shared directory named rep_dks Dks rep_dks as well as its sub directories e The DKS machine has an IP address of 2 192 168 0 1 and a custom subnet mask of 255 255 0 0 but this can be changed on the User variables for russ DKS to get it on the existing local network able Value C Documents and Settings yuss 700K isi C Documents and Settings yuss 700K Note These settings are overwritten anytime a DKS receives a software update so if a customer does change the DKS network settings they should definitely record what the IP address is before updating It will always need to be a static IP IOS NT cu
81. the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish 183 ioj xi Ee Ho E _ Printers _ o If Send pro ducts to different N et piesa Rav OPOF Imerface T Send products to diterert printera based on the fullllment eues pickup ma printers based on the fulfillment IT Send prodati to derert pritars bared oni thi suace os i mate is checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three Settings selections based upon the three a Ser nt et fulfillments f reno mae e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is a checked the listing of products in aan nate the Product Matrix option will BP rutament 92 rei ue A Fulfillment 3 Mail expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for i alx Ele Help g each fulfillment is checked for all available columns ri glee 2001 4x6 Print POF Novis DPUF Intestace Adhd Printe 2003 2410 Print 4001 446 GC rarr su UPUP Interface 4003 810 GC Ur Noks E LE Flat Coude BODI 46 Flat Conds DPOF Nortsu DPOF Intesface The last step involves assigning the Act Wo a ENN AC10Wol at DPOF Nba DPOF irae printed products to the
82. the necessary fulfillments are setup to send orders to Lab 50 Make sure that all products are setup for printing in Lab 50 and that the interfaces they are assigned to are configured properly as well Note For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be 3 unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface as necessary Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Copal Printer Cleaning amp Maintenance Q How do I maintain or clean the Copal printer A The best way to keep the Copal printer in operation is to ensure that dust or debris does not get into the body of the unit Regular maintenance including cleaning the roller transport and print head section will help maintain quality print production on the printer Use a slightly damp cloth or ethyl alcohol used sparingly for hard to remove items such as ribbon residue on the roller transport or print head The air filter located on the side of the 152 printer should also be cleaned regularly and may be washed with water Be sure that the filter is dry before inserting it back into position and using the printer otherwise the printer may become damaged Ribbon Errors Q What are the most common ribbon errors A The most common error messages are Paper End and Ribbon End They are indicated by a solid red LED Follow the steps below to
83. there are images on the media card remove the media and press the Start Over button and reinsert the media On some systems the USB cable that connects the card reader to the motherboard can be taken out and reinserted without restarting the system and will reset the drives If the APM is still not able to read the card you have inserted try rebooting the system If you are still having difficulty contact Lucidiom Technical Support Q My APM doesn t have a credit card reader how do I add one A There is a keyboard wedge card reader that will fit into the keyboard PS 2 slot on the back of your machine Please contact our Sales department for this card reader General Printing Order Numbers Q I have several APMs printing to the same Lab 50 installation how do I know from which APM the order originated Each APM has a unique ID This ID also appears as the first four to five digits in every order number depending on the number of digits in the APM ID For example order 73453002 comes from APM 7345 To find an APM s ID open the Setup Wizard In some instances this order number can also be used as part of the image name or back print for several of the interfaces available 130 Supported Printers Q What printer interfaces are currently supported within the APM A The APM or Lab 50 software can print to any printer that uses a Windows driver as well as all minilab interfaces listed in the appendices Additionally a gene
84. to be configured for printing Refer to Chapter 6 for information on adding a product and Chapter 8 for printing setup D2 Passport Options IY Enable Passport Photos Add On Print Settings 2 per 4B 4 per 446 6 per 446 Default fulfillment to Use Fulfilment 1 Fulfillments to offer passports irt Fulfillment H I Fulfillment 2 W Fulfillment 3 Passport Options Configuring Scanning Since the APM uses the TWAIN driver for scanning most of the configuration is performed within the scanner driver supplied by the manufacturer Please refer to your scanner s documentation supplied by the manufacturer for making changes to the configuration for color calibration sharpening DPI settings etc Additionally there are some settings that may be configured in the Setup Wizard for all model scanners To Enable Scanning on the APM 1 Click on the APM Add On Components option in the Category Navigation Pane 2 Click on the Scanning Options option in the Primary Navigation Pane 3 Check Enable Scanning Add On at the top of the Customization Pane Scanning Configuration Options e Scanner Model From the drop down menu select the appropriate scanner model e Allow scanning from Prints and CDs workflow This setting toggles the option to allow scanning to take place within the Prints and CDs workflow in addition to the main scanning workflow Turning this option off will disable the ability to scan directly from the Prints and C
85. will need to be installed on another computer and configured to process the orders Stopping the Print Server To stop the Print Server application you will need to close it There are two ways to do this 1 From the Windows desktop double click the APM Hardware Attendant Highlight the Print Server application and then click the Stop button Or 2 Maximize the Print Server application by double clicking on its icon in the system taskbar in the lower right corner of the screen Click the Quit button to close the Print Server Reprinting an Order Local Printing on an APM Orders printed by the Print Server are saved on the APM for 7 days During this time they may be reprinted 107 Reprinting an order using the Print Server Navigate to the Admin screen by pressing the bottom left corner of the screen Enter the passcode Select the Reprint Order button Select the order to be reprinted Press the Reprint Selected Order button CLs Ye button List of Orders Placed 990103196 990103331 990103332 990103333 Reprint Selected Order Reprint Order on APM Using Local Print Server RAS Server The RAS Server enables a dialup modem connection to be used by the APM to connect to the Internet This is required for transmitting statistical data to the APM and or orders to a remote location if no local area network is available The connection also facilitates the downloading of any available APM software updates Not
86. with the update that allow for single or combi prints to be rendered at the kiosk and printed on the minilab Please contact your regional sales representative for more information on adding this feature to your APMs Q What is error 4301 This means the APM software or Lab 50 could not initialize d workflow This error indicates that there is no communication with the d worktflow server which can be caused by the d workflow server software not running or the IP address being incorrectly input into the Setup Wizard Double check the IP address of the d workflow machine and confirm that the d workflow software is running Also you may need to delete the files that end in ser in the C APM_Folders agfa_db serialize directory on the APM and or Lab 50 machine Q I don t have the full version of D workflow can I still print to my Agfa Minilab A Yes the D bridge software will need to be installed so that the orders can be sent to the minilab This is a scaled down version of D workflow so there aren t as many options for managing orders once it gets to the minilab 133 Q I have an older Agfa MSC lab my 4x6s are fine and the D workflow interface is setup correctly but my 5x7s and 8x10s are not printing correctly What am I missing A The MSC labs need an 8 FIT lens to properly print 5x7s and 8x10s from digital media Without this lens the prints will not print properly for anything larger than a 4x6 Q Everything is setup pro
87. 2x18 Print 12x18 Print 12x18 Print H Fulfillment 1 Express 13x19 Print 13x19 Print 13x19 Print 16x20 Print 16x20 Print 16x20 Print z iv 20x24 Print 20x24 Print 20x24 Print y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up 20x30 Print 20x30 Print 20x30 Print at an n a MMM 23x35 Print 23x35 Print 23x35 Print y Fulfillment 3 Mail 24x30 Print C 24x30 Print 24x30 Print 24x36 Print 24x36 Print z 30x40 Print 30x40 Print 30x40 Print ate APM Add On Components 40x50 Print 40x50 Print 40x50 Print Settings te Printer Configuration Products Printed Here Screen Step 3 Assigning Interfaces to Products This last step involves assigning any available printer interfaces to the listing of the available printed products 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the desired printer from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option see figure below
88. 50 connected via a LAN This setup is typically used when multiple APMs are connected on the same local network and a computer running Lab 50 collects the orders from all the APMs on the network In this mode all printing and order management is performed by a local Lab 50 installation not the APM When this option is used orders are temporarily dropped into the following folder C APM_TRANSFER Orders Local This should be a shared folder on the kiosk Lab 50 will then need to be configured to look to this folder to access these orders This fulfillment prints to a remote Lab 50 connected via a private FTP server This setup is typically used when one or more APMs are not on the same local network and or placed at a remote location Orders are transferred via a private FTP server maintained by the customer or can be sent using a VPN connection T1 This fulfillment option requires additional configuration within the APM Dispatcher Please see the section on adding a connection to the APM Dispatcher In this mode all printing and order management is performed by a remote Lab 50 installation not the APM The customer is responsible for acquiring setting up and maintaining the FIP server or VPN When this option is used orders are temporarily dropped into the following folder C APM_ TRANSFER Orders Fulfillment After the order is placed in this folder the APM Dispatcher application will then upload it to the customer
89. 50 machine s The APM and or Lab 50 machine should be able to access the shared ADPCPrints folder on the PIC machine Example PIC ADPCPrints Note This may require creating a new user account to match the account on the PIC machine A folder on the APM or Lab 50 machine whichever is converting the order must be created and shared so that the PIC can access and change the files Example The folder C Frontier is created on the APM and shared so it appears across the network to other computers as APM XXXX Frontier For Lab 50 this folder must be manually created and shared with full permission for the Frontier user If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options M Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent 156 Setting up the Fuji PIC 2 6 Interface Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 Interface Thi
90. APM Photo Kiosk User s Guide Lucidiom 2003 2009 Lucidiom Inc 8100 Boone Blvd Suite 310 Vienna VA 22182 Phone 703 564 3400 Fax 703 848 3015 Important Information Login Credentials for www APMProfitWatcher com Visit www apmprofitwatcher com formerly www apmnetwork com to view order details customer information and usage statistics Keep track of your retail location s average order amount and run sales and product reports on a per kiosk or per client basis Username Password APM ID s APM ID s Activation Lab 50 Credentials Dealer Code Username Password Back Lab Burner ID s APM ID s Activation Table of Contents EVD ATA Mormia iON ose ce coeds ccc A EE T A nes easeeucsteesave suse ces ii Logm Credentials for www lk NIPPON ateher COM seccsasasreccesesope siracusses apnuslscuoscuces ue bneuones E N ii APM ID oscri na A TEE I NEO E TOOTE T ii Dea DOC redenta Ser T EE E EE EE TE ii Baek EEEE OS ier ists caavataeuensacaucsnvscsaces latdeezascectesaeaeuaieasscsesasacsateavacteseesacponvessccesaeseeuenuasesoescaseenesueoesseseaseaseteuesnes dessins ii Chapter 1 TA OU COIN access tsa E E E E E OE 1 Cetroared 25 aaa A T O E E er tn ie eee 1 kacio lechnical oup POL enar A E A PN een ne nT are re ry ory ae 1 AddiHonal RES OU ECCS sssaaa ceiver T E eneeins Abas cer snus canis Alwan eerie ech ata atancitadiewemaue 2 Teticidioml Comtace rit orma On csepesesestusscecsapestys dieses van
91. Attendant Options 101 By default the Hardware Attendant is setup to do the following 1 Start when the computer starts up 2 Run minimized 3 Shutdown all applications it is controlling when the Hardware Attendant itself shuts down Remove the check from the appropriate checkbox to disable these settings These settings are recommended by technical support so you should typically not change these settings If you want the APM kiosk to turn off at a certain time every day check the Enable Auto Shutdown box and then set the time in the Initiate system shutdown at field If you want to restart at that time instead of shutting down check the appropriate checkbox Note The date time and time zone must be set correctly in Windows in order for this to function properly Adding Applications to the Hardware Attendant To add an application to the hardware attendant follow the steps below 1 Open the Hardware Attendant application Click on the New button to display a blank Application Settings screen 3 Enter the application name in the Application name field Example Print Server 4 Enter the location of the application in the Executable name field or click on the le button to browse for the file on the hard drive When you see the file click on it then click the Open button 5 If there are any command line parameters enter them into that field these typically are not specified
92. B This local printing option was originally designed for use with small express printers such as dye sublimation printers to print express prints while customers wait for a premium price There are several important considerations when using the kiosk as the print engine instead of Lab 50 1 The kiosk software may run slower since many of the printer interfaces including the Windows Printer interface require hardware resources to properly render and format the order for printing This is most noticeable when the kiosk is processing a large order or a Photo Folio order 2 There isno workflow management prior to orders going to the assigned printer interface so orders are immediately printed out after they are placed 3 Finally if there are multiple kiosks set up to process orders to a single minilab then each kiosk would need to be reconfigured separately when products are changed or if there are modifications to the minilab settings With this in mind configuring printers in the Setup Wizard is an easy three step process These steps include e Adding and configuring a printer interface e Selecting printed products from the Products Printed Here option e Assigning the selected products to a printer interface in the Product Matrix option Step 1 Adding and Configuring a Printer Interface When an APM is set up to print using the local print engine there must be a local printer connected to the machine In most cases the generic
93. D DVD is not recognized by the system that the media is bad or there is a problem with the CD DVD drive It could also be that the drive letters in the Setup Wizard are not configured correctly Check to make sure that all drive letters match correctly Also if the CD DVD drive has recently been replaced then you can contact support with the drive make and model and they may be able to update a file called Devices def to support it within the software and support it automatically in future releases APM Order Agent APM Order Agent vs FTP Q What are the differences between APM Order Agent and setting up an FTP server on my own A The APM Order Agent service is a system that easily lets you place remote APMs anywhere and have them upload orders to a secure central server The Lab 50 software installed at your lab will then download the orders as they become available This requires very little setup for the lab All that is needed is an internet connection for the 128 APM as well as for the Lab 50 machine Setting up your own FTP connection and maintaining it requires more work and technical expertise by the lab This includes setting up configuring and maintaining your FTP server Telling the Difference Lab amp Remote Orders Q How can I differentiate between orders coming from APMs in my lab and remote orders Each APM has its own four or five digit ID that is also the first four or five digits of an order number These will appear
94. Ds workflow It is enabled by default e Allow scanning from Greeting Cards Passports and Gifting workflows if available This setting toggles the option to allow scanning to take place within these additional workflows in addition to the main scanning workflow Turning this off will disable the ability to scan directly from any of these listed workflows It is enabled by default e Scanning Session Fee This option will charge a fee every time images are scanned for an order The default setting does not charge a session fee e Per Scan Fee This option allows you to charge a fee for each print that is scanned into the APM software The default setting does not charge a per scan fee 93 e Enable Scan Sharpening If scans do not appear sharp enough enable this function Use the Amount Radius and Threshold settings to determine how much each image will sharpen This option is enabled by default Note For scanner calibration refer to the manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the scanner settings You may also use the APM software to make further adjustments by printing a scanner calibration sheet from the admin menus See Chapter 6 for more information on accessing this feature Scanning Options W Enable Scanning Add On Hardware Settings Scanner Model Software Settings M Allow scanning from Prints and CDs workflow IM Allow scanning from Greeting Cards Passport and Gifting workflows if available Scanning Session
95. Folder used orders are routed to the local printer for immediate printing The c apm_transferorders local Print Server software runs minimized on the APM and it Status requires a printer to be connected to the APM directly or through a CES local network Reprint Archived Order Print Server For the Print Server to work and send the orders to the printing device 1 Load and properly configure the appropriate driver for each printing device that will be connected to the system refer to the user s manual for the printer 2 When the driver is loaded and configured to print the appropriate size make a note of the printer name or rename the printer to a name you ll remember for example Mitsubishi 3 Configure the Print Server to send the images to the appropriate interface using the Setup Wizard Please refer to the appropriate interface Appendix for each interface used 4 Set the Print Server to run in the background preferably minimized at all times See the Hardware Attendant instructions for adding or editing an application Once these requirements are met the Print Server will be able to process orders placed at the APM The Print Server automatically prints any orders that appear in the scanned folder Since the orders are automatically printed to whatever interface is setup there is no way to manage or control the order in which they are printed If orders must be managed then the Lab 50 software
96. Folio or Print products are left to B xR Print be added to your product list Aa Selected Products 6 When all desired products have been Add Producto Pulallment Screen selected click on the Add Selected Product s button Product 4x6 Internal ID 2001 The new products are displayed in the product Product Name pe Override Fulfilment list for that fulfillment Product Descriptor MOPS SSCSCS S Base Price 0 01 nee fh Quick Order Products eee M Quantity Pricing V Enable Quantity Pricing for this product and fulfillment Each fulfillment can have one assigned Quick Order product To assign simply right click on a Qy IO Rice 025 print product and choose Set As Quick Order wii oe Product T ight click and select _ roduct To remove right click and selec rice Remove As Quick Order Product A Quick nal Order product is not required but if one is not dol set then Choose Photos Only must be selected from the Order Settings option Base Pricing Delete this Product After adding or selecting a product enter the desired price for the product in the Base Price field This is all you need to do to add a product with a single base price Product Pricing Screen Quantity Pricing Quantity pricing allows different prices for products purchased in bulk To enable this pricing 84 Select the product from the list in the Primary Navigation Pane Click on the Enable Quantity P
97. Hot Folder Interface is already setup as a placeholder until further configuration occurs 1 Click on the Printer Configuration button in the Category Navigation Pane 2 Click on the Add Printer option from the Primary Navigation Pane 3 Select the printer interface you wish to add from the list of drivers 4 Enter a name for the printer preferably something simple and unique and press the Add button Note Repeat Steps 1 4 as needed to setup each printer interface When you add a new printer it is displayed in the list of printers in the Primary Navigation Pane 97 SetupWizard lol x File Help Printer Configuration Printers Select a printer driver a Prni Hotfolder Interface 3 Add Printer Driver Version Agfa d workflow Interface 1 10 Aladdin Hotfolder Fuji C8 Z PrintPix NC1000 Hotfolder Interface PDF Printer Windows Printer KIS DKS Interface Konica DPOF Interface Gretag MasterFlexD Settings Noritsu DPOF Interface 4 General Print Settings Noritsu QSS Hotfolder Interface ca Print Station Settings Sahni Interface eg Products Printed Here ROEEES heer ws Product Matrix All Fulfillments Kiosk Settings N Fulfillment 1 Express Printer Name amp dd N Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail JE APM Add On Components Printer Configuration Add New Printer Screen Once your printer interfaces have been adde
98. Indes Print Shrink to Fit M Auto Enhance All Photos Card Catalog M DYD Cinema F Auto Red Eve Fix All Photos M Glossy Matte Web Uploads Image CD DVD Allows customers to order a CD or DVD burned at the kiosk or via Back Lab Burner containing viewing software and all of the images from a media card Index Print Allows customers to add an index print of the photos they have ordered When the customer orders only an Image CD DVD and an Index Print the Index Print will contain all of the images on the CD DVD Note Index Prints are available in two different styles see Printing Options Card Catalog Allows customers to create index prints in book form Offers customer the ability to add a title and choose all photos or just selected photos Glossy Matte Allows customers to select glossy or matte surface for their prints White Borders Allows customers to select whether or not white borders are applied to all images and for all sizes in the order Shrink to Fit Allows customers to select whether or not images are reduced to fit within the canvas to avoid any cropping For example a 4 x 5 33 size image on a 4x6 canvas with white borders on the side DVD Cinema Allows customers to burn a DVD Cinema via DVD Cinema workflow or via Prints amp CD DVD workflow as an up sell product This is an add on component and may be grayed out if the DVD license is not present on the machine To obtain the option to allow burning at th
99. Kiosk Settings button in the Category Navigation Pane Payment Options After selecting a Fulfillment Option 1 2 or 3 from the Category Navigation Pane click on the Payment Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane to access the Payment Settings screen e Payment type for this fulfillment Use the drop down menu to select the payment method The options include cash credit cash and credit merchant services or none If none is selected no payment will be taken and the payment screen will be bypassed Note Some of these options such as Credit will require a card swipe to be present on the kiosk and Lab 50 to process the transaction Please contact Lucidiom support for information on setting this up The Merchant Services option also requires an additional license and extra setup to process the transaction and place payment into a merchant account For more information on adding this option to your APM please contact your regional sales representative 81 The Shopping Cart Shopping Cart amp Payment Settings The Shopping Cart feature allows customers to combine multiple products into one simple order This allows customers to add edit or Payment Type remove products they have ordered prior to PEPER E EE PE submitting the order Enabling the Shopping Cart Shopping Cart Enable Shopping Cart for this fulfillment 1 Click on the Enable Shopping Cart for this fulfillment checkbox Maximum numbe
100. M to print to a Generic Hot folder This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable products to the interface Editing the HotFolder Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 204 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch ae e a Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select the Hotfolder Interface In the Printer Name field enter Prn1 or any name you wish to use Click the Add button oS SY e interface Click on the newly created Hotfolder Interface option in the top left corner to display the options for this SetupWizard 3 pz iol xj Eile Help Printer Configuration Prn1 Hotfolder Interface Printers a Prn1 Hotfolder Interface Hotfolder Path c APMHotFolder Add Printer File Name Template ORDER _ ITEM _ PRODUCT FINISH QTY Create Order Subfolder False Order Subfolder Suffix Copy Order XML File False Duplicate F
101. MS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT IT CONTAINS SOFTWARE THE USE OF WHICH IS LICENSED BY LUCIDIOM INC LUCIDIOM TO YOU THE ORIGINAL END USER FOR YOUR USE ONLY AS SET FORTH BELOW IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE USING ANY PART OF THE SOFTWARE INDICATES THAT YOU ACCEPT THESE TERMS Software products included with this product that are not Lucidiom products are licensed to you by the software provider LICENSE Lucidiom grants you a limited nonexclusive license to use the accompanying software program s the Software subject to the terms and restrictions set forth in this License Agreement You are not permitted to use the Software in any manner not expressly authorized by this License You acknowledge and agree that ownership of the Software and all subsequent copies thereof regardless of the form or media are held by Lucidiom or its suppliers The Software is licensed for use on any Lucidiom Automated Photo Machine APM product and or personal computer provided that the Software is used only in connection with Lucidiom products NO ASSIGNMENT NO REVERSE ENGINEERING You may transfer the Software to another party if such party accepts the terms and conditions of this License Agreement If you transfer the Software you must at the same time either transfer all copies of the Software as well as the supporting documentation to the same party or destroy any such
102. NISH OTY Back print line 2 template Debug Mode False Add Product To add a product please click here and then on the three dots to the right e Order Data Folder In this field enter the location of the order data folder on the PIC PRO using the UNC naming convention Note If the machine is called PIC390 then the setting should be changed from LabServer1 Order Data to PIC390 Order Data The default value is LabServer1 Order Data e Image Data Folder The UNC path for the data folder The default value is LabServer1 Digin e Merge Data Folder The UNC path for the local machine pointing to the Frontier folder The default value is LabServer1 Merge Data e Temporary Folder The path for the directory that is used for temporary files as the order is processed e Back print line 1 amp 2 template These settings are used to specify the information that needs to be collected from the order data file and be printed on the back of each print default is ORDER _ ITEM _ Y PRODUCT YoFINISH OTY The following is a list of available case sensitive parameters that may be used e ORDER Order Number e PRODUCT Product Name e PROD_ ID Product Id e FINISH Finish option glossy matte e OTY Quantity e ORIG_FN Original File Name e ITEM Item Index e YEAR Current 4 digit year e MONTH Current 2 digit month e DAY Current 2 digit day e FNAME Custome
103. Note It is recommended that you DO NOT delete any of the connections that are pre configured in the APM Dispatcher as doing may cause problems with file transfers and reporting features Using the APM Dispatcher as a file copy tool The APM Dispatcher may also be used to automatically copy orders from one location to another across a local network Simply create a fulfillment setting like you would for an FTP server but leave the USE FTP box unchecked and make sure the destination folder is entered with the folder to which the orders will copy Itis required that the APM have full access to this folder to write modify and delete files and folder from this location The sample below shows how orders anything with order as a folder extension from C APM_ Transfer Orders Fulfillment transfers orders over to ORDERSERVER APMORDERS APM Dispatcher Connections Exit Log APM Anywhere APMPhotos Orders Stats Registration Updates Configuration PS Status Support Fulfilment Server myF TP Server com User Name arm FTPUser Passive E Password Port 21 Scan folder every 5 f Minutes Seconds Remove files after upload File Folder mask order Destination Folder ORDERSERVER APMORDERS APM Dispatcher as a File Copy Connection 106 Print Server The Print Server is the application A PrintServer 2 0 Lucidiom Inc used to connect an APM to a local printer When the Print Server is Hot
104. PM apmconfig_recerpt xml file in Notepad 2 Each text string has a name assigned to it and this may be found in the apmlang_XXX xml template and or the apmlang_custom xml if it has been modified 3 Look for the section that needs to be modified by doing a search for the name Example Pickup Instructions is txtPickupInstructionsTitle 4 If there is a different line for the text based on the fulfillment find the desired fulfillment for the text using fulfillment_id 5 Highlight the entire line of text that needs to be edited 6 Cut Ctrl X the line of text 238 7 Find the location where the text should be inserted and press enter at the beginning of the line to create space for the line of text that needs to be moved 8 Paste Ctrl V the line of text in and save the file Example Moving the Time above the Date Old Text 26 05 2005 16 58 16 58 26 05 2005 lt item name date type date pts 8 lt item name time type time pts 8 face times new roman align center gt face times new roman align center trailing lines 1 gt lt item name time type time pts 8 face times new roman align center lt item name date type date pts 8 trailing _lines 1 gt face times new roman align center gt Adding New Text to the Receipt Adding text to the receipt is done on a language by language basis While the instruction set below covers changing
105. PRO Fuji Frontier PIC Pro 2 6 Order Data Folder LabServer 1 Order Data 4 Add Printer Image Data Folder LabServer 1 Digin Merge Data Folder LabServer 1 Merge Data Temporary Folder c temp Back print line 1 template HORDER e_ ITEM _ PRODUCT FINISH SCQTY Back print line 2 template Debug Mode False Add Product To add a product please click here and then on the three dots to the right Bi Border Alignment Printer DPI 300 Left Border Adjustment 0 Right Border Adjustment 0 Top Border Adjustment o fet General Print Settings Bottom Border Adjustment 0 A Print Station Settings J Products Printed Here Index Book Settings Product Matrix All Fulfillments Settings Border Alignment Allows you to adjust where the photo is printed on the paper if the printer s alignment is off and it is printing white borders on one or more Kiosk Settings side N Fulfillment 1 Express N Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail JE APM Add On Components Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 163 Fuji Frontier PIC PRO 2 6 General Settings PIC PRO Fuji Frontier PIC Pro 2 6 E Fuji Digital Pro Lab 2 6 General Settings Order Data Folder LabServer 1 Order Data Image Data Folder LabServer 1 Digin Merge Data Folder LabServer 1 Merge Data Temporary Folder c temp Back print line 1 template HORDER _ ITEM _ PRODUCT FI
106. Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting Up a Silverwire OM HotFolder Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to a Silverwire OM Hotfolder This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Assigning printable products to the interface Editing the Silverwire OM HotFolder Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard 22 Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch Pe SS Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Silverwire OM Hotfolder Interface In the Printer Name field enter Silverwire or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Silverwire OM Hotfolder Interface option in the top left corner to display the options for this interface So ee Ye Printer Configuration SilverWire Silverwire OM Hotfolder interface Printers B General Settings of Pri rotfokler irkerf ace Order Fis Location Destinabon C loMmiotfokder Jy Serier She
107. PrintPix NC 1000 Using the Setup Wizard ee ssessesssessessesssesresressresresreestessesreereessesreereeseesreereeseesses 150 Editino the Put Ce Interne Setien A AN R 151 Product Setup within the Fuji C8 PrintPix NC 1000 Interface s seesssesseseessssssesressssssesresseesresresresstessesreestesresrtereeneessrereeseeseess 153 Assigning Products to the Fuji C8 PrintPix NC 1000 Interface ssesssessessesssesressesssssresreeseesresresstesresreereestesstereeseessrereereeseees 154 Appendix D Fwi Fronter PLC 2 Guraopmisneni a a a sutibauplasasbisaoasdaasansennvloocdaeneasenats 156 PS OSI oi rein ceca E TA E T AE N R EE E OEN seul E TO ONE 156 Setting up the Fuji PIC 2 6 Interface Using the Setup Wizard uo eesesesesesesescscscssscscscscscscscacscsssesesesesesesssesessssseeeseeesesees 157 Eding the PIC 26 mtertace elne Sipan a a N aeheretenmeachnemnes 157 Product setup withinthe Puy IC 2 6 Ae aC Ena a nem eben 159 Assionine Froducts tothe FU Fronter PIC 2 6 Iter aCei te a s R E E O 160 Appendix E FOLPICPRO miian a i e a E aa E E 162 PP POECCUMSIVCS enon EEN E RE a a S dueeieadeacassesuets 162 Setting up the Fuji PIC PRO 2 6 Interface Using the Setup Wizard oe eesesessscsescscscsescscsescseseseseseseseseseseseseseeenenenees 162 Editing the PIC PRO 2 0 Intertace Seling S iss t vtssiosashideedtpudteedbsnntsesanes sve psibed bat E les aA a NE RN a AREE 163 Product Setup within the Fui FIC PRO 2 6 Interateneo neee E E EEE EE EAN 165 Assigning Produ
108. Printed Here Glossy Index 0 ent C S tti a shit Rowe se ifillments _ a Product Matrix ulniments w U j Debug Mode False Products Configured 22 products configured 4 Kiosk Settings N Fulfillment 1 Express pan y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail ae APM Add On Components a Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 216 KIS DKS General Settings e DKS Path Enter the UNC path to the desired folder location to which orders from the APM should copy This should be set to DKS rep_DKS sortie_print which is the priority folder e DKS Alternate Priority Path Set this option to the secondary path that will serve as a drop point for orders that are set to the priority level designated in the settings later in this appendix a DKS Path DKS yep_dks sortie_print Normally this location should be e a DKS rep_dks ordre externe Temporary Folder Path Priority to Alternate Path Express Primary Priority Express Secondary Priority e Temporary Folder Path The UNC path Express Prints Cutoff DKS KIS DKS Interface to the folder on the local kiosk where order files are placed before being sent to the DKS The default setting is C APM_FOLDERS DKS_Tmp Sa a a S Glossy Index Matte Index e Priority to Alternate Path Orders are sae normally sent to the path specified in the DKS Path setting however when
109. Product Matrix All Fulfillments 4x 12 Panoramic Print Customization Pane allow the asxeomnt ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the ccna Kiosk Settings product finish y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up 5x7 Print 5 25 x 7 25 Envelope Print 5 x 7 5 Print 5x 14Print 6 x 6 Print 6 x 8 Print i y Fulfillment 3 Mail JE APM Add On Components e If Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment is checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation a Printer Configuration Products Printed Here Screen Pane will expand from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns 154 Cea ii File tiep i i _ 5 l i Printer Configuration CIA he last step involves assigning the Praes b e wa C Fuj CS Prins NC 1000 Pinis printed products to the printer interface S aas pote ZIN 8 Pi CA Fua CA 7 Pane NCTOOD 40m 48 GC Fu PiriP MCT 8x10 Cand 40B 8x10 GU S Pu lo Fiir Ari Flat Carde BUT 45 Flat Cards CS Fup CS 7 Piet NC1000 OxlO
110. Product Paper Sizing Product ea akam Cancel Paper width Paper length millimeters millimeters Only set the rendering width length if necessary Render width Render length millimeters millimeters Product Paper Sizing Window Assigning Products to the Noritsu QSS Hotfolder Interface After the Noritsu QSS HotFolder interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 196 a Beto i 1 Click on the Products Printed Here Printers option in the Primary Navigation i GS ar GE ae inariana M Send products to different printers bared on the fulllment lexpress pickup maii aaa Annae Pane T Seed podas bo diferert pries based on thee sulace gosey mallel 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine Bp deere Seti 3 The checkboxes at the top of the jen Baok S Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product EA rutament a expres finish E Futiament 22 Pick up BP Futtament 3 ra STP aes oa oaeee e If Send products to different E Piter Contguration printers based on the fulfillment 1S Products Printed Here Screen checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments e If Send
111. S Server is a critical element of the APM if you use a dial up modem to connect to the internet especially if the APM is in a remote location The RAS Server also provides some useful dial up connection troubleshooting information if you experience any connection issues To open up the RAS Connection Server screen double click on the small RAS Server icon it looks like a telephone in the system tray located at the bottom right side of the screen on the desktop To close the RAS Server screen click the Quit button APM RAS Connection Server 2 a f x 14 36 Connection Requests 1 14 36 Connection Requests 2 14 36 Sending IPAddress 14 36 RASCS Connected 14 36 RASCS_ Authenticated 14 36 RASCS_AuthNotify 14 36 RASCS_ Projected 14 36 RASCS_AuthNotify 14 36 RASCS AuthProject 14 36 RASCS_AuthNotify 14 36 RASCS_AuthNotify 14 36 RASCS_ Authenticate 14 36 RASCS_AllDevicesConnected 14 36 RASCS_DeviceConnected 14 35 RASCS_ConnectDevice 14 35 RASCS PortOpened RAS Server Screen 109 Remote Update The Remote Update application starts automatically when you launch the APM software and it APM ID E 049 periodically checks for any available software updates for Update Server Www apmnetwork com your APM By default the search for updates occurs once f Check for updates after 1 1 2001 every 24 hours If software updates are available Remote F Check for updates every hours Update downloa
112. Scored products loaded into one of the Score Up paper trays should be loaded with the score up while scored products printed through the multipurpose tray should be loaded score down Photo Folio Product Differentiation The APM software can be configured to produce a number of different Photo Folio products that print to the EQ 9800 9850 The different product types come in multiple sizes but there are five main categories of products Hard Cover Books Printed one layout to a page and are available in 20 and 40 page varieties Customers also have the option to add additional pages up to a max of 50 depending on the product Pages are stacked and glued into the cover using the Unibind photo book binder Available in the software in the following sizes 12x12 81x11 11x8 8x8 7x5 6x8 6x6 6x4 A4 landscape A4 portrait A5 landscape A5 portrait Photo Folio Books Covers that the customer may choose from in the software include black linen black leather brown leather red linen blue linen white linen The selection will vary by product type The actual paper size for hard cover books is the same as the finished product size i e 82x11 books use paper that is 82x11 inches Flip Books Use pre scored paper and are available with 20 pages Pages are arranged in the software so that two book pages are printed per sheet of paper so when it is folded in half the pages are in order Available in the
113. Select the alignment of the text by pressing the Left Center or Right buttons to align the text within the background Toggle the Text Background or Text Shadow boxes to show or hide these options Choose Previous Options to return to the main text editing screen Press the Done button once you have completed all text changes Print Order Up Sell Options Once your photos have been selected and edited and the Continue button is pressed on the Photo Index screen a series of order options will appear before the order can be completed You can customize which options appear here in the Setup Wizard as outlined in Chapter 6 to better align with the services provided by your lab The options displayed on the following pages may or may not be available depending on your configuration and the available licensing Standard APM Options There are several options that are included as part of the standard APM software license These options may be toggled on or off in the Setup Wizard and include e Index Print e Glossy Matte Finish e White Borders e Shrink Photo to Fit on Paper e Auto Enhance All 28 e Auto Red Eye Removal Index Print Photo Finish Order an index print of all the photos you ordered for 99 Select a finish for your photos Order an Index Print ik wA Glossy Finish M Matte Finish Index Print Option Photo Finish Option Shrink Photo to Fit on Paper Photos are usually printed so the image fi
114. Server APMRAS Server exe running APM Dispatcher APM Dispatcher exe running Edi Touch Prints Kiosk exe terminated k 1 1 1 1 RemoteUpdate RemoteUpdate exe running 1 Highlight the application name Print Server PrintServer exe running Delete APM Settings Configurator exe dormant Click on the Run to button to start Setup Wizard SetupWizard exe dormant Bin the application Stop To stop an application in the Hardware Move Up Attendant Move Down Options i 1 Highlight the application name nnn 2 Click on the Stop button Hardware Attendant Editing amp Deleting Applications If you want to edit an application highlight the application and click the Edit button You may then edit the information using the Application Settings screen If you want to delete an application highlight the application name and then click the Delete button APM Dispatcher The APM Dispatcher works closely with the kiosk application to transfer kiosk data over the internet It also can transfer orders from remote kiosks to a fulfillment center The APM Dispatcher uses File Transfer Protocol FTP to communicate with Lucidiom s servers and if needed to transfer customer orders from a remote location to the printing facility All APMs are pre configured to send statistical information to Lucidiom s server which provides the data used on the APM ProfitWatcher www apmprofitwatcher com website Note APMNetwork com and APMPr
115. Settings Product Paper Size 2001 4x 6 Print Sa Print Station Settings Product Paper Size 2002 5 x 7 Print Ge Products Printed Here Product Paper Size 2003 8 x 10 Print Index Book Settings 4 i A b Product Paper Size 2010 8 x 12 Print Product Matrix All Fulfillments Product Paper Size 2004 11 x 14 Print Product Paper Size 2005 12 x 18 Print Product Paper Size 2226 11 x 17 Print Product Paper Size 4001 4x 6 GC Product Paper Size 4008 4x 8 GC Settings E i Kiosk Settings Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up pe N Fulfillment 3 Mail JE APM Add On Components ca Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 188 Noritsu Net Order General Settings e QSS IP Address Enter the IP address of the printer If the QSS software is installed locally use 127 0 0 1 NetOrder Noritsu NetOrder Interface O General Settings O55 IP Address 127 0 0 1 Time Out Seconds 60 Debug False Wait Far Print False Matte Surface 2 Glossy Surface 1 Index Print False Back Print 1 S 0RDER _ ITEM _ PRODUCT FINISH 5 SOOTY ti Back Print 2 Add Product To add a product please cick here and then on the three dots to the right e Timeout Seconds Leave as default which is 60 seconds unless instructed to change for troubleshooting purposes e Debug If after changing all of the settings the Noritsu NetOrde
116. TIFF _ 4 Error 7 Message MainNo SubNo Message Noritsu Hot Folder Settngs 3 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot on the next page taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard 192 Main Options M Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting up the QSS HotFolder Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Noritsu QSS HotFolder Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable products to the interface Editing the QSS HotFolder Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50
117. TP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent SSS Setting up the Masterflex D Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Gretag and or SMI Masterflex Masternet Master Plus Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Assigning printable products to the interface 167 Editing the Masterflex D Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Z 3 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen Enter the pass code default is 1234 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer oS e Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch Once you have the Setup Wizard open OS a a mee Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Gretag MasterflexD In the Printer Name field enter Masterflex or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Gretag MasterFlexD Interface option n the top left corner to display the options for this interface PEE File Help Printer Configuration Printers E General Settings MasterFlex Gretag MasterFlexD Ho
118. XConnect interface does not work come back to this screen and set this to True The default value is False Product Setup within the Photogize XConnect Interface Each product needs to be setup to match with the appropriate translation in the XConnect software This must be done for each and every product that will go to this interface It is also best to account for both Glossy and Matte finishes even if only one is available Configure Translations Zz x 4 r Description _Canvas Width Canvas Hei Canvas Finish _Translation OK Configuring Products 2001 4x 6 Print 6 00 4 00 0 glossy photogize prod code as Cancel 1 Select the Configure Translations line to highlight it the area around Configure Translations will turn blue 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side Ea 3 This will launch the Configure Translations window There are options to Add Edit or Delete each product Configure Translations Window Adding Editing Products 1 To add a translation click on the Add button To edit a product select it by clicking on it then click on the Edit button This will launch the Product Translation window 2 Inthe Product ID field use the drop down menu to select a product 3 Set the Canvas Width and the Canvas Height to Product ID 2001 4x6 Print v the width and height of the product Canvas width An 4 For Canvas DPI 300 is generally used
119. a toner based printer or output to a Hotfolder then the PDF option is best as it will output a single PDF document Q My software shows that I offer different color books but I currently only offer black Linen what do I need to do to correctly show what I offer A Even though the books offered may use the same printer and the same tray each of the options available for books i e size cover color page number are treated as separate products Ex A 20 Page 11x8 5 Black Linen a 40 Page Black Linen and a 20 Page 11x8 5 Red Linen are treated as three unique products Use the Setup Wizard to add remove any of the photo folio products that you would like to offer When you add the products be sure to properly account for the photo folio products in the printer configuration of the PDF interface and or Hotfolder when configuring them in Lab 50 or the kiosk itself Printing on the 9800 Q The sizes print fine but every other page prints upside down on my books A For each product you have that prints this way go into the PDF driver interface settings and change the setting for long edge binding to short edge binding or vice versa This setting determines how the pages are duplexed in the printing process 126 Q Do I need to calibrate my printer A Yes it is best to calibrate the printer every time a toner drum or other consumable part is replaced It is best to use a densitometer to calibrate the printer for the best accuracy Zo
120. age between orders Enabling this option will print an additional invoice at the end of every order e Print receipt with order When an order is printed a copy of the receipt will be printed for each order on the default Windows printer e Number of Days to backup printed orders In the field enter the number of days to locally retain a backup copy of all orders The settings range from 1 to 60 days 7 days is the default setting e Index Print Size Choose the default size for index prints The default is a 4x6 print e Index Print Type Choose the layout of the index print containing either just the images or the images with additional order information e Print Index Print with all orders Includes an index print in every order that is printed wf Fettiment a Express J BP rettament 92 Pick up 2 m Felf ment 3 Mail pa APH Add On Componests Printer Configuration General Printer Settings Screen 100 Chapter 9 Supporting APM Applications Hardware Attendant The Hardware Attendant is the control center for the APM software and it is configured to automatically run when the computer starts up The Hardware Attendant determines which applications to start and controls which action to take when an application fails to respond The following applications are pre configured inside the Hardware Attendant T APM e APM Dispatcher e EQUpload Application Module Parametes RemoteLogger RemoteLog
121. age to fit the print area This is mainly for calendars This is mainly for envelopes Ask operator to confirm that correct paper is present Re send page data for multiple copies Print full size on larger paper Cancel Note For paper that is not a 1 1 ratio long edge feed should be the default setting with the exception of the folded card and 12x18 products e Long Edge Feed The longest edge of the paper is fed into the printer first For example with 8 5x11 paper the 11 inch side is facing the right hand side of the printer Usually refers to a portrait orientation e Short Edge Feed The shortest edge of the paper is fed into the printer first For example with 10x7 paper the 7 inch side is facing the right hand side of the printer Usually refers to a landscape orientation Duplex Type Refers to the orientation of the image or layout on the page The edge long or short is the side of the paper on which the finished product is rotated For example on an 11x8 5 book the binding is short edge due to the fact that the book pages are flipped on the 8 5 inch edge e Long Edge Binding Print will be orientated in such a way that the right or left side of the image layout will be parallel with the longer edge of the paper e Short Edge Binding Print will be orientated in such a way that the right or left side of the image layout will be parallel with the shorter edge of the paper e No Duplex Turns of
122. ail printed products to the printer interface Ei AP Add On Components A Printer Configuration 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Product Matrix Screen Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select Silverwire OM HotFolder interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix 229 Appendix Q Fuji JobMaker The Fuji JobMaker interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format that a Fuji machine running the JobMaker software can accept and print Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the Fuji machine across the local area network and vice versa Note If a firewall is enabled on one or more of the machines it may need to be configured to let each machine modify and write files to the other 2 The Fuji Machine must have the ability to pull files from the APM and or Lab 50 machine s 3 The APM and or Lab 50 machine should be able to access the shared Orders and Images folders on the Fuji machine This may require creating a new user account to match the account on the Fuji machine Note The computer name of the Fuji machine may vary 4 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the
123. alog box appears prompting the operator to confirm that the correct paper is in the tray This is recommended if paper is switched between trays such as the Multipurpose Tray e Collate by Duplication This setting allows for resending of the data for multiple copies of the same product For certain products such as Folded Cards it should be turned off e Make Full Bleed With this option enabled the product will print full bleed or edge to edge for the full product size After printing the product it will need to be cut down to the proper size Note The Full Bleed setting should only be used when paper larger than the product size is loaded in the tray Attempting to print to paper that matches the product size when this setting is enabled will result in damage to your printer 3 Click OK when finished 4 Repeat steps 1 4 for any other sizes and products that need to be added and configured Deleting a Product 1 Select the size you wish to delete from the Configure Products area 2 Press the Delete button 3 Hit OK in the confirmation box and the product will be deleted 225 Assigning Products to the PDF Printer Interface After the PDF Printer interface has been properly added and configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print MEE Be teb 1 Click on the Products Printed Here Printers j option in the Primary Navigation i ae es Send odas to dilereni punters based on the hullimert lexpeess pc
124. alogs produced by the software To access these settings click on the Card Catalog option in the Primary Navigation Pane e Include Title page Enabling this option will print a cover with a customer entered title It will also include a custom store logo if one has been installed Refer to the section on logo customization for further information e Show Filename with Image Toggles the ability to print the original filename under each thumbnail of the card catalog This option is disabled by default e Show EXIF Date Created with Image Enabling this feature displays the original date the image was captured read from the JPEG EXIF information for each file This option is disabled by default e Select Product Choose the type of card catalog you would like to print from the drop down menu of available products e Select Background Color Choose the background color used for the card catalog pages e Column Count and Row Count Use the drop down menus to select the number of images you would like to display on the horizontal and vertical planes respectively Card Catalog Settings Card Catalog Setting MW Include Title Page Select Product 6x6 Flip Book 20 Page L Show Filename with Image select Background Color White Show EXIF Date Created with Image Image Counts Columns of Photos Rows of Photos Fam Ea Card Catalog Settings Screen 69 Receipt Settings Click on the Receipt Settings option in the
125. and or Lab 50 orders take precedence over other jobs If so then change the setting to 1 Source Creates a tag in the order file that reports to the PIC where the order originated This may be changed to any value Negative Number Prepend If additional information is needed for all orders coming through from the APM and or Lab 50 software enter the information here Otherwise it is recommended to keep this field blank Purge Days Enter the number of days that the images should reside in the image file location folder If this value is set to 0 the images will remain indefinitely Any images that are older than the given number of days will be erased upon boot up Order Number Digits Used to determine the number of digits displayed on the PIC screen from orders that are sent from APM kiosks or Lab 50 Recommended default is 6 158 e Glossy Surface Code The PIC code to use for prints sent to the glossy surface This is used in PIC 3 0 software only e Matte Surface Code The PIC code to use for prints sent to the matte surface This is used in PIC 3 0 software only e Use original file names for Images Set this option to True to use the customer s file names for the images transferring to the PIC e Append Surface to Customer s Name Adds a surface setting to the customer name so that when it shows up in the PIC it will also give the PIC operator an indication on what paper finish to use Default setting is False e CD Pr
126. ant Open up C APM_Transfer Logs RemoteLogs Highlight the files by dragging the mouse over them with the left button pressed down Right click the mouse and select Send To and then select Compressed zipped folder Once the zip file is complete email the zip file as an attachment to support outlining the issue experienced as well as the approximate time and any other useful information Postion pos To ts Leet Serall OO Mareen Sac Task Mgr Fun Kosk Vew Logs 3 BER EESRESEE eee TREE RSE REESE Bs RVCAICSIAIRVARIAIISIIGIVARIGIIGIIASIIAIIEIIERIER wager pager nager wager nager nager nager nager nager nager nager nager nager nager lt nager Lager nager nager rager nager rager rager nager nager ages nager nager nager nager nager rager nager nager nager rager Lager nager nagez nager nager nagez nager nager nager nager nager nager a s Remote Logger t2 Lucidiom Downloader The Lucidiom Downloader tool is used to download content updates and special packages of templates that require additional licensing beyond the standard kiosk prints such as Photo Folio duplex products Luci Scrapbook products Wrapping Paper and EQ Gift items Please note that this tool is the only means to obtain the content updates without purchasing content disks from your regional sales representative The Lucidiom Downloader tool may be downloaded from the support sect
127. ant to use for the card product If you are selecting from a large number of images you can use the arrow buttons on the right side of the screen to scroll through the images 34 You have 85 photos Touch a photo to select it for your order Image Selection Screen One you have selected your image you will be returned to the Template screen Use the red directional arrows to move the image and align it properly Use the and buttons to zoom in or out of the photo Use the Rotate Photo button to rotate the image If you wish to use a different image press the Change Photo button to return to the Image Selection screen If you wish to color correct the photo press the Edit Photo button Use the automatic correction and brightness contrast buttons to make changes to the image To restore your photo to its original settings press the Reset Photo button When you are finished editing the image press the Done button ra Adjust Photo _ lt 2 Remove Red Eyes Position a e a Zoom ab Enhance Photo 89 2 y Brightness 100 100 Done Contrast s Change Photo Image Added to Template Image Editing Screen Some templates allow the addition of text in pre defined areas To add text simply touch or click the area that says Touch to Enter Text Use the on screen keyboard to enter text then press the Apply Text button 35 id press Ap Please Come to Our Pre Prom Party
128. ard support is not enabled for the Customer Information screen All data must be entered via the touch screen or a mouse attached to the Continue system Completing the Order Once the contact information has been submitted you will be prompted to remove your media before Please wait continuing Once the media is removed press the Your order js being procesos Continue button Processing the Order The screen will display the order process status Depending on the size of the order and what options were selected this may take as little as a few seconds or Continue as long as several minutes i Order Processing Screen Burning an Image CD Image DVD or DVD Cinema If the order includes an Image CD Image DVD or DVD Cinema product and the APM has a CD or DVD burner then the customer s disc may be burned at the APM while they wait Please note that burning a DVD Cinema product at the kiosk requires the purchase of additional licensing When an Image CD Image DVD or DVD Cinema product is ordered the customer must insert a blank disc press the OK button and wait for the disc to be burned When a customer places an order for an Image CD they are given the option to burn all of the images or only the ones selected for printing before burning They also have the option to specify how many copies should be created 18 If the APM is configured to burn at Back Lab Burner and not at the kiosk
129. ardware Attendant 3 Open up C APM 4 Find the file named EnableRemoteLogging exe and double click on it This will enable the Remote Logging Application Disable Remote Logging 1 Close the APM software 2 Close the Hardware Attendant in the system tray by right clicking on it and selecting Stop Hardware Attendant 3 Open up C APM 111 4 Find the file named DisableRemoteLogging exe and double click on it This will disable the Remote Logging Application Sending Logs Should you be asked to send logs that you have collected you can send them in one of two ways Automatically Internet Connected Machines Only Pw hy On the main intro screen press the bottom left corner of the screen to bring up the numbered keypad Enter the Admin or Admin Jr passcodes defaults 1234 and 5678 Press the Next screen button until you see the button Send Logs to Support Press the Send Logs to Support button and then after a brief pause a screen will appear letting you know whether or not the logs were successfully sent to support via email or FTP Contact Support with your APM ID reason for submitting the logs approximate time that the issue occurred and any other relevant information that may be useful to help resolve the issue or answer your questions Manually a oe Close the APM software Close the Hardware Attendant in the system tray by right clicking on it and selecting Stop Hardware Attend
130. ardware Atend antasari 102 SAn S OPP APPC ONS a N TNT 103 Fdinne e DEEE A e Kare e 6 a ic ir T 103 ATN EDIS oF Cel gs a etter ee tee ee ve Pte ST en PRS ny Pre rr ene ere ee ee etree ee ee ee ere Pee rere eer ey 103 g ge ig cy eee ere ee ory oo eR eet a PT NT eee ee Ire Re eee eee a oy PR ere ee ry ey eee ee ee 107 SLOP OMe Ces EG SOL Ce oc taecece sree rare esata E A 107 Reprintine an Order Local Pining Onan vases scievcesceaswetis E E Aetna 107 RAS DCE VSI ti se sd E dade acest E E ieee el NE sah eed DEEI NEEE bali Gadel EEEE E OC 108 PROTO FO i QU ara A ohooh E daa uate ENTE 110 ES UPa deens R A A asada dso cheated EEE NS 110 REME LOCS ET unaia a rA S 111 A OT a E E E E ee Ci aT MTL OR URAEE OPI 112 Lardon Down odd ienna A T 113 Chapter 10 The EO 9800 9850 Seres Printet Sipsizasscianaion ii a laudsbeatuabsssecessicbasaiee 115 Panter OW sc cage aa N O E a oak aaa A oct Mariette 115 PErnter TS LO yeaa aed ease Sasa seedless teeta eat E ea ics es tas N OR 116 PHOTO Folo roduct Pier Sina OV ised sical asiactactotis caidas ba ade Nlacassta i nds Saale chee adadhles lke ot aad agtsaestic aad feats but hadal balate sehcan 117 Tr Greraialea Uugcincol eter merece ors ame ntee Terre E a wre Pn oni E E Beret ae Pn etree T ee rete 119 Consina ple Ene arerin E Torr N O a RUTTEN ere ere PRON oer ste Re eee oe ener 120 CAA AON rasa thats c o aastaeniateina ta hau states acta eters cee eet O 120 Conteuration Demo and Fo Test Vases psina cau ctyie
131. are shuts down The APM software will launch again automatically when you exit the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard consists of three panes which you use to access different screens for customizing your APM user interface The three panes are 1 Primary Navigation Pane Use this pane as the main menu Use buttons in the primary pane to navigate between the menu sections Category Navigation Pane This pane lists the main categories for each menu configuration Customization Pane Use this area to view and customize the APM user interface By default the Kiosk Information section is displayed 61 x File Help Information Settings fi APM ID 1027 Model 2701 Information Location Settings License Expiration 2015 12201 Lab 50 Integration User Interface Settings e Product Selection Settings pi Software Version 7 0 0 19 ty Cropping Settings s Build Number TP Alphal9 Promotions amp Coupons ride Locstitos Build Date 04 28 09 12 00 Fs Pricing Model Image CD DVD Settings IPAddress 192 168 168 112 Card Catalog Settings Ef Receipt Settings Last Check In 04 30 09 12 03 Passcoaes Order Larits Last Order Placed 04 29 09 12 34 Network Settings Device Setup d Sound Settings Available RAM 801MB Tax Settings VAT Settings Available HD 14133 MB Branding Licenses Kiosk PrintStation Photol APM Order4gent Creative Collections Plus Passport Photos Scanning Gifting DYD Cinema Luci Foli
132. as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 166 Appendix F Gretag Masterflex D The Gretag MasterflexD interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format the Gretag and or a SMI Masterflex Masternet Master Plus machine running with the optional HotfoldersEx module can accept and print Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine need to be able to see the Masterflex machine across the local area network and vice versa 2 The HotfoldersEx module which is an add on license from San Marco Imaging must be properly configured and running on the printer with the HotfoldersEX shared out so other machines can write files and folders to it Please refer to the Gretag and or SMI Masterflex Masternet Master Plus documentation for setup as it may be on the F Drive of the machine depending on the make and model of the printer 3 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options MV Enable this fulfillment Print Settings sng This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private F
133. ased upon either the fulfillment or the product finish aee e If Send products to different printers Dumaen based on the fulfillment is checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand Products Printed Here Screen from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments ABE Arn aca on components e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in the Product er Cad Col fectiutas PE PAO Fas ferea AE Pre 2 TOW 6003 2x10 Wall Ant PIC PRO Fup Fronter PIC Pro 26 Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns EF ruttament 91 Lxpress a Fulfilment 2 Pick Up BP ruitiment 3 mail The last step involves assigning the printed mar products to the printer interface pi Printer Configuration 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Product Matrix Screen Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Fuji Frontier PIC PRO 2 6 interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such
134. ault is C APM_FOLDERS agfa_db DWE Agta d workflow Interface O General Settings DB45 Path c4PM_ FOLDERS agra db i Debug Mode False Dealer Mame Dealer Number diorkFlow host 127 0 0 1 Machine ID 10 Machine Type le Operator Mame Operator Number 0 Connection port 5001 Purge complete orders False Back print template SOR DER SITTERS Ys PRODUCTS YsFINISH A GT Yo Glossy Surface 4 Matte Surface z Canvases 21 products configured D Workflow General Settings e Debug Mode If after changing all of the settings the D Workflow interface does not work come back into this screen and set Debug Mode to True Default is False e Dealer Name This is set in the pfdf file for the printer This field should not be changed e Dealer Number This setting is not used e dWorkflow Host This needs to be set to the same IP address as the D Workflow machine Default is 127 0 0 1 which is assuming that the D Workflow is running on the local machine e Machine ID This variable should be unique from other devices connecting to D Workflow including other APMs The default value is 10 Note If you choose another ID it must also be configured and authorized in the D Workflow software e Machine Type 122 Connection Kit in Agfa Terminology This option should remain unchanged e Operator Name This field will show up in the D Workflow software e Operator Number This setting is not used e Connection Port This should remain unchanged
135. available case sensitive parameters that may be used e ORDER Order Number e PRODUCT Product Name e PROD_ ID Product ID e FINISH Finish option glossy matte e OQOTY Quantity e ORIG_FN Original File Name e ITEM Item Index e YEAR Current 4 digit year e MONTH Current 2 digit month e DAY Current 2 digit day e FNAME Customer first name e LNAME Customer last name e PHONE Customer phone number e Surface Matte and Surface Glossy Check that these numbers match up with how they are setup in the QSS software on the printer Default is 2 for matte and 1 for Glossy If they are different than the default then enter the correct values for both Surface Matte and Surface Glossy e Success On Time Out Marks the order as successful when a timeout occurs Do no change unless instructed for troubleshooting purposes Default is True e Render Images This option will pre render all images before they are sent to the printer providing the correct aspect ratio and border settings Recommended setting is True Default is False e Render DPI Enter the desired render DPI in this field The default is 300 This is only used if the Render Images is set to True Product Setup within the Noritsu QSS HotFolder Interface Each product that you wish to print will need to be configured to match up with the appropriate paper sizes that are setup in the QSS Software Each product has its own
136. below that is closest to the size of the photo you When the next screen appears place the photo onto the want to scan If the photo is between sizes choose the bigger size scanner bed or if you re using a stack scanner place the photos at the top of the scanner and use the guide to align the photos Follow the on screen instructions for further details Note Make sure not to load more than twenty photos at a time in the stack scanner Also make sure to flip all four edges of the stack so they do not stick together as they pass through the scanner as this can cause a jam Scan Size Selection Screen When ready press the Scan button Place your photo on the scanner Place your photo on the scanner then press the Scan button then press the Scan button a ae ae Load Scanner Screen Load Stack Scanner Screen 38 If you are using a standard flatbed scanner then the Image Preview screen will appear next to adjust the scan zone as needed If you are using a stack scanner this screen is bypassed 1 Ifthe image is not aligned properly reset the image Follow the steps below to scan your photo on the plate of the scanner and then press the Rescan button 2 Once the image is ready for adjustments use the red arrow buttons to set the scan zone il Use the arrows to a 338 adjust the scan 3 The crop lines can also be moved by using the touch Se zone guides screen 4 When satisfied w
137. ber 189 Product Setup within the Noritsu NetOrder Interface Each product that you wish to print will need to be configured to match with the appropriate paper sizes that are setup in the QSS Software Each product has its own internal APM Product ID Adding a Product 1 Click on Add Product to highlight the piyay line the word Add Product will turn blue Select Product To Add 2001 4x6 Print 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side Paper Size Width rm 152 This will launch a dialog box giving Paper Size Length mm 152 you the properties for the new product 3 Enter the correct Paper Size Height Elo Romana Sih a and Paper Size Width in mm 4 Enter the correct Render Size Height and Render Size Width in mm Unless otherwise stated this value can be the Render Size Length mm 152 same as the Paper Size Adding a Product Note The Render Size settings are important to ensuring a proper print Please make sure these values are entered 5 Click OK to save the changes 6 Repeat for each product needed Editing Products 1 To edit products that are already set up in the list first find the corresponding product ID and click on the sign to expand the list Refer to the previous section on details of each field Paper Width rm 152 Paper Length mm 152 Render Width rm 102 Render Height mm 152 Delete this product paper size To dele
138. button represent a single aspect ratio For example the 4x6 and 8x12 sizes appear on the same button because they are a 3 2 aspect ratio By choosing this button and cropping the photo you are cropping for all sizes in that aspect ratio Therefore if both 4x6 and 8x12 sizes are ordered the crop will be the same for both Note Itis important that your customers crop their images Since the aspect ratio used by most point and shoot digital cameras is 4 3 this does not match the 3 2 aspect ratio of a 4x6 print If a manual crop is completed then the APM software will automatically crop in the center of the image to accommodate sometimes giving undesired results 24 Use the or buttons to increase or decrease the total crop area Note If the crop size is too small to produce a quality print for a particular size a warning will appear in the bottom right hand corner of the screen Use the red arrow keys to reposition the crop guidelines When changing the crop guidelines a colored box will appear This color will be Crop Size Warning different for each aspect ratio Use the Rotate Crop button to change the orientation of the crop guidelines Press the Reset All Crops button to reset all the cropping that has been done for the selected photo When finished press the Crop Photo and exit button to return to the Magnify Edit screen Touch the screen to move the crop zone Use the controls to adjust the crop zone size Crop
139. can use the arrow buttons on the right side of the screen to Passport amp ID scroll through the images You may only select one image at a time Photos v You have 85 photos A A PENE D lt S C Australia lef caraca France Germany Continue Image Selection Screen Country Selection Screen The Country Selection Screen appears next This lists the passport formats available on the kiosk You may use the arrow buttons to scroll through the list Select the country you wish to create a passport for by touching the checkbox next to the country name and then selecting the Continue button Once a country has been selected the Edit Passport screen provides options for modifying the photo Read the tips in the right column carefully for guidelines on creating a passport image for the chosen country Generally the head and shoulders of the person in the image should fill the dotted orange guidelines Use the red directional arrows to move the image into the area you want to print Use the and buttons to zoom in or out of the photo Use the blue arrow button near the bottom of the screen to rotate the image If you wish to color correct the photo press the Edit Photo button Use the automatic correction and brightness contrast buttons to make changes to the image To restore your photo to its original settings press the Reset Photo button When you are finished editing the image press the Don
140. cation that the order is correct To make changes to the order press the Back button The Order Summary screen lists the prices and tax amount for all products ordered Use the Enter a coupon code button to input a numeric code that relates to a discount setup in the Setup Wizard see Chapter 6 Once the order is verified payment must be submitted Press the Continue button to continue to the Payment screen Note Once you hit Continue on the Order Summary screen you will no longer be able to hit the Back button and must either cancel the order or start a new one You can configure the APM via the Setup Wizard to e Accept a credit card at the APM e Refer customers to make payment at the register e Offer both of the above options or e Skip the payment screen entirely If the APM is configured to accept both payment types you will be prompted to select one payment method as detailed below If only one option is available only that option will be displayed Pay now with a credit card The APM software has the capability to authorize credit cards right at the kiosk and deposit funds directly into the retailer s merchant bank account This method requires purchase and set up of the APM Merchant Services Add On component Please contact Lucidiom Sales or Support for more information If the APM is setup to process credit cards it can accept Visa MasterCard American Express and Discover If the card is invalid expired
141. ce CD drive Once the frame is back in place align it so the holes are visible to put the screws back in to secure it to the frame Replace the Front Bezel again and secure it from the top and then the bottom where the plastic locks into the bottom of the system Slide the Speaker covers back in place as they were before and screw them in to secure them If the original part that was replaced was for an RMA return the faulty parts back in the packaging that it came in within 5 business days as instructed on the form 242 APM 1200 CD Drive amp Card Reader Replacement Step 1 Open the Case 1 Start by taking out the screws from the rear casing There are four on top and one on each side 2 There is a fifth screw located behind the monitor and underneath the receipt panel make sure to unscrew that 3 Once the casing is unscrewed take it off 4 Remove the cover plate 5 Unscrew the side mounted screws from the front panel fis p 243 6 Pull to remove the front panel 7 Take the screws out of the card reader bracket 8 Unplug the IDE cable and power supplies connected to the CD DVD drive 9 Unplug the PCMCIA SCSI cable from the SCSI card 10 Unplug the USB connected to the inside of the card reader The card reader should slide out of the front of the unit 244 11 To replace the CD DVD drive get a small screw driver and unscrew it from the bracket 12 Slide the CD DVD dri
142. ciicats n e e a aa a a a a S 70 Passcodes amp Order its seriinin a cuties caceucattnces asaaueeiaiectettacan atria pe Staten nice ete 70 Network Seting Soos E A 71 Device Se UPa a E E ANA 71 Sound SENE S niitahan a a a ai a aia 72 TAXE o epn EEr E E ER 72 VA TCN S nuaa E toca de oats Reba incet Staak Noses talc tos a coal iaoses Ea tielaaste es 73 OUCH Screen AMG Goaan a T Nouba cetteese cue uastuese tosh cate Matai ataeest As 73 TACTE masaia a et tale ct fetid aaa und tetas eaten ncaa es atach alee ound tncatinna ease etal eat meee E 74 MO MOV nne a r R A a Uist years Aaya pac alos lt te tats alan 75 Customize LOO resi tai a a E E E E coccinea es vsecomaiiadAue mesa teal 75 Fulnlimentoeleciomand Print Seine Sesion anr ar sont ct E EEE E E E 76 Order OMIORS cenaren aaner E E T E T EE O E A E 78 PROOI OPIN Seienn E a del ilonuete dni 80 Fultillment Options and Order Setina isossa a tains eines eanmialibieainashicsiuntunsotien lind 80 Payment PEL OWS oinar EEE E EO EEEE ote OE EENEN OOT 81 Kiosk TeX SGC S E E O A E N A E A T E TATO E 82 Adine SE ne TRE OCUICUS a e a E N E E T E E a aaacawaeiuacialteichiie 84 PE TO TEE a E E E E A E E E RR ere 86 Chapter 7 Add On Component Configuration ssssesseessseseseseeesreesscsecoseeeseeesecesceseeesseeseesseeseeeseceseesseesreeseeeseesseesseeseeereesseesseeseesseess 88 APM GOOG COTO IES saii AE E 88 Cone Creanve Collecion eas s5s 5c causes cata cele E tata wasenin eda taeawsouqnoasesieabawausanaauedeasascc
143. countries This option is selected by default e PAL Used by European countries Australia and parts of Asia and Africa Photo Archiving e Archive a copy of the photos on the DVD Cinema If this option is enabled when a DVD slideshow is created the original image files from the order will be placed onto the DVD in a separate folder for archival purposes This allows for creation of the slideshow along with storing the image files on the disc 95 Burn Settings e Burn Remotely via Back Lab Burner This option will skip burning a DVD Cinema project at the kiosk and send the order to Lab 50 for processing e Burn at APM When this option is enabled DVD Cinema orders will be burned at the kiosk while the customer waits Note To enable this feature an additional Burn at Kiosk license must be added and installed on the machine Please contact your regional sales representative to purchase this feature Additionally the kiosk must have a DVD R RW drive installed and properly configured in Windows in order to burn discs at the machine 96 Chapter 8 Printer Configuration Printing Overview If the APM is set up to use the local print engine Print Server instead of Lab 50 you will need to set up at least one printer interface and assign the interface to the products that will be available for local printing This should only be configured if Lab 50 is not available or if there is an actual printer connected to the system via US
144. covered with a red flag Double click on this icon and then click the Quit button in the bottom right corner Now go to C APM_TRANSFER Orders express If there are any orders in here cut and paste them into C APM_TRANSFER Orders printserver_backup Once the Print Server is stopped and the express folder is empty cancel any documents currently in the windows printer queue then reboot the system Q Can I adjust the color of the output A The color output of the printer is done within the printer driver and not within the APM software Go to the Printers and Faxes menu and right click on the printer driver and select the Properties button If the color can be adjusted it will be in the Properties menu More often than not ICC profiles can also be used as well but this will vary from printer to printer Some printers have settings to allow the minilab software to apply color correction Please reference the settings for your particular interface in the Appendix or if a dye sub printer is used please reference the manual that came with the printer to change the driver settings Q I added more products to my APMs and or added an APM to my kiosk lineup why are they not printing A If the orders are being sent to Lab 50 first make sure that the APM has been added to the incoming paths list in the Settings gt Order Management gt Import screen Also make sure that the Lab 50 and APM machines can see each other across the network and that
145. creen Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the PDF Printer interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 226 Appendix P Silverwire OM HotFolder The Silverwire OM HotFolder interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format that can be manually queued in the Silverwire OM software Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able access the Hot Folder drop location whether it be locally on the machine or across the network 2 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot on below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options MV Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50
146. creen The top four buttons may be changed in the Setup Wizard as outlined in Chapter 6 to display particular product groups categories themes or even occasions based upon the layout you define If this is not done then the software with dynamically choose which items are highlighted as featured products Welcome Choose the type of product you wish to make today Prints Enlargements amp CDs DVD Cinema Passport amp ID Prints from Scans Photos Featured Product Buttons 12 Below is a general outline of the standard and creative products available in the APM software Standard APM Kiosk Available with all APM software installations Prints Enlargements amp CDs The standard workflow It allows the user to order photos enlargements index prints Image CDs and Image DVDs Creative Collections Plus Simple greeting card sets you can add to by creating your own templates or by purchasing additional template packs from Lucidiom Creative Collections works with both single and multiple image templates Passport amp ID Photos An easy way for your customers or your staff to create passport photos on the APM The customer may select the country specification to use during the order process Prints from Scans Allows customers to easily convert prints to digital and make copies at the kiosk Works with most popular flatbed scanners Please note that the use of a stack scanner requires the purchase of an additional license
147. ctionsTitle 4 If there is a different line for the text based on the fulfillment find the desired fulfillment for the text using fulfillment_id 5 To modify the font look for the face setting and enter the desired font Note The font name has to match the font name in Windows and also has to be properly loaded into the machine The APM software will only support TrueType and OpenType TT fonts 6 To change the size of the font look for pts and enter the size 7 To make the text bold make sure bold true 8 To underline the text make sure underline true 9 For alignment of the text enter left right center in align 10 To place one or more hard returns after the line enter the number of hard returns desired in trailing_lines 11 To edit the text itself use the instructions in the previous section Example Changing Font Format Old Text Pick Up Instructions Pick Up Instructions lt item name instruction_title type text fulfillment_id express pts 9 indent 1 face times new roman bold true underline true align left trailing lines 1 gt txtPickupInstructionsTitle lt item gt lt item name instruction_title type text fulfillment_id express pts 12 indent 1 face Arial bold true underline false align center trailing lines 1 gt txtPickupInstructionsTitle lt item gt Moving a Line of Text within the Receipt 1 Open up the C A
148. cts to the Fuji Frontier PIC PRO 2 6 Interface vs cc cscccsssscssscsasesssetasessensasesssaoivcotensasnonenonstononasdeavanatsoasansivenees 166 Appendix F Gretig Masterler D ssscsviiicscscessccesauansassnsscesesanstasseusaseseeaiecisscnsvsusenaushcassusacsnennsvedensuesseisuaupetessanssaishauetsesuieecaeaeieasdensis 167 DS E E E A ca E AE T T E E E E E E A NT E 167 serine Up the Masterlex D Usne the Setup Wiza daresi ianen A E A E 167 Edine the Mastertlex D Interrace Sete S uate ii a E 168 Asiong Products tothe Masterlex Iter Esie GA 170 Appendix G Konica DROP arc ssss sexe ceveveticecs suaceva pases cesta N E E genes 172 FPLC ECO UISIFCS aaaea n E A E E E A ES 172 Selling up the Konica DPOF Using the Setup Wizard esecciicciene iior a A R 172 Editing the Komea DPOF Interlace Seting Seriene n e O aes as tceite amie astcatais 173 Product Setup within the Konica DPOF Iterace senii a R veal ncaeehatedasieumdiouseies 175 Assigning Products to the Konica DPOF Interface a iassciechiemres aac ecnssiestha hassel avin Bice riaua nee iatei anita 176 Append H Noni OE snpostioe nn E ereaduouiael 178 PECECO ULSI CSS ssc eee aette eet ach cael sts Naa cha setantaus cela aes eal cael td atta ates Saal ceca td Sel alates eal casa ta Eat a anaes Sal eset 178 Settling up the Noritsu DPOF Usine the Setup WV 12a ssc ios tous sisstecscotaaws shies eis a a a a a a 178 Editino the Nonu DF OF Initertace SEINO Sourin sues teal feasidtes adds estes canta hart tt cad S 179 Produc
149. d you will need to configure the settings in each individual interface Click to select the appropriate printer from the list in the Primary Navigation Pane The configuration settings for your selected interface will display in the Customization Pane The APM software is compatible with a wide variety of printer models To obtain detailed instructions on configuring the settings for a specific model printer refer to the Table of Contents for the appropriate Appendix for each of the interfaces applicable to your setup Repeat for any additional printers Step 2 Selecting Printable Products After the printer interfaces have been properly configured the next step to choose the products you wish to print from the APM Click on the Products Printed Here option in the Primary Navigation Pane Place a check mark next to all the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish If Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment is checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections based upon the three main fulfillments If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte opti
150. d by occasion and you can use the horizontal list at the top to scroll through and select the different occasion categories y oe 1 What s Hot Anytime Autumn Birthday Christmas Category Selection Buttons Note If you used the By Occasion tab at the beginning of the product selection then that occasion will be selected in the list above Once an occasion category has been chosen use the arrows on the center right and center left to scroll through a large preview of the available template styles When you are satisfied with these configuration options press the large arrow button in the bottom right of the screen to access the Image Multi Select screen aes ithe list below What s Hot EQ Pro Style Selection Jl Use the Image Multi Select screen to indicate which photos you would like to include for creating your EQ Pro product Note If an image is not selected on this screen that doesn t mean you can t include it in your EQ Pro product The images that are selected here are merely placed at the beginning of the image selection list while the unselected images appear at the end of the list Pleg e select the photos you would like to includ n a All Photos By Date Range Folder e DSCF1727 O P Recommended number of photos for this product 20 77 Up to 197 photos can be selected if you wish to purchase additional pages rdi a Sy ans CIeCled
151. d for any orders that are delivered via mail or if you have enabled the option to use the same fee regardless of delivery type in the Gift Settings section You may also change the Name and Description used in the software for the product by editing the corresponding field Check the Enable Quantity Pricing for this product and fulfillment if quantity discounts apply Enter the quantity and price for each price break For more details on quantity pricing see Chapter 6 90 Template Localization Template content including the Photo Folio Luci and Template Localization Creative Collections templates may be tagged with localization information by the designer Using the Template Country Specific Templates Localization screen you can set the kiosk to automatically Load all templates for all countries filter out content based on the language or country tagged in Load only neutral non country specific templates the files To access these options click on APM Add On Load only neutral non country specific templates plus templates for d the countries specified below Components in the Category Navigation Pane then click on Template Localization in the Primary Navigation Pane Template Localization Options 1 Use the Country Specific Templates settings to load All templates for all countries Neutral non country specific templates or Neutral non country specific templates plus templates for the selected countries Lang
152. d list by using the pull down menu in the Scanning Options section located under APM Add On Components See Chapter 7 for more information Once you have purchased a supported scanner install the latest TWAIN drivers for the scanner onto the APM These drivers typically come with the scanner or they can be found on the manufacturer s website It is recommended that you use the latest driver available on the manufacturer s web site rather than the CD that came with the scanner Note At this time only one scanner per kiosk can be supported 37 Using Scanning Once you have enabled scanning in the Setup Wizard and the driver has been installed the APM software will display options for customers to select the scanning option when placing an order There are two ways to scan images into the APM software 1 Select the Prints from Scans button on the Product Selection screen and then choose from the available fulfillment options as described in Chapter 2 2 Select the Scan photos button on the Load Media screen and then choose from the available fulfillment options as described in Chapter 2 Prints from Scans Option 1 Option 2 scan photos Once one of these options has been selected this will bring up the Size Selection screen On this screen choose the size closest to the actual image size not the size you wish to order Note If the photo is between sizes select the larger p 8 Size Choose the size
153. diting Products Configure Print Channels Window 1 To add a channel select the line and click on Add To edit click Edit 2 This will launch either the Add Print Channel or Edit Print Channel window depending on the button selected 3 Use the drop down menu to select the Product ID for the product you are configuring 4 Set Psize Width and Psize Height to the print size width and height in millimeters 5 Enter the PCN Name for the product This is the Print Channel to be used for the product as configured in the Konica printer Example 4 inch paper is 4R 6 Use Border Size Standard to enter the standard border size The default is 1 5000 and this value should be kept as default for all sizes 7 Set Border Size Bordered to the border size for prints of this size with borders The default is 3 1750 Note All data fields here forth should have information entered to the fourth decimal place i e 3 0000 175 8 For Width Inches set the width of the product in inches This should be slightly smaller than the true size in terms of hundredths of an inch Typically subtracting 0 20 inches is sufficient Example 6 inches should be entered as 5 9800 instead of 6 0000 Edit Print Channel Product ID 2001 4x6 Print 9 For Height Inches set the height of the product in inches ee e This should be slightly larger than the true size in terms of PSize Height 102 hundredths of an inch Typically adding 0 20 inches is
154. dmin passcode after touching the bottom left corner of the intro screen When you enter 911 on this screen anew key code screen will appear for you to enter Continue a code issued by a technical support specialist to initiate a connection If the machine needs to be accessed for Remote Assistance Code Screen troubleshooting purposes please navigate to this screen prior to calling Note For APMs outside the US please check with your local sales team or distributor for the correct access code as this may differ from country to country and region to region Additional Resources Please contact support for the most current list of IP addresses ports and protocols that are used by the APM software suite to allow the software to function properly This document should also be used to configure rules and exceptions to allow the APM to fully function within a secured network environment The Lucidiom Support site features training videos that walk you through product setup and configuration as detailed in the chapters that follow as well as a forum for posting questions and sharing marketing ideas The training videos may be found online at http www lucidiom com support training aspx The forum may be found online at http www lucidiom com forum Lucidiom Contact Information Lucidiom Inc 8100 Boone Blvd Suite 310 Vienna VA 22182 US Tel 703 564 3400 Fax 703 848 3015 http www lucidiom com Manufacturer Technica
155. ds the updates m Install updates to the APM Depending on the Atte 1 2000 I Upon boot up type of update Remote Update will either apply the update in Next scheduled check at 08 30 07 11 00 00 Remote Update Screen the background or automatically restart the APM to apply the update most common You can specify a time for Remote Update to look for updates by entering the time in the Check for updates after field or enter the number of hours in the Check for updates every X hours field You can also undo the default option of installing the updates upon start up by un checking that box There is an option to manually download any applicable updates by clicking or touching the Download button If there are any updates a notification is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box where the next scheduled check information is normally displayed Once you complete a manual download you can then install the updates manually by clicking the Install button To exit Remote Update press the Quit button EQ Upload The EQ Upload application is used in conjunction with the new order option for Photo Finale Web Uploads When an order includes the PF Web Upload product the EQ Upload application is the tool that sends the order to the server rather than the APM Dispatcher In the EQ Upload application you can view the current status of orders uploading to your Photo Finale website on the Activity tab To configure the s
156. e Charge Flat Fee for In Store Pickup A flat fee will be charged for picking up items at the store instead of the shipping charges per gift item To Configure Gift Products 1 Click on the APM Add On Components option in the Category Navigation Pane 2 Click on the Gift Products option in the Primary Navigation Pane 89 Installed Gifting Products Enabled ID Name sd Files Categories ooo o 20 x 30 Poster EQGifting wall 24 w 16 Poster EQGifting wall 18 x 12 Poster EQGifting wall Messenger bag Red EQGifting Photo Fun Messenger bag Black EQGifting Photo Fun 16x12 Puzzle 120pc EQGifting Photo Fun 1088 Puzzle BOpe EQGifting Photo Fun Cushion cover with pillow EQGifting Photo Fun 20 3 16 Acrylic Panel 10mm EQGitting home_office 12 16 Acrylic Panel 10mm EQGifting home_office 10 12 Acrylic 10mm EQGifting home_office AS Acrylic Block 20mm EQGiftina home_office AB Actylic Block 20mm EQGifting home_office 31 24 Canvas wrap EQGifting canvas DA 4 OA l anusa mran ENGifting manyar Name 20 x 16 Acrylic Panel 10mm Base Price 72 99 Description 20 16 Actylic Panel 10mm Shinning Fee 199 gt Quantity Pricing T Enable Quantity Pricing for this product and fulfillment Acrylic jomm 20x16 Gift Products Select a product from the list and double click on it to enable disable it Below the table enter the Base Price for the selected gift as well as a Shipping Fee The shipping fee will be use
157. e the Device Setup section of this chapter for more information Hide Cursor Display Choose to hide or show the mouse cursor on the screen while the software is running by toggling this option 64 Product Selection Settings Click on the Product Selection Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane This screen is used to configure which products and or featured occasions appear as the main four buttons at the top of the Product Selection screen For more information on this screen please see Chapter 2 Use the dropdown menus to set a product or occasion for the appropriate button You can also choose to provide a button that chooses a random product or occasion Products or occasions that are not selected for any of the four buttons will still appear in the By Product tab on the Product Selection screen Note You cannot set the same product or occasion for multiple buttons Product Selection Settings Featured Products Occasions Primary Product Feature 2 DVD Cinema Feature 3 Passport amp ID Photos Feature 4 Photo Books Product Selection Screen Cropping Settings Click on the Cropping Settings option in the Primary Cropping Settings Navigation Pane Use this screen to change the cropping options available on the APM There are three methods Fixed Cropping Mode A single fixed ratio cropping guide is shown available to determine how the cropping function will l Aspect Rat
158. e Even if the modem is not used the RAS server should remain as is in the Hardware Attendant For the RAS Server to work properly a dial up connection must be configured on the APM machine Note The dial up connection must have the name APM To configure a dial up account on the APM refer to your Internet Service Provider ISP instructions 108 E Network and Dial up Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help 2 Back 5 A Search L Folders j cS As LE x A EE Ez Address 4 Network and Dial up Connections Pao E Make New Connection i BAPM Dial up Disconnected Pegas usb YO USB Mod System Network and Dial Local Area Connection LAN Enabled Intel R PROJLOD VE Net System up Connections This Folder contains network connections For this computer and a Wizard to help you create a new connection To create a new connection click Make New Connection 3 objectis Windows Network and Dial Up Connections Window You will also need to configure the APM software to use a RAS dial up connection This is done through the Network Settings section of the Setup Wizard by entering the username password and phone number in the modem area of the screen Note The username password and phone number you enter into the Setup Wizard should be exactly the same as those you enter in the APM dial up connection of the Windows Network and Dial up Connections screen The RA
159. e Invitation 4x8 Baar A VAIS a Invitation_4x6 MeryChristmas_5x MeryChristmas_4x8 MernryChristmas_4x6 SeasonsGreetings_5x SeasonsGreetings_4x8 SeasonsGreetings_4x6 MernryChristmas_5x7 MeryChristmas_4x8 MeryChristmas_4x6 HappyHolidays 5x HappyHolidays 448 HappyHolidays_ 426 HappyHolidays_4 8 HappyHolidays 426 32999_ 4x8 32998_ 4x8 Package 6up 2x2 on 4x6 Package 2up 3x4 on 4x6 Package 4up 2x3 on 4x6 Package 1up 4 6 2up 243 on 6x6 Package Tup 4x6 2up 283 on 6x6 Package 2up 4x6 3up 2 53 5 on 8x10 Creative Collections Screen Configuring Photo Gifting To Enable Gifting on the APM 1 Click on the APM Add On Components option in the Category Navigation Pane 2 Click on the Gift Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane 3 Click on the Enable Gifts Add On checkbox at the top of the Customization Pane Gift Order Settings Require approval for gift orders When this option is enabled the kiosk software prompts for the order approval passcode after a Gift order has been completed See the Passcodes amp Order Limits section of Chapter 6 for details on setting up this passcode Fulfillments in which to offer gift products Check the boxes for the fulfillments in which you wish to offer gift products If a fulfillment is not enabled the checkbox option will not be available gray text Once you have selected all of the fulfillments in which you wish to offer gifts set the default fulfill
160. e button When finished creating your passport product press the Continue button 40 Use the buttons below to adjust your photo When you are finished press Done te E gt _ Remove Red Eyes am eet s Enhance Photo Sepia Tone FA Biack amp White Brightness 10 Q o Contrast 100 Done Edit Passport Screen Editing Passport Photo The final screen allows you to increase or decrease the quantity of passport photo sheets to order by pressing the or buttons When finished press the Continue button to view a summary of the order on the Shopping Cart screen Use the Continue Shopping button to add more products to the order or click on Check Out to review the order on the Enter the quantity of Pa ucts Order Summary screen Press the Continue button to finalize 2 per sneer you wisn ore 8 Be the order G n Q 59 90 Order Quantity Screen EQ Gifting The APM Gifting Add On component allows your customers to place orders for various photo gifts from the kiosk There is no cost to add this component but you must register with Lucidiom prior to enabling the feature Requirements for setting up gifting include 1 The APM must be connected to the internet and the FTP protocol must have outbound access through any firewalls that may be configured on your local network 2 Register with Lucidiom 3 Configuring the products pricing and s
161. e each other across the network The apmconfig_printstation xml file will need to be modified contact Support for assistance Q Can I setup multiple printers of the same model and type to print an order and speed up the process A Yes However the printers must be the same make and model number You must also have version 3 0 or higher of the APM software installed Please contact Support for more information Q What is the best way to print multiple sizes with a dye sub printer A Since the dye sub printers are using a Windows driver and most of the printers have different ribbon and paper types for different sizes it is best to have a single printer dedicated for a single size Otherwise you will have to go in and change paper and ribbon in front of your customers Q My printer ran out of paper during an order what is the best way to put in new paper A If you printer runs out of paper during an order you will need to open the printer and replace the ribbon and or roll while the printer is on You do not need to close the APM software or shut down the computer If you do your printer may reprint the entire order There may be a printer driver warning or error that appears on the screen Do not click OK until you have changed out the paper and put the printer back online Q My dye sub printer does not print my images but the printer is on A Make sure that the printer is online and properly connected This can be done by making su
162. e end of the field and then enter the following right after the last character C APM C APM Plugins Click the OK button to save the changes Click the OK button again on the Environment Variables window to close it 10 Click the OK button to close the System Properties window 4 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot on below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options M Enable this fulfillment M Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting Up the DKS Interface Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the KIS DKS Printer Interface This process includes the following steps me e a Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings Setting DKS priority levels Product setup from within the interface Assigning printable products to the interface 215 Editing the DKS Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the botto
163. e kiosk please contact your regional sales representative with the APM ID of the machine and ask for the Burn at Kiosk License Web Upload Gives customers the ability to upload photos directly to an online Photo Finale album for a given account You can either chose to upload all the photos in a given order or upload only the photos that were selected for printing Special Instructions Allows customers to include additional instructions with the order The instructions are printed on the receipt ticket and also displayed on the Lab 50 screen Auto Enhance All Photos Allows for auto enhancing all photos in the order This also auto enhances the images put onto the CD DVD as well Auto Red Eye Fix All Photos Allows for automatic red eye correction for all images in the order and will also auto correct red eye images placed onto the CD DVD 79 Photo IQ Options The Photo IQ Options provide various means of editing images You can turn these options on or off and some options are available in automatic or manual versions To enable or disable any of the following features select the appropriate button Photo IL Options Red Eve Removal Automatic Manual Both Color Corrections Automatic O Manual C Both Cropping On Off Fhoto Borders On C Off Text on Fhoto On C Off Copy Photo On Off e Automatic Red Eye Removal This feature removes red eyes by pressing a single button e Manual Red Eye Removal This feature
164. e left and right of the size listing to view more print sizes for ordering 6 Use these buttons to scroll through your list of images If a scroll button is disabled faded either the end or the beginning of the image set has been reached 7 Press the Magnify and Edit Photo button to view a larger version of the photo you have selected and to access the editing tools e g red eye removal cropping and color correction See the following sections in this chapter to learn about these features 8 Use the options in the Sort By tabs to order the thumbnails by the method indicated e Name orders the thumbnails alphabetically from A Z ascending based upon the filename of the images This is the default selection e Oldest sorts the thumbnails from oldest to newest based upon the file creation date and time of the image e Newest sorts the thumbnails from newest to oldest based upon the file creation date and time of the image 2l Note The Oldest and Newest tabs use the actual file creation date time of the image file to determine the sort order On some cameras this may differ from the date time that the image was actually taken 9 Use the options in the Show tabs to filter which thumbnails are displayed based upon the chosen method e All Photos shows all images that have been loaded into the APM software This is the default selection e By Date Range filters the images that are shown based upon a specified date range When sel
165. e to three selections based upon the three fulfillments e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns 234 io1x File Help The last step involves assigning the Erie osna aad ali Printers printed products to the printer nq a gam 2001 4x6 Print JobMaker Fuji JabMaker 2002 5x7 Print JobMaker Fuji JobMaker s 2003 8x10 Print JobMaker Fuji JobMaker interface 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Fulfillments option in the Settings Primary Navigation Pane S General Print Settings ga Print Station Settings 2 For each product listed click on the irera AA Printer column and select Fuji JobMaker from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each EY Kiosk Settings matrix A Fulfillment 1 Express 4 To assign multiple products to a E Fulfilment 2 Pick Up 6n P P y Fulfillment 3 Mail single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and Sa APM Add On Components TE z use the context menu options such Product Matrix Screen as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 235 Appendix R Cu
166. eOS for large format printers Band Output True l Reprint photo on error False e Reprint photo on error The option Continue Job After Item Failure False should only be set to True when Debug Mode False using Mitsubishi printers The default value is false Left Border Adjustment Bin Right Border Adjustment Bin Top Border Adjustment Din e Continue Job After Item Failure If ae Bottom Border Adjustment Din this option is set to True the APM Printer DPI 300 software will continue printing the current job in the event of any unexpected printer error The default value is false e Debug Mode If after changing all of the settings the Windows Printer interface does not work come back into this screen and set this to True The default value is false Border Alignment Settings Settings in the Border Alignment section are not typically used unless additional border space is needed on one or more sides This is due to the fact that border alignment problems are best resolved by manually adjusting the position of the paper roll ink ribbon inside the printer However if the issue still persists after the manual re adjustment of the paper roll ink ribbon you can specify values in the following fields to adjust the borders The default values are Oin e Left Border Adjustment Adjust the left border by entering positive numbers to shift the border to the right negative numbers to shift it to the left e Right Border Adjustment Ad
167. ected from the card reader the system thinks it has been physically removed To fix this physically remove and reinsert the media after you start over Reprinting Orders Q Can an express order be reprinted if there is a problem with the printer A Yes the Print Server application has a button that allows you to find an order and reprint it This can be accessed through the Admin screens Once an order is over 7 days old or whatever the default setting is itis deleted from the Print Server archive and can no longer be printed Add More Images Q When I try to add more images to the same order from a different card I get an error A Chances are that the images have not finished loading from the first card and the media was taken out too soon Wait for the prompt to insert the new card before taking out the first card Q Some of my images on my media are not showing up what is going on A The APM accepts certain types of images including Jpeg TIF BMP and RAW files There are also size limits so if an image is under 4k in size or over 100MB uncompressed it may not appear The maximum number of images that will show is 2000 by default This along with the maximum and minimum size can be changed manually in the xml If the images themselves are corrupt for any reason this too may prevent them from appearing Q I get an error 0 or an error 105 when trying to burn a CD DVD What does this mean A These errors indicate that the C
168. ecting this tab a window will display options to specify the date range Use the and buttons to change the dates When finished press Filter e Folder filters the thumbnails based upon certain subdirectories on the inserted media When selecting this tab a window will display a list of the subdirectories of all the media inserted To filter by a particular subdirectory select it and press Filter zg Select a date range l _Select a folder Summer 2008 42 photos j pe ee 1 na 2009 ae Summer 2008 My day at the park 5 photos x Summer 2008 My sister My best friend 6 photos CEE E gus 4 L March fil 26 _ 2009 Ss Summer 2008 Our day at the beach 5 photos Summer 2008 Summer School 4 photos White Screen 11 nhntans af Date Range Screen Folder Select Screen 10 Press the Continue button once all print sizes have been chosen and editing is complete UM Magnifying and Editing a Photo If you select an image and press the Magnify and Edit Photo button on the Photo Index screen a larger version of the photo is displayed The Magnify Edit screen also provides advanced editing tools which you can enable or disable using the Setup Wizard Use the controls on the right to san a ee a photos Push Back to return to the Ordering Screen Products ordered i for this photo 2 is Rotate Photo 1 4x6 1 5x7 s 4 a Remove Red Eye 1 8x10 imp Crop Photo bs Adjust Color
169. ed to this APM Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfilment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via OPM Order Agent This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM This setup is typically used when a dye sublimation printer is directly attached to the APM or if you wish to automatically print the orders directly to whichever printer interface you are using without order management software such as Lab 50 When this option is used orders are dropped into the following folder C APM_TRANSFER Orders Express The Print Server application then takes the order from this folder processes it and upon completion places it in the C APM_TRANSFER ORDERS printserver_backup directory The order will remain in this folder for a set period based on the printer configuration settings on the kiosk or until the order is reprinted Monitor Printing Enables a printer status page to be displayed while the customers photos are being printed This feature is used only for certain printer interfaces such as the Copal Direct Driver interface This requires a printer to be directly attached to the kiosk via a USB cable This can only be used when the first Print Settings option is selected and should only be used for dye sublimation orders This fulfillment prints to Lab
170. eding this amount If unchecked no maximum limit will be imposed Please note that there is no option to override this value in the kiosk software so make sure it is set high enough to not cause issues e Require approval for order amounts above When this option is enabled a store employee must enter the order approval passcode as set above before the order can be placed If unchecked no order approval will be required Network Settings Click on the Network Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane This screen may be used to indicate the type of Internet connection that the APM will use to communicate with the APM Network The default and recommended network setting is a local area network LAN If you use a dial up modem instead of Ethernet Network Settings Network Settings 1 Activate the Modem option button D Modem Enter the information as prompted phone Numbers Ss 3 Formodem connections to work properly a Windows 2000 XP dial up connection must be aie created with the name APM and the same Phone Password Number Username and Password settings as are f Network LAN set here Network Settings Screen Device Setup Click on the Device Setup option in the Primary Navigation Pane This screen may be used to change which drives are enabled and which drive letters are associated with each drive on your APM These device settings must match the device letters that are assigned in Windows The o
171. ee it from across the network and access and modify the orders that will go into this folder e Back Print Used to specify the desired back print format using the case sensitive parameters listed below The default value is to print the APM order number and the item number ORDER Y oITEM The following is a list of available case sensitive parameters that may be used e ORDER Order Number e PRODUCT Product Name e PROD_ ID Product ID e FINISH Finish option glossy matte e QTY Quantity e ORIG_FN Original File Name e ITEM Item Index e YEAR Current 4 digit year e MONTH Current 2 digit month e DAY Current 2 digit day e FNAME Customer first name e LNAME Customer last name e PHONE Customer phone number e GEN CRT and VUQ NUM Use the drop down menus to select whether the orders will go to a QD 21 or an R1 R1 Please make sure to set both fields to the same value properly by leaving the default KonicaRISUPER or entering Konica QD 21 Both fields are case sensitive e Wait for Print If set to True the APM and or Lab 50 software will not print the next order until the Konica minilab has confirmed that it is at the printer The recommended setting is False e Use APM Order Number If set to True the order folders will be renamed according to the last four numeric digits of the APM order number as shown on printed receipts It is ideal to leave it as True in order to matc
172. ee the Passcodes amp Order Limits section of chapter 6 for details on setting up this passcode H e Apply PhotoIQ Automatic Enhancements to all Folio Products during Order Processing If this option is enabled it will Folio Settings apply the APM et s automatic I Enable Folio Add On Automatically 4uto Fill PhotoIQ color correction feature to all of the oe E Require E Folio images that are used inside a Photo Folio a v a a e F Apply Photol Automatic Enhancements to all Folio Products during product This option is disabled by default OSR POOS Disable Additional Page Upsell Note Enabling this feature can substantially improve print output quality for products like photo books when they are IY Limit Folio Folded Card Products to the following Quantity Values printed on a laser printer However it will 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 roughly double the time needed to build an 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 order Disable Upsell Workflow Fol e Disable Additional Page Upsell If this olio Options Screen option is checked it will disable the option to add additional pages during the Folio creation process to accommodate all the photos the customer has available e Disable Upsell Workflow If this option is checked it will disable the upsell features of the Folio ordering process preventing recommendations for additiona
173. een in the screenshot on below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options IV Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting Up a Windows Printer Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Windows Printer Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Assigning printable products to the interface Editing the Windows Printer Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 210 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch oe Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Windows Printer In the Printer Na
174. een to designate the pricing models for CDs and index prints e Image CD DVD Settings Includes options to choose the location where an Image CD DVD is burned configure the contents burned to CD DVD and set the correct drive settings e Card Catalog Settings Use this screen to set the product size and display options for the Card Catalog product e Receipt Settings Includes options to customize the receipt header text and the number of receipt copies to be printed with each order 62 e Passcodes amp Order Limits Use this screen to change the admin access method passcodes and order limit amounts e Network Settings Used to setup modem connections to the internet e Device Setup Used to configure available media type devices and their associated Windows drive letters e Sound Settings Used to turn on off voice prompts and DVD Cinema preview music e Tax Settings Used to set tax rates e VAT Settings Used to set VAT rates e Touch Screen Calibration Used to calibrate the touchscreen on the APM Location Settings Click on the Location Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane Use this screen to identify your main store location and primary contact information In normal operation this information is not required and only used within the confines of the APM software However if the gifting add on component is in use this section should be filled out in its entirety for order tracking purposes Note The country and
175. eguisile Sep E E E tava aN ead aucun bush datos data h aN zad aa cunathusll dade tos data haul ead ance ahaa Sele astah ase 214 Deine Up the DRS Interiace Using the Seti VV Za seuss tacstenceutsidhas A A 215 Editine the DK sili lords SCHNE Sanaian A a atieiccsansesdeenane Caiapseacanudh a te 216 OTE PAON epa a eases cose a a snateitvasudsadl on ic cabreat ze dunsatecanwhetadeeusaesuaioartic 218 Product Setup within The DKS MIEI E enaa n tices te eeseae ieee Gar anriectet A 218 Assignine Products 16 ne N15 PK Inte tia Enan A A 219 Append OP DE ENN e arca a a rena uieeti einai 221 Fe NSU eoii a E E E E E ATE TA E T I 221 Setting up the PDF Printer Interface Using the Setup Wizard e sessessssseeesessessessessesresresresresresresresresresresreseesresreseereereereereereess 221 Editing the DF EinterIniterlace Seting See E A N EE A ATE R 222 Product Setup witain the POE titer I levi ace sissies reek ccaceen ccc c serait E aeuasties 223 Assienine Products tothe POF Ennter tent Ce seniii aa caave use us A tbasianes ies Uaecostevasndvacuseareianteavmet tues 226 Appendix Ps Silverwite OM HOt ol et icc 2ccceoactsasascsdosstoasdus cide a a a es reaeceatatetesasenes 227 PFE E CG UST S re E asses scars deo urs onesies senda scande aut aus ausscansi aud sa scented uustan ease a Uusd sees cense hse aerate 227 Setting Up a silverwite OM HotFolder Using thie setup Wizard siese iisa E ssid ease Ee EEEE 227 Editing the Silverwire OM Hotrolder nterface Seting S xs cscc
176. elect Fuji Pe JobMaker B rutiiment 2 rick up 4 Inthe Printer Name field enter PIC or 2 esto any name you wish to use 5 Click the Add button 6 Click on the newly created Fuji JobMaker option in the top left corner to display the options for this interface GFE AFH add on Components Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen Fuji JobMaker Options e Order File Location Dest Enter the location of the Orders folder on the Fuji machine using the UNC naming convention Note If the Fuji machine is called PIC390 then the setting should be changed from C APM XXXX JobMaker Orders to PIC390 Orders e Image File Location Enter the location of the Images folder on the Fuji machine using the UNC naming convention Note If the Fuji machine is called PIC390 then the setting should be changed from C APM XXXX JobMaker Images to PIC390 Images 231 JobMaker Fuji JobMaker El General Settings Order File Location Dest WFuji JobMaker Orders Image File Location Fuji JobMaker Images Purge Days 3 Glossy Surface Code G Matte Surface Code M Automatic Image Correction True Product Settings 20 products e Purge Days Enter the number of days that all order files and images should reside in the folders as defined above If this is set to 0 the files will remain indefinitely Otherwise files from these locations that are older than the given number of days wil
177. en comes up Change or add the following settings as necessary Paper Tray Choose the correct paper tray set up on the printer for printing this product Paper Type Choose the correct paper name that is placed in the tray Note For any tray with Tabloid Extra 12 x 18 paper you will also need to change the A3 Nobi setting on the printer to differentiate Tabloid Extra and Japanese paper size called A3 Nobi Paper Width and Height These two fields are automatically set once a product is selected If the paper size is not the same as the product size change the values to match the exact paper width and height Unit of Measure Sizes are measured in either Inches or Millimeters Paper Feed This defines which side of the paper is being fed into the printer first From a front top down perspective view of the tray the paper is fed into the printer though the right hand side Includes two different feed types long and short Product Settings 8 5x11 Hard Cover 20 Page Black Leather x Product Settings z Inches Milimeters long Edge Goes First Long Edge Binding Not Booklet Upper v Shrink to Fit Iv Is Last Page Flipped T Rotate 180 Degrees I Confirm Paper Ready M Collate by Duplication IV Make Full Bleed E Paper Tray Paper Type Paper Width Paper Height Unit of Measure Paper Feed Duplex Type Booklet Type Output Bin Shrink or enlarge the im
178. ent or the product finish EP rament 3 exes a Fulfillment 2 Pick Up BF Futtiliment 3 ait e If Send products to different eere printers based on the fulfillment is Printer Configuration checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane Products Printed Here Screen will expand from one to three selections based upon the three C fulfillments Bie _tieo e IfSend products to different Aad Pree S30 Pr ee eens ts 3C oal Windy nie printers based on their surface is seria Cas SON ne FlaGade Copal Windom Pirie AIO Wal Aa 6003 8x10 Wall Ae Copa Windows Printer checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns A Fulfilment 1 amp xpress m Fulfillment 2 Pick Up y Fulfillment 3 Mail The last step involves assigning the print si arn asaon components products to the printer interface ae 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Product Matrix Screen Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Windows Printer from the drop down menu If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single printer right click anywhere in
179. er Configuration section of the Setup Wizard on the APM Credit Cards Q How can I implement credit card payments and tie them into my own credit card processing A APM version 4 0 and up allows for integrating credit card payments from the APM into your own merchant account The Merchant Services add on feature may be purchased by contacting the sales department Once purchased a form will be sent to get the necessary information needed to get the kiosk setup properly to use this feature Q Does the APM support electronic transactions in other countries A Yes the APM does support other methods such as Chip and Pin transactions in the United Kingdom However there are additional fees and additional setup steps necessary in order to make it work and are outside the general scope of this document Please contact your distributor or sales agent for additional information and costs for electronic processing Order Options Q What is the difference between crop to fit and shrink to fit A An image s dimensions don t always match the chosen paper size In these cases the user has two choices to crop pictures to match the selected print dimensions crop to fit or to preserve the original dimensions of the original picture and shrink the image to fit on the paper shrink to fit Q Can I turn on some Photo IQ features on and leave others off Yes the Setup Wizard allows you customize the Photo IQ settings You ca
180. ess the Save changes and exit button to return to the Magnify and Edit screen Note Although the Automatic Red Eye Removal feature is generally quite accurate there may be occasions where not every single red eye will be Save changes Cancel changes automatically corrected and exit and exit For more refined red eye adjustment you can manually adjust an image by doing the following Page epee e orao e aoe De hal ihe a 1 Press the Manual Correct Tools tab Position the green editing circle over the area you want to adjust by touching the area or by pressing the red arrow keys on the right side of the screen 2 Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the size of the green editing circle 3 Press the Remove red eye button to remove red eye from the target area 4 When finished press the Save changes and exit button to return to the Magnify and Edit screen Save changes Cancel changes and exit and exit Note To configure which options are available for removing red eye please refer to the section in the Red Eye Adjustment Screen Manual Setup Wizard for configuration options Crop Photo Select the Crop Photo button on the Magnify and Edit screen to bring up image cropping options The APM software allows a customer to crop a selected photo a number of different ways based upon the products available 1 Select a crop size using the buttons on the left side of the screen The sizes displayed on a
181. etooth Wireless Devices 6 If you have purchased a Bluetooth adapter and installed and configured it in Windows you can enable the APM software to accept images from Bluetooth devices Please contact support for Import images spo from a Bluetooth specific instructions on Bluetooth configuration on the kiosk Press the Import Images from a a iau Bluetooth wireless device button and follow the instructions to send images from your Bluetooth device to the APM You may need to consult your device s instruction manual for details on transferring images from your device Bluetooth Import Button Please follow the instructions on the page to transfer images from your Bluetooth device Authenticate Device O 20 Enter the following activation code on your Bluetooth device Send a Photo 2939 Use your Bluetooth device to send a photo to the APM Bluetooth Send a Photo Screen Step 1 ae Send Additional Photos OROS Send Additional Photos MDO Send additional photos from your Bluetooth device Send additional photos from your Bluetooth device Press Done when you have transferred all the desired photos Press Done when you have transferred all the desired photos Files Received 0 Files Received 1 Last File Received DH000039 JPG A k Done Nes 4 Done ZY Transferring BZA Transferring Photos EN Photos Transfer Progress 35 Bluetooth Transfer Bluetooth Transfer Complete
182. ettings choose the Options tab Use the start and stop buttons at the bottom of the screen to turn uploads on or off This screen also allows you to configure the start and stop times for file transfers to improve network performance Additionally you change the order pickup location path the maximum number of threads to use for uploads and the amount of bandwidth used for the uploads Note Lucidiom Technical Support recommends using the default configuration for these settings 110 EQUpload Stopped Order Pickup C APM_TRANSFER orders Upload Schedule gt Options Performance About rn lt Lucidiom P mi PO Usload aee Remote Logger The Remote Logger is a tool that tracks and records all events on the kiosk to a log file This tool is used to help the development testing and support staff in many ways including troubleshooting a problem with the software and or hardware Since the information presented in the log files created by this tool are intended for support testing and development personnel they will not be covered in great detail in this manual However should the need arise to submit logs for analysis please follow these instructions for enabling and disabling the tool and for submitting the necessary information as well as logs to Lucidiom Enabling the Remote Logger 1 Close the APM software 2 Close the Hardware Attendant in the system tray by right clicking on it and selecting Stop H
183. etwork and vice versa 2 Fuji C8 The machine running the Fuji C8 software must be properly configured and running Please refer to Fuji documentation for setup 3 PrintPix NC 1000 The machine must be running the NC 1000 Print Pix Utility and the Windows driver must be loaded onto the system 4 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options MV Enable this fulfillment Print Settings aN eae This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting up the Fuji C8 PrintPix NC 1000 Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Fuji C8 Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable products to the interface 150 Editing the Fuji C8 Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 2 Enter the pass code
184. f two sided printing for this product 224 e Booklet Type Refers to multiple images or layouts being printed on a side referring to the orientation of the layouts on the page Generally applies to pre scored or folded products like the 5x7 folded card e Two Up Landscape Orientates the images layouts in such a way that they are doubled up on each side and the right or left side of the images layouts will be parallel with the shorter edge of the paper e Two Up Portrait Orientates the images layouts in such a way that they are doubled up on each side and the right or left side of the images layouts will be parallel with the longer edge of the paper e No Booklet Turns off the doubling up of images layouts on each side e Media Type Used to specify the type of media used to print the product e Output Bin Use this setting to specify which output bin to use Options are Upper Bin or Lower Bin where Upper Bin is typically the default e Shrink to Fit Check the box to allow images to be shrunk to fit the paper size e Is Last Page Flipped Check this box if configuring a calendar product so that the last page is printed in the correct orientation e Rotate 180 Degrees Check this box if configuring an envelope product so that the envelope is printed in the correct orientation e Confirm Paper Ready Check this box to prompt the operator to confirm the correct paper is present in the tray When this setting is enabled a di
185. f you are only using one media card or import option click on the Yes Let s get started button to start the ordering process You have 61 photos Your photos have been loaded in your order so far successfully Are you ready to start your order Remove your media then press OK or do you have more photos Yes Let s get started ad Wait have more photos to add Pe Add More Photos Remove Media Screen Adding Additional Photos 11 Product Selection Screen Welcome Choose the type of product you wish to make today Notepads Folded Cards Note Cards a 3 oa x2 FlipBooks Proof Books Flat Cards Envelopes Scrapbook Pages APM Product Selection Screen Once all of your available photos have been added for ordering the product selection screen will appear The options on this screen may vary depending on the APM Add On Components that are setup and configured For more information on adding creative licenses to your APM please contact your regional sales representative The items that are available on the Product Selection screen depend on three factors 1 The components for which the kiosk is licensed 2 The configuration and pricing of the products within the components 3 The creative content installed on the system All three of these conditions must be met for any of the add on products to appear on this screen However you can set the Featured Products you wish to highlight on this s
186. fferent E Fothiment 2 rc up printers based on the fulfillmentis tee checked the Product Matrix option __ a in the Primary Navigation Pane a Printer Configuration will expand from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments e oo Ta 3 2001 46 Pira NetOsdex Nontsu NetUrder Inter ac e If Send products to different ih 4a Pre 20N 10 Pre ee 40M 4 6 GC i Nosta Maiin kenia s 403 210 GC ide Raksu NetU der medas printers based on their surface 1S Af BOT 4 Flat Carde NetOrder Nortzu NetOrder Iniedace x10 Wall Ast 6003 8x10 Wall Ae NetOrder Noritsu NetOrder Intedace checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns A Fulfillment 1 Fxpress m Fulfillment 2 Pick Up A Fulfillment 3 Mail The last step involves assigning the AB aon add On Components printed products to the printer interface n 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Product Matrix Screen Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Noritsu NetOrder interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single printer right
187. fit your market and your business The tool you will use to customize the software is the Setup Wizard Note To make configuration changes in the APM it is best to have a keyboard and mouse attached to the system prior to booting up To access this tool from the kiosk Access the looping introduction movie Touch the lower left corner of the screen to access a hidden menu Note This hidden button is only available on the Intro Movie screen At the next screen enter your passcode and then press the Enter button to access the Admin Screens The APM ships with a default passcode of 1 2 3 4 There are three primary admin menu screens Please enter a passcode to continue Use the Next Menu button to navigate through them Touch within this area to access the hidden menu Hidden Menu on Movie Screen Entering the Passcode to get to the Admin Screens 59 Save Restore Configuration This button is at the bottom right corner of every admin screen and launches the save restore configuration tool which may be used to copy configuration files to or from a media device such as a compact flash USB jump drive or any removable media Admin Screen 1 of 3 Reprint Order If the APM is printing orders locally it will allow you to reprint orders on the next screen Please see Chapter 8 for more information on how this works Calibrate Touch Screen This will launch the touch screen calibration tools for the
188. fix the error s 1 Pull the ribbon tray out toward the front 2 Reel the ribbon on to the take up core use tape turn the core to set the ribbon to its initial position where the laminate cover is visible between the rollers 3 Eject some of the paper by pressing Cut on the front of the printer Paper Transport Error Q How do I fix a paper transport error A Follow these steps 1 Turn the printer off Pull the ink ribbon tray out and ensure there is no paper jam in the paper transport area If there is a jam use scissors etc to remove it Guide the edge of the paper using the guides Turn on the printer The red error LED should turn off If the paper edge is printed press the Tip Cut key a number of times to remove the printed area If the paper wi So has not been exposed press the Rewind key to rewind the paper back into the paper tray 6 Pull the paper tray forward and check to see if the paper edge is damaged If it is cut the printed portion off taking care to cut a straight edge AGFA D Workflow Printer Q Can I print 2 up wallets Currently the APM will only send one wallet at a time To print wallets on the Agfa D Workflow you can send wallets to a hot folder and then manually queue them up in the D Workflow software Reference the Generic Hot folder setup instructions in Appendix L for more information If you have purchased the Creative Collections or Creative Collections Plus modules there are templates included
189. ftware and place an order to see the results of the changes 236 Important Notes The text here section in en text here does not appear in the software it is only used for reference The text will automatically break at the end of the line but if you want to force a line break use the shift 6 symbol once for each line break Lucidiom software updates overwrite ALL master language files apmlang_english xml apmlang_spanish xmi etc If you make changes directly to any of these files the change will appear in the software but once you update to anew version your change will be lost The APM software updates do not install new apmlang_custom xml files so any changes you make in that file will remain after software updates are installed Do not use double quotation marks in your new text string The AMPERSAND amp symbol alone will cause an error in the software If you want to add an amp to your new text string it must be added like this amp amp Example For text to display Joe amp Mary Thank You the text string in the apmlang_custom xml file needs to look like this lt string id txtExample en Thanks gt Joe amp amp Mary Thank You lt string gt To change the text Thank you for your order which appears on the receipt you would 1 Search for Thank you for your order in C APM apmlang_english xml You find it in the lt receipt gt section of the English f
190. g a page or wish to navigate to a different page use the arrow buttons to the right and left of the template preview When you are finished creating your EQ Pro product in its entirety press the Preview button in the bottom right hand corner to see an overview of all of the pages in your product You can use the arrow buttons to scroll through thumbnails of all the pages you have created If you wish to edit a particular page simply select it When satisfied with the final product hit the Continue button If photo or text slots on any pages of the product are left blank then a prompt will appear confirming this was intentional To complete the product simply select Yes Continue Otherwise choose Return to Preview to review the product again Leaving slots empty means that when the product is printed those areas will be left blank Enter the quantity of 7x5 Mini Book 20 Page products you wish to order 15 99 ea Ome Subtotal Continue Continue Folio Edit Screen Order Quantity Screen The final screen allows you to increase or decrease the quantity you would like to order of the EQ Pro product you have created by pressing the or buttons When finished press the Continue button to view a summary of the order on the Shopping Cart screen Use the Continue Shopping button to add more products to the order or click on Checkout to review the order on the Order Summary screen Press the Continue button to fi
191. ger exe e Kiosk RAS S erver APM RAS Server exe APM Dispatcher APM Dispatcher exe e Print Server Touch Prints Kiosk exe RemoteUpdate Remote pdate exe R A Print Server PrintServer exe S Server Setup Wizard SetupWizard exe e Remote Logger EQUpload EQUpload exe dormant e Remote Update e Setup Wizard As a general rule you should not Options 4 gt change the settings for the applications 8 8 Fe Chugging away listed above as they are already configured for optimal performance Hardware Attendant Note If an application is ever accidentally deleted from the Hardware Attendant you can add it back in This will be discussed later in the section Hardware Attendant Options There are several options you can APM Hardware Attendant configure within the Hardware ae pions Attendant To do so the Hardware Attendant must be running M Aun Attendant on start up lf Run minimized Cancel To open and run the Hardware I Enable Auto Shutdown Attendant Initiate system shutdown at 11 30 00 Pe M Restat instead of shutting down 1 Double click on the APM Hardware Attendant icon on the M Shutdown applications when closing Attendant desktop or from the desktop right click the APM Hardware Attendant icon located within the system tray on the bottom right side of the screen and select Show Hardware Attendant from the menu 2 Click on the Options button within the Hardware Attendant Hardware
192. gs Master Volume maximum i00 7 Mute DVD Music Previews Mute Voice Prompts e Mute DVD Music Previews Will prevent the preview music from playing when a customer cycles through the background music options in the DVD Cinema workflow Sound Settings Screen e Mute Voice Prompts Will prevent any voice prompts from playing while the APM software is in use Tax Settings Click on the Tax Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane to change or set the tax rates used in the APM software 72 Change Location Used to change the default location if the information is not correct This button will take you directly to the Location Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane Click on Tax Settings again to return to this screen Tax Rate Displays the default tax rate for the current location TOTAL Tax Rate Use this field to increase decrease the amount of tax charged per order If your location uses state provincial city or local taxes add them to the base tax rate here Charge the tax rate of the destination instead of Tax Settings Set Tax Rates Enter the appropriate TOTAL tax rate If your location uses sate provice or city local taxes add them together for the total tax rate Current Location Change Location Tax Rate 5 00 Enter the total tax rate as a percentage value Ex 4 5 4 50 TOTAL Tax Rate 5 00 L Charge the tax rate of the destination instead of you location s tax rate
193. h the orders through the printing process If multiple APMs are printing to the Konica without Lab 50 acting as print management software then leave this setting at False e Render Images This option will pre render all images before they are sent to the printer providing the correct aspect ratio and border settings Recommended setting is True Default is False e Render DPI Enter the desired render DPI in this field The default is 300 This is only used if the Render Images is set to True e Debug Mode If after changing all of the settings the Konica DPOF interface does not work come back to this screen and set this to True Default is False 174 Purge Days Enter the number of days to keep the orders saved on the machine Setting it to 0 will keep the files indefinitely Otherwise the APM and or Lab 5 machine will delete any orders older than the set number of days when the software opens Product Setup within the Konica DPOF Interface Each product needs to be configured to match up the appropriate print channel setup for it in the Konica Configuring Products 1 Select the Configure Product Channels Border Sze Standard line to highlight it the area around 1 500000 Configure Product Channels will turn blue 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side 3 This will launch Configure Print Channels window There are options to Add Edit or Delete each product Adding E
194. he last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane _ ig Kiosk Settings 2 For each product listed click on the Dcn y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up Printer column and select the BF ruintment 23 cai Gretag MasteFlexD interface from AEE Att add on Components 9 Printer Configuration the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each Product Matrix Screen matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 171 Appendix G Konica DPOF The Konica DPOF interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into an order structure that the Konica QD 21 and Konica R1 R2 can recognize and print Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the Konica machine across the local area network and vice versa 2 On the Konica machine the necessary print channels need to be setup prior to the APM Lab 50 setup 3 The QDIF folder on the APM Lab 50 machine needs to be shared out so that the Konica can see it from across the network 4 The Konica printer must be configured to look to the shared folder for incoming orders 5 If there are Glossy and Matte options available at the
195. he red directional arrows to move the image and align it properly Use the and buttons to zoom in or out of the photo Use the Rotate Photo button to rotate the image If you wish to use a different image press the Change Photo button to return to the Image Selection screen 43 If you wish to color correct the photo press the Edit Photo button Use the automatic correction and brightness contrast buttons to make changes to the image To restore your photo to its original settings press the Reset Photo button When you are finished editing the image press the Done button Once you are satisfied with the way the gift is presented press the Done button You will be able to review the image one more time and when satisfied hit the Finished button to complete product creation Adjust Photo 9 Position O Zoom pe 74 Enhance Photo 99 _ p Black amp White a Brightness lt gt Edit Photo Done Template Selection Screen After the gift image has been selected and all editing is complete the final screen allows you to increase or l decrease the quantity of the gift you would like to order EEEE E O E by pressing the or buttons When finished press the gesaan aaa Submit Order button to view a summary of the order on the Shopping Cart screen Use the Continue Shopping button to add more products to the order or click on Checkout to review the order on the Summary Payment screen After
196. heckmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish e If Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment is checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product 160 Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to SelupWizard loj x Gie Hep Printer Configuration
197. hip account e Enable Discount Integration If enabled this feature Debug Settings allows customers to use discounts and promotions as defined in the Lab 50 software For promotions that Bae are tied to memberships customers must log into Reset Connect Time their Photo Finale account in order to access them Lab 50 Integration Screen e Enable Photo Finale Membership Integration Allows APM customers to log into or sign up for a Photo Finale membership account By signing into a membership account the customer will not be prompted for their contact information at the end of the order and this allows for better tracking of orders in Lab 50 63 e Force Connection and Reset Connection Time These buttons should only be used when recommended by technical support User Interface Settings Click on the User Interface Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane Use this screen to change the following e Thumbnail Style Change the thumbnail display by selecting the radio button Options include Center Cut or Aspect Correct Note Only applies to the Prints amp CDs workflow e Default Filename Setting Determines whether the filenames of the images appear on or off by default e Thumbnail Selection Type Choose between offering the ability to select multiple thumbnails at the same time or only one thumbnail at a time User Interface Settings e Image Sort Default Use the M Thumbnails Disp
198. hipping costs in the Setup Wizard Once you enable the Gifting Add On in the Setup Wizard the APM software will display options for customers to order photo gifts All gifts are available for ordering on the Product Selection screen 41 To begin ordering a gifting product select an appropriate category under the By Product tab on the Product Selection screen Some of the gifting categories include e Clothing and Accessories e Home and Office e Housewares e Jewelry rA amp Home and Once a gifting product category has been selected the Office software will take you to the ordering options for that oa A category 4 Clothing and Housewares selections to define the ordering parameters For Accessories By Product By Occasion You will be prompted to make some additional example in ordering a shirt you will need to select the type of shirt and the size before creating the gift product Gift Category Selection At any time during the selection process you can use the Breadcrumb Buttons at the bottom of the screen to backtrack to the previous selection or all the way back to the Product Selection screen by pressing the Products button Use the scroll arrows to browse through the options in the selected grouping Once these intermediate selections have been made you will be taken to the Image Selection screen outlined in the next section Select a product from the list below J aa ha M 2 j
199. hosen your photos for the EQ Pro product you will be taken to the Folio Edit screen Use the Folio Edit screen to design and customize your EQ Pro product To skip these options and proceed with the order press the Preview button If you get stuck follow the directions on the right hand panel To add a photo to the current page simply touch or click the area that says Touch to Enter Photo and select an image from the Photos tab at the bottom of the screen Alternatively you may drag and drop the photos from the photo library onto a photo box You y may use the arrow buttons to the left Touch to Enter Photo and right of the images to scroll through your photos The button in the top right hand corner of the photos tab may be used to see larger thumbnails of your available photos To change the photo used in one of the boxes touch the box then touch a photo from the photo library or drag and drop a photo on top of the existing photo Touch to Enter Text Fill out the page with photos and text Switch between different layouts and backgrounds F Directions Add or 1 Add photos to the page by selecting an available photo box and then choosing a photo from your library Touch to Enter Photo 2 Switch layouts or backgrounds by choosing from the available options 3 Scroll between pages using the arrow buttons on the left and right 4 Press the Preview button to review your product
200. ifferent ID from the other printer Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Assigning Products to the Copal Dye Sub Interface After the Copal Dye Sub interface has been properly configured the next step to choose the products you wish to print 148 1 Click on the Products Printed Here option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish e If Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment is checked the Product Matrix ii lolx File Help Printers a Copal Copal Dye Sub Printer Sy Add Printer Settings Printer Configuration 7 Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment express pickup mail 7 Send products to different printers based on their surface glossp matte Products _ 3 1 2x 5Print C 4x 4Print 4x 5 Print 4x 5 25 Print 4x 5 33 Print
201. ign companies have created you can install them in three ways 1 Insert the Template Installer CD into the CD drive and run the Template Installer s available on the Template Installer CD 2 Go to the Admin Menu from the Intro movie screen and select the Install Templates button to automatically install the templates from the Template Installer CD 3 Manually place the templates in their native form in the C APM_FOLDERS Packages folder and the software will locate and recognize them Once templates are installed and you enable the Creative Collections Plus in the Setup Wizard the APM software will display options for customers to order exclusive card products All exclusive cards are available for ordering on the Product Selection screen To begin ordering of an exclusive card product select the Flat Cards category under the By MA Product tab on the Product Selection screen You will then be prompted to choose a size for the exclusive card product Use the scroll E JE arrows to browse through the size options For example you can select 4x8 Exclusive Card to Flat Cards being ordering a 4x8 greeting card using the standard Creative Collections Plus templates Flat Cards Button At any time during the selection process you can use the Breadcrumb Buttons at the bottom of the screen to backtrack to the Product Selection screen by pressing the Products button Once you have chosen the size of the card you will be taken to the Template
202. ilable occasions Once you have selected an occasion you may choose from a list of products that have templates associated with that occasion By Product By Occasion 0 WOOD Autumn Birthday Classic Book Father s Day Halloween Invitation Mother s Day YEDE Christmas Easter Graduation Hanukkah Kids New Year s By Occasion Tab Once you have selected a product from the By Product tab or an occasion from the By Occasion tab the software will take you to the configuration options for creating the product The next options vary depending on the product you have selected EQ Pro products require additional selections to define the ordering parameters For example when ordering a Photo Book selections must be made for the type of book the size of the book and the template theme before product creation can begin Simply follow the workflow and select from the options displayed 50 At any time during the selection process you may use the Breadcrumb Buttons at the bottom of the screen to backtrack to the previous selection or all the way back to the product selection screen by pressing the Products button Use the scroll arrows to browse through the options in the selected grouping Once the product selection navigation has reached a certain point after a definable size and product type have been chosen the last selection will require choosing a style or theme for the product you have selected The styles are groupe
203. ile Copy the lt receipt gt to lt receipt gt section and paste it into apmlang_custom xml Find the second instance In the section between the gt and the lt string gt for the text you want to change and edit that section Remove any strings you have not edited Old Text Thank you for your order Please come again soon Please keep this receipt for your records lt receipt gt lt string id txtThankYouFooter en Thank you for your order Please come again soon Please keep this receipt for your records gt Thank you for your order Please come again soon Please keep this receipt for your records lt string gt lt receipt gt 237 Thank You Max s Lab appreciates your business Please visit us again soon lt receipt gt lt string id txtThankYouFooter en Thank you for your order Please come again soon Please keep this receipt for your records gt Thank You Max s Lab appreciates your business Please visit us again soon lt string gt lt receipt gt Editing the Text Formatting on the Receipt 1 Open up the C APM apmconfig_recerpt xml file in Notepad 2 Each text string has a name assigned to it and this may be found in the apmlang_XXX xml template and or the apmlang_custom xml if it has been modified 3 Look for the section that needs to be modified by doing a search for the name Example Pickup Instructions is txtPickupInstru
204. ile copy utility that sends the orders diagnostics and statistical information to Lucidiom via the APM Network This utility can also upload the orders from remote APMs to Lab 50 via APM Anywhere which can pick up and process the orders It also can act as a file copy move utility to automatically generate a backup of the orders as well as move them across your local network Bluetooth Camera Phones and Infrared Q How do I enable my system to accept images from camera phones A APM version 2 0 and up provide Bluetooth connectivity which will allow your customers to send images from their Bluetooth enabled phones A USB Bluetooth adapter must be installed and properly configured on your APM and it must be using the Windows XP driver available with Windows XP service Pack 2 APM Software General Settings APM Activation Q I m getting a warning saying that my license is about to expire in a few days or I have activation license has expired message what s this A This is a reminder that your support and maintenance contract with Lucidiom is about to expire Support renewal is required in order to receive phone support and software updates Please contact your regional sales representative for information on renewing your support contract Q I have several APMs that all expire at different times can I get onto a support contract that covers all of them for the same amount of time A Yes there are enterprise support contracts availab
205. in Lab 50 as regular kiosk orders but are labeled as Remote Order in the details area Hardware Tips APM Sound Volume Q The APM voice prompts are low or non existent what do I do to turn them on off A The volume of the voice prompts in the APM Software can be adjusted in the Setup Wizard If the sound works but is still too faint you can go into the Windows Control Panel and adjust the volume accordingly USB Devices Q I have customers with images on USB storage devices How can I let them access those images on the APM A Use the Setup Wizard to enable the USB Device option and set the device to use the next unused drive letter Q I have had USB drives work in the past but I have a U3 drive that doesn t seem to work what do I need to do to make this one work A Use the Setup Wizard to enable the USB Device options The U3 drives use two USB drive letters but only the 2rd drive letter functions like a normal USB device so it is important to make sure that two USB drive letters are enabled to make sure the APM can recognize the images on drives of this type Receipt Printer Q Receipt Paper A If you run out of receipt printer paper refills can be purchased at most office supply stores If you are unable to find refill rolls please contact Sales at Lucidiom Q Receipt Paper Jam A If the receipt printer does not print or paper is jammed you will need to access the paper roll clear the jam and
206. ing Products You can also add new products and set product pricing on a per fulfillment basis Adding new products Add Product to Fulfillment Select the product s you would like to add from the list and then press the Add Selected Product s button 1 Click on a Fulfillment Option 1 2 or 3 from ET TZ p General Selection Tools A 2 1 2 x 3 1 2 Wallet Print the Category Navigation Pane arnt Select All Products Clear Al Products 2 Select the Add Product option from the top 3 4x 5 33 Print m Select by Product T of the product list O 4x 5 5 Print hla 4x6 Double Sided Print Select all PRINT products 3 Select the products you wish to add by Piha 6x4 scene me Select all LUCI products checking them in the list 4x 8 APS Print 4x 9 Print Select all FOLIO products 4 Use the tools in the Customization Pane to pede help find the products you want to add You asxemnt f Select by Searching 5x 5Print can select all products select only certain 5x 6 5 Print Es types of products or search for an individual _ 5x7 scene me m License Info product eee Folo products remaining T17 1 i a 5 25 x 7 25 Envelope Print 5 The License Info area will inform you of ecb Sed Prt Pict pdt remains IF x rin how many
207. insert the paper again Once you have cleared the jam it is a good idea to go into Windows and navigate to the Printers and Faxes section clear out any receipt prints in queue and then try to print a test page Q The receipt printer won t print what should I do A If the printer won t print here are a few things to try 1 Check the paper and make sure all the cords are inserted tightly 2 Check that the receipt printer is the default printer in Windows To do this go to the desktop click Start gt Settings gt Printers amp Faxes Make sure that the receipt printer this should be called Receipt is the default printer The default printer is marked with a small black circle containing a white checkmark Print a test print from the printer setup folder Right click on the printer and choose Properties then click the Print test page button 3 If you are still having trouble printing the receipt you may find that rebooting the system will clear the problem 129 Touch Screen Monitor Q I m not getting a display what do I do A If you have started the APM but the monitor remains blank make sure the monitor cables are firmly inserted If the power light is off but the APM computer is on check the power cable to the monitor and the monitor s power switch Q I get a Monitor No Signal or No Sync Message what does this mean A If you see one of these messages it means that the monit
208. io i 5 display and work in the software Dual Cropping Mode Two interlocking cropping guides are shown e r A 3 representing the smallest and largest aspect ratios of the products offered No Fixed Cropping Offers a single fixed ratio cropping matter what print sizes a customer orders they can be sure their photo will be cropped within the range between the two guides While it is recommended guide Default isa 1 5 ratio 4x6in or 10x15cm that you specify the largest and smallest aspect ratios of the products offered you may choose any two ratios e Dual Cropping Mode Two interlocked cropping Smallest Aspect Ratio guides are displayed that show the smallest and largest Smallest Aspect Ratio Label aspect ratios of the offered products The default values AER seen ete show the smallest guide with a ratio of 1 25 8x10in or 20x30cm and the largest ratio of 1 5 4x6 or 10x15cm Largest Aspect Ratio Label Exact Cropping Mode Customers must crop a photo for each independent Exact Cropping Independent cropping iS available for aspect ratio available based on the print sizes offered This allows customers x a to have different crop areas for different products and to see exactly the each aspect ratio This is the default option and offers cropping they will get for any print they order but it requires them to crop a photo multiple times the customer the most flexibility for cropping This is the most comp
209. io ecreis REEE E EE AEEA 38 Pass DOL EPO LOS aaeei in E E 40 EO GINO sinisa A T T eaudeauate dala senieaes aaietucanseaecss 41 Creatine a Git POG csere au a 43 PVD mend dO Com Ome nit esas acacia aes E N RON 45 Creatine aY D SIV CSI NOW sispann io ea ecard eats R E aha sa halans ce atine as E A N 45 Chapter 5 EO Pro Sofware oriin oa a aa eo aaao tues eee dda tanita ties 49 EO Po Adt Onr C ompone i estas esse ses taa N E 49 CPoo me art BO EO T TOJU a E E E E E A E E E 49 Ene EOT OT OU S ea n E E T E E O E O 54 ZOO A I p a EE A EE N EN EN E E ails E E N A A S 58 Chaplero General AFM Configuratii oMssosesdian E a 59 Acces sme We Adm SCL COINS ai a O E utongniaunaensuanaacssueniens 59 EU WY Zal drea A E AEO 61 EEE PE TE Oe E E E E A E E A E E A E E err Rae E ee 62 By oars UT 9 OE SE E E E E NE TaN eae re er era 63 Bs ogee OM Meo a2 Ue w eeempra arate oeenree N 63 fi al hgh spel ice oc UN etc ee er ee one ee ae Deer AR RnR ey PRY APR Urey Menace ier Otero Mere et mee mer whey Sener we eee ere are TE 64 Product oelechion oee Serr a eis EE aed tale acta deid stu AOE 65 GIOP PINO OCUN or TEN O E T A O EOE 65 Fronmotons e COUPON oen T R 66 Er KUP OCA OMS eisi A E A E E anced E EI ERE A O E ETE SE 66 Prane Mode kreennai Ea EE EE Sana la BS A E ER EEN E EEE E 67 Inace CODY D SENE Sire AEE A E E EE EEE E E E E EERE 68 Card Catalog Seline Sinaine a satan cteeonstanisesansuideaatesvecaoee idan thencinssekeeonateetaiaide 69 PRECEDE SOULS sos cca s
210. ion Pane place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon ak settings either the fulfillment or the product finish BP rotament 3 ca GEE ares aca On Components i Printer Configuration e If Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment is checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three Products Printed Here Screen selections based upon the three fulfillments e If Send products to different x Printer Configuration Product Matrix printers based on their surface is Pieters Pr Motfoider Interac d a ee B xm Aii titer 2007 446 Prev Sdveewwe Stvermee OM Hotlolder wverlace a AEA NAS CMT FRAT NOT noate 7 2002 5x7 Print Pant Mootokder irtad checked the listing of products in AasPrre 2 eat Pet Put Halida eae the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product gt Gtheral Pret Settings ot Pitt Satan Seti 7 Prockats Printed Here Note For proper operation make prodr Mats Patines certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns A Fulfillment 1 Express The last step involves assigning the BP ruifiiment 2 Pick up A Fulfillment 3 M
211. ion of the Lucidiom website and may be used on any machine running Windows XP It can run in the background of any other work you may be doing on the machine If you are using it on a machine that is not an APM there are additional settings you will need to configure in order for the application to obtain the correct updates on Lucidiom s server There are also additional settings you may change including the default download location You can access these settings via Settings gt Preferences within the Lucidiom Downloader tool If you are running the application on a machine that is not an APM the General tab will need to be completed in order for the application to find the updates appropriate for your setup The fields should be as follows Client Name touchprints APM ID use any of your existing APM IDs for this field APM Software Version may be found on the Lucidiom Support site Lucidiom Downloader Preferences General check for Downloads Downloads Creative Content Wrapping Paper Creative Content Wrapping Paper Add On 2003 1 9 232 Client Name Creative Content 2006 Release 3 Creative Content 2008 Release 3 Oct 2008 Rev 301 REQUIRES 2008 RELEASE 1 Creative Content Wrapping Paper Creative Content Wrapping Paper Add On 2008 1 10 27 2008 Creative Content 2008 Release 4 Creative Content 2008 Release Nov 2008 Rev 402 REQUIRES 2008 RELEASE 1 11 19 2008 EQ Gifting Summer 2008 EQ Gfting Content instal
212. ion option in the Primary Navigation Pane to access the touch screen calibration tools for your kiosk 73 Touch Screen Calibration Press the Calibrate Touch Screen button if the touch area does not line up correctly Touch Screen Calibration with the buttons This will launch the You should calibrate the touch screen if the touch area is not aligned with the calibration program and display directions for R calibrating the screen When you are finished you will be returned to this screen The new touch screen settings will take effect Click the Calibrate Touch Screen button to launch the calibration program immediately 7 Note The calibration program is an external program once you calibrate the screen the information will be saved and previous settings cannot be restored 3 g AI Note Some kiosk models are not Automatic touch screen calibration is not supported on all APM models If the above button does not launch the calibration utility then you will need to manually compatible with this option However touch launch it from the desktop or Control Panels folder screens can still be configured and calibrated by using the tools offered by the touch screen Toucan e drivers found in Start Programs Touch Utility the Control Panel of Windows or the system tray depending on the model Theme To change the color scheme of the user interface click on the Theme option in the Primary Navigati
213. ions to C 254x203 10x8 C 203x2548x10 Add Edit or Delete each product eee OO E 218 Adding Editing Products 1 To add a product click on the Add button To edit select a product and click on the Edit button This will launch a new window with the product settings 2 Inthe Products field use the drop down menu to select the product 3 Check the appropriate size and orientation to match the paper size in use on the DKS If it is not listed please enter the correct dimensions by selecting the Custom Size option and enter the size in millimeters 4 Click OK when finished 5 Repeat Steps 1 4 for any other sizes and products that need to be added and configured Deleting a Product 1 Select the size you wish to delete from the main product listing window 2 Press the Delete button Assigning Products to the KIS DKS Interface After the KIS DKS interface has been properly added and configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 1 Click on the Products Printed Here Sea aa option in the Primary Navigation U Pane Printer Configuration 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a I Send products to dilereni prrders based on the hitmen sprost pickup mal checkmark next to all of the ERUR products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon eithe
214. is interface O semwa ox File Help Printer Configuration PDF PDF Printer pr Printers ey PDF PDF Print foxt cs800 a oe er Printer OKI C9800 GA PS z Hap FIN 4 IV Check for SNMP Printer I Automatically Configure Products S General Print Settings a Print Station Settings g Products Printed Here Index Book Settings saa Product Matrix All Fulfilments 5 Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 22 PDF Printer General Settings e Printer In this field use the drop down menu to select the correct printer name for this interface from the printers installed on this machine By default the EQ 9800 9850 printer should be selected e Check for SNMP Printer This option should be checked by default If the SNMP feature is enabled on the printer the Setup Wizard can send queries for printer information We recommend this setting always be enabled if the printer is configured to support it e Automatically Configure Products If this option is checked the APM software will automatically configure and maintain the PDF interface settings This setting is enabled by default Product Setup within the PDF Printer Interface In order for products to print properly using the PDF interface it must be setup correctly If you are using the recommended default Lucidiom tray settings there is little to no configuration that needs to be done as all the settings are pre entered
215. is different from 4X6 Check the PrintSizes txt file on the PIC found in PIC FES datafiles for the correct codes to use or to add additional sizes for printing 134 Q I have multiple kiosks sending orders to the PIC but the problem is the order numbers overlap how do I prevent this from happening so I don t lose orders at the PIC A You can change the order number on the kiosk by making modifications within the Registry Please call or email support for the correct location to modify the next order number Once you have instructions on this make sure to keep the next order number to 4 digits and only make an incremental change such as a difference of 100 between the orders This will help prevent the creation of other issues Noritsu CT Protocol DPOF OSS Hot Folder and Net Order Q Where can I change the text that is printed on the back of my photos and what are my options for the back print text A Under the printer configuration section of the Setup Wizard you may change the text printed for both lines of the photo back print If you click in the back print field for line 1 or line 2 the list of available back print options is displayed at the bottom of the screen The options currently available include the order number product name product ID surface finish of the photo the quantity the original file name the item index the year the month and the date You may also add generic text to the fields such as a store
216. isk U3 may require additional configuration on older systems in order to work properly The media card slots on APM machines supplied by Lucidiom are labeled with the device name or image of the media The APM will read images off multiple media types for the same order so you can insert more than one media type and the images will be displayed together in the photo selection screens By default the APM has Auto Media Detection enabled this setting may be modified in the Setup Wizard so the page will advance immediately upon media insertion If this feature is disabled or if the APM does not recognize the media press the Continue button to advance See the following pages for guidelines on loading images via Bluetooth or infrared devices Additional Import Options The APM software is capable of importing media in several other ways including scanning photos downloading images from a Bluetooth enabled device downloading images from an infrared enabled device or downloading images from a Photo Finale online membership account Scanning Photos If you have a scanner attached and configured to work with the APM software selecting the EA Scan photos button will take you directly to the scanning workflow See chapter 4 for more details about scanning photos in the APM software This option may be used to place orders Scan photos from existing photos solely or in addition to photos from your media Scanning Import Button Blu
217. ith the scanned image press the SES a Done button You will have the option to add more scanned photos on the next screen Rescan 5 If there are more images to scan default maximum is 15 press the Scan More button on the next screen 6 When finished press the Done Scanning button The scanned image s is are available for use The software will take you immediately to the print workflow as stated in the previous chapter to order prints of the images you have scanned Note If you wish to use scanned images for creative or Scan another photo or press the Done Scanning button Folio products then you must use the Scan photos button on the Load Media screen prior to accessing the Product Selection screen Scan Done More Scanning You have scanned 1 If you are done scanning photo s The maximum don t forget to take your scans per order is 20 photos Scan More Done Scanning Screen 39 Passport Photos Once you have enabled passport photos in the Setup Wizard the APM software will display the passport photos option To order passport photos Select the Passport amp ID Photos button on the Product Selection screen and then choose from the available fulfillment options as described in Chapter 2 The Image Selection screen displays all of the images on your media Select the image that you would like to use for the passport photo If you are selecting from a large be number of images you
218. its e The workgroup name of the DKS minilab is Pe eee a INDO W S isystem32 C WINDOWS COM EXE BAT CMD VBS VBE J5 IMPAG If need be the Lab 50 machine or PROCESSOR A x86 j the APMs printing directly to it may need to be configured to be part of this workgroup e The username for the minilab is DKS and the password is blank This username may need to be added to the local users group on the Required Environment Variables for DKS machine running Lab 50 or on the APMs if they are sending the orders to the DKS individually 2 The DKS paper sizes in use will need to be known prior to setup so the products in the APM and or Lab 50 software can print to the correct paper 3 On the machine or machines sending the orders special settings may need to be added to the Environment Variables settings in Windows XP Note This should be done for you by the APM software Installer but if this is not the case follow these instructions 214 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Right click on the My Computer icon oe 2 x Select Properties Variable name Path Click on Advanced Time QTSystem C APM C APM Plugins Click on the Environment Variables At the bottom half of the screen in the System a om Variables section scroll down until the PATH option Main Options in the Fulfillment Window appears Highlight PATH and then click on Edit In the variable value field scroll to th
219. itsu DPOF Interface Printers GEN CRT VE a a DPOF Noritsu DPOF Interface 3h Add Printer SCN REV 01 00 GEN CRT NAME APM Add Product To add a product please click here and then on the three dots to the right Product Channel 2006 3 1 2 x 5 Print glossy Product Channel 2006 3 1 2 x 5 Print matte Product IP 701 Print Channel Size Letter Print Size 4 General Print Settings Paper Width a Print Station Settings g Products Printed Here Index Book Settings z7 Product Matrix All Fulfillments Paper Height DPI Finish glossy Delete product channel To delete this product click here and then on the three dots to the right Product Channel 2001 4x 6 Print matte Product Channel 2002 5 x 7 Print glossy Product Channel 2002 5 x 7 Print matte Product Channel 2003 8 x 10 Print glossy Product Channel 2001 4x 6 Print glossy N Fulfillment 1 Express N Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail ate APM Add On Components 1a s GA Printer Configuration Editing an Fxisiting Noritsu DPOF Product Assigning Products to the Noritsu DPOF Interface After the Noritsu DPOF interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 1 Click on the Products Printed Here option in the Primary Navigation Pane In the Customization Pane place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using
220. iven print job Only consumable items purchased directly from Lucidiom should be used in the printer It is not recommended to re use existing consumables refill toner cartridges or use items that are not designed specifically for the printer model in use and doing so may void the warranty on your printer Given the nature of consumable products they should not be stocked Their shelf life is short and can deteriorate if stored in less than ideal conditions such as high humidity environments If consumables must be stocked one year is the longest shelf life in ideal conditions Calibration The EQ 9800 9850 printer needs to be calibrated immediately on first operation and every time thereafter when a consumable is replaced It is also recommended to recalibrate every month This operation upholds the quality of items printed and ensures consistent color throughout the printer s lifespan Once you have become familiar with the process for calibrating your printer it will only take a few minutes each time The importance of regular calibrations at both periodic and consumable replacement intervals cannot be over stressed Supported Densitometers EFI Densitometer e X Rite DTP32 e X Rite DTP 41 e EFI Spectrometer ES 1000 120 EFI Densitometer ED 100 Or any model equivalent to the Eye 1 Pro by X Rite Calibration is done through the use of a densitometer and the Fiery Command Workstation and or the Colorwise tools software
221. just the right border by entering positive numbers to shift the border to the right negative numbers to shift it to the left e Top Border Adjustment Adjust the bottom border by entering positive numbers to shift the border down negative numbers to shift it up e Bottom Border Adjustment Adjust the left border by entering positive numbers to shift the border up negative numbers to shift it down Note Images will be moved but not resized You must use Lucidiom s length notation which is either 1000 x inches or 100 x mm Example 4000in is 4 inches 15000mm is 15 cm e Printer DPI can be changed to a higher or lower value depending on the configuration of the printer but by default it is set to 300 Assigning Products to the Windows Printer Interface After the Windows Printer interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 212 REE Ble yeb 1 Click on the Products Printed Here option in the Primary Navigation nq ines arama M Send modais to diferent punters based on the h nen lexmeess prckup mall Pane T Send peocbucts to different printers based on thelr sutlace iginssy matie Products 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillm
222. kup mall Pane T Send peocucts to different printers based on thelr slaer ginssy matte Products 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish A tuifiiment 3 express e Fulfillment 2 Pick Up BA Futtiliment 3 raii e If Send products to different iii printers based on the fulfillment is Printer Configuration checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments e If Send products to different B aami ma ir 46 GC FIS KIS L co printers based on their surface is Fla cas SON ns Flai Cade KIS KIS DKS eta x10 Wal An 6003 8x10 Wall Aa KIS KIS DKS Interface checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all Thao available columns Lettini m Fulfillment 2 Pick Up A Fulfillment 3 Mail The last step involves assigning the p3 Apn add On Components printed products to the printer interface I oreraa 1 Click on the Product Matrix All Product Matrix S
223. l Support The contact information provided below may be used to obtain the latest drivers documentation and other information from the manufacturers of products commonly used in conjunction with the Lucidiom APM Atech Card Readers Phone 1 866 85 ATECH 1 866 852 8324 Email support atechflash com http www atechflash com Canon Phone 1 800 828 4040 Web http www usa canon com consumer Copal Phone 800 669 5262 or 973 625 5982 Fax 973 625 9489 Email support copalprinter com Web http www copalprinter com support php Epson Web http www epson com cgi bin Store support SupportIndex jsp Mitsubishi Technical Support Phone 888 307 0309 Technical Support Fax 949 859 4770 Technical Support Email TSupport mdea com Web http www mitsubishi imaging com docs support support asp Star Micronics Receipt Printer Technical Support Phone 732 623 5555 x105 Technical Support Fax 732 623 5595 Technical Support Email userhelp starmicronics com Web Site http www starmicronics com Shinko Technical Support Phone 800 597 4351 Technical Support Fax 732 623 5595 Technical Support Email support kedigtal com Web Site http www kedigital com Unibind Web Site http www unibind com Basic contact html The APM Software Suite amp Icons The APM software consists of the following components Fal gt P A Hardware Attendant The Hardware Attendant controls and mo
224. l be erased upon boot up The recommended default is three days e Glossy Surface Code The code for the glossy surface as specific in the JobMaker paperinfo ini file Default setting is G e Matte Surface Code The code for the matte surface as specific in the JobMaker paperinfo ini file Default setting is M e Automatic Image Correction Performs automatic image correction for all photos These settings are defined in the JobMaker software Default setting is True Product Setup within the Fuji JobMaker Interface Each product size available in the APM and or Lab 50 software will need to be configured to match up with the appropriate paper sizes that are setup in the Fuji software Each product has its own internal APM Product ID Configuring Products 1 Select the Product Settings line to highlight it the area around Product Settings will turn blue 2 Click the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side 3 This will launch the Product Renderings window There are options to either Add Edit or Delete each product 22 Product Renderings x Nene width fe o oe J pi 4x6 Print 5 00 in 4 00 in 300 OK 5x7 Print 7 00 in 5 00 in 300 Cancel 8x10 Print 10 00 in 8 00 in 300 3x5 Print 5 00 in 3 50 in 300 8x12 Print 12 00 in 3 00 in 300 Add 4x5 Print 5 00 in 4 00 in 300 45 33 Print Sok IM 4 00 in 300 Edit 6x8 Print 3 00 in 6 00 in 300 4x6 Exclusive 6 00 in 4 00 in 300 Delete Sx
225. l products after a product has been created e Limit Folio Folded Card Products to the following Quantity Values This option gives a pre defined list of increment values for customers to choose from when they order more than one of a folded card The list can be changed as desired Note Photo folio templates are not viewable in the Setup Wizard at this time Configuring Passports The Passport Add On component allows your customers to quickly and easily order passport photos from the APM The passport prints onto a 4x6in or 10x15cm print There are templates available for multiple countries and they may be ordered within a single order To Enable Passport Photos on the APM Click on the APM Add On Components option in the Category Navigation Pane Click on the Passport Photos option in the Primary Navigation Pane Check the Enable Passport Photos Add On option at the top of the Customization Pane Select the type of print settings to use for processing the passport photos 2 per 4x6 4 per 4x6 or 6 per 4x6 NS 10x15cm for metric installations Set the Default Fulfillment to Use for passport orders by selecting a fulfillment from the drop down menu Check the boxes for all fulfillments in which the passport option will be offered oy pi Once the Passport settings have been configured the Passport product will need to be added to the selected fulfillment s and the price will need to be set The Passport product will also need
226. lay dropdown menu to select the default order of images on the print thumbnail screen You can choose Thumbnail Style Prints amp CDs Workflow Center cut cropped Aspect corect Thumbnail Selection Type Allow multiple thumbnail select Single thumbnail select only Image Sort Default Alphabetical Default Filename Setting between Alphabetical Oldest First or Newest First The customer can Filenames ON by default Filesnames OFF by default change these sorting options themselves on the thumbnail screen m Languages while ordering prints Languages Offered Default Language lv Catalan English Czech Languages Offered Allows Croatian Danish 1 1 German selection of a variety of languages sines that can be used in the APM Italian software or Norwegian Polish Portuguese gt Note At least one language must be checked M Miscellaneou Options MV Enable Automatic Media Detection V Hide Cursor Display Default Language Selects the default d in the APM D Eea ee User Interface Settings Screen software This language must also be checked in the languages offered list Enable Automatic Media Detection Allows for auto detection of the media We recommend that you always leave this option checked Note This also assumes that all device letters are configured properly Please se
227. le Please contact sales to renew support for multiple kiosks Q Do I have to have my kiosks online to reactivate or update the license A No there are ways that allow for updating licenses offline However having a kiosk online helps automate the process for updates and can save much time and hassle when it comes to updating renewing and changing licensing APM Statistics Q How do I track the usage of my APM A Assuming that the APM is connected to the internet your APM automatically sends data to the APM Network To see this data log on to http www apmprofitwatcher com If you have lost or forgotten your APM Network password please contact Support APM Icons Q What are all those icons that appear at the bottom of my APM machine when I am at the desktop A Several programs comprise the APM system and these are setup to start automatically and run in the background These applications are represented by icons in the system tray on the bottom right side of your screen 124 These typically include the APM Hardware Attendant APM RAS Server Remote Update Print Server and APM Dispatcher For more detailed information on the functions of these applications please see Chapter 9 Archived Orders Q How long are the orders archived on the APM A By default orders that are printed locally via Print Server are saved for 7 days This time limit can be changed to as long as 60 days These settings can be changed in the Print
228. le printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish 176 ox File Hel e IfSend products to different Pe a apoE T Send products to different printers based on the fulfilment express pickup mail printers based on the fulfillment T Send products to different printers based on their surface glossy matte is checked the Product Matrix lt i option in the Primary Navigation ainame S Pane will expand from one to EPEE three selections based upon the E peren three fulfillments Paar oa 4x 12 Panoramic Print 4 5 x 6 Print 5x 5 Print 5 x 6 Print 5x 6 5 Print 5 x 7 Print 5 25 x 7 25 Envelope Print 5x 7 5 Print 5x 14Print 6 x 6 Print 6 x 8 Print 6x 9 Print 6 x 12 Print s7 Product Matrix All Fulfillments e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in aaa the Product Matrix option will preen expand to offer both glossy and E rutfiment 3 main matte options for each product l Kiloa mae Kiosk Settings 7x 10 Print 8x 8 Print 8 x 9 Print Rx 10 Print SUUOUUUUUOUUUUUUOUOUOIE a Printer Configuration Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns C sewwa T fhe Hep Printer Configuration Printers a Add Prince o 2003 8410 Print The last step involves assignin 8 the
229. ler Summer 2008 12 3 2008 APM ID Creative Content 2008 Release 4 3 Creative Content 2008 Release 4 Dec 2008 Rey 403 REQUIRES 2008 RELEASE 1 12 31 2008 APM Software version Creative Content 2006 Release Creative Content 2003 Release 2 Patch Aug 2003 Rev 201 REQUIR 09 24 Creative Content Wrapping Paper Creative Content Wrapping Paper Add On 2008 1 j Creative Content 2006 Release 1 6 0 Creative Content Installer Disc 4 June 2008 Rev 101 Creative Content 2006 Release 1 6 0 Creative Content Installer Disc 2 June 2008 Rev 101 Creative Content 2008 Release 1 6 0 Creative Contert Installer Disc 3 June 2003 Rev 101 Creative Content 2008 Release 1 6 0 Creative Content Installer Disc 1 une 2008 Rev 101 Lucidiom Downloader Preferences gt General 113 Preferences General Check for Downloads Downloads General Check for Downloads Downloads Destination Folder 7 Automatically Check for Available Downloads Gheck Every URL for Downloads List http fwww apmnetwork com HTTP Port 60 cova Preferences gt Check for Downloads Preferences gt Downloads You can also configure the Lucidiom Downloader tool to automatically look for available downloads This is configured via Settings gt Preferences gt Check for Downloads The URL and HTTP port should not be changed Lastly you can change the default download location via Settings gt Prefe
230. les will be copied from a customer s media device and archived onto an Image CD DVD By default non image files include the following file extensions avi mov Moov mpg mpeg mp4 wmv aac ac3 aif aiff asf divx dv mp2 mp3 gt wav and wma File extensions may be added and removed as necessary This option only applies if the order is burned at the APM The following settings should only be changed if the APM machine has two or more CD R RW or DVD R W drives installed If this is the case use the Drive Settings section to set the correct drive letter for the device dedicated to burning discs e CD R DVD R Drive Letter Select the Drive Letter as it is shown in Windows Explorer 68 e CD R DVD R Drive Index This needs to be changed only if there is more than one drive on the system running the APM software and if changing the drive letter alone doesn t allow the disc to burn at the kiosk e CD Capacity MB Set the maximum size that your blank CD R discs can hold The default is 650 Setting this amount higher than the capacity of the disc may produce undesired results e DVD Capacity MB Set the maximum size that your blank DVD R discs can hold The default is 4400 Setting this amount higher than the capacity of the disc may produce undesired results Card Catalog Settings If the Card Catalog product is being offered to your customers use this screen to access and change the universal settings for all card cat
231. lls the paper To retain the exact shape of your photos and have white bars fill the remaining space on the paper turn on this option Lead Order all prints with white borders Shrink Photo to Fit on Paper Not recommended Add white borders to all your prints at no charge White Borders Option Shrink to Fit Option Enhance All Photos Remove Red Eye From All Photos Automatically brighten sharpen and enhance all the Automatically remove red eye from all photos in your photos in your order order a Bact Leal Check here to enhance all photos Z Check here to remove red eye e Auto Enhance Option Auto Red Eye Option Note The Auto Enhance and Auto Red Eye options will both significantly increase the order processing time as edits are applied to every single image in the order Other available order options are outlined on the next pages These options may require additional licensing and components and may also have secondary options that must be configured before the order can be completed Image CD DVD Image Disc This order option gives your customers the ability to create Archive your photos to an Image CD or DVD an Image CD or DVD which can be burned at the kiosk or sent back to the lab The software will automatically as a CD 1 Disc calculate how many discs need to be burned to include 2 99 every image in the order and it will report the price next to ji DVD 1 Disc Em Mays the selectio
232. lor correction settings should be adjusted in the scanner driver settings Please reference your scanner documentation for further information on making these changes Q When the customer scans there is white space on the right and bottom side of the image is this normal A Yes the scanner does a best fit scan based upon the scan area selected 4x6 5x7 8x10 all other sizes This accounts for any images that may slightly exceed the size The customer can use the arrows to the right of the scanned image for setting the desired results Q How many images can I scan at a time A The software is setup to scan up to 20 images per order for flatbed scanners However if the scanner is a multi or stack image scanner the limitation is within the scanner settings Q I have a scanner but it is not on the current supported scanners list Can I use it with the APM A While we highly recommend that only supported scanners are used with the APM we do understand that makes and models change As long as the latest driver is loaded there may be a way to get the unsupported scanner to work provided it is aname brand such as Epson or Canon Please contact technical support for assistance Support cannot guarantee that scanners not on the supported scanners list will work in the kiosk software Kodak Stack Scanner Q My scanner seems to scan two prints as one Why is this happening and how do I prevent it A Make sure that the customer flips through hi
233. ly in use by a customer Please come back later automatically as you add prints to your order 2 To switch between photos simply touch the photo 3 To easily add one 4x6 to each of your images press the Auto Add button 4 To clear all print selections you have made press the Reset Order button 5 To view a larger version of the selected image or to edit it press the Magnify and Edit Photo button 6 Press the Continue button when you are done selecting prints Close Help Help Screen Order Hold Screen Printing and Fulfillment Options Once the product selection has been fully defined the Select Service screen displays the available fulfillment options You can configure the APM to provide up to three fulfillment options Each fulfillment can provide different products prices and features based on the capabilities of your lab and your business objectives The options and text within the buttons can be customized in the Setup Wizard See Chapter 6 Note If the product selected is only configured under one service type then this screen will be skipped and you will be taken directly to the thumbnail screen to begin selecting images for the selected product 15 The three fulfillments in the software were originally designed around three standard types of order pickup options However you can configure your APM based on the printing capabilities offered by your facility and you are not restricted to using these fulfill
234. m left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch SS a D Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select KIS DKS Interface In the Printer Name field enter KIS or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created KIS DKS Interface option on the top left to display the options for this interface oy Oe ee a e TRAE File Help Printer Configuration Printers i ey KIS KIS DKS Interface DKS Path DKS yep_dks sortie_print Sy Add Printer DKS Alternate Priority Path DKS yep_dks ordre_externe Temporary Folder Path C APM_FOLDERS DKS_Tmp Priority to Alternate Path hold Express Primary Priority norma Express Secondary Priority norma Express Prints Cutoff 0 Pickup Primary Priority normal Pickup Secondary Prioriy norma Pickup Prints Cutoff 0 Mail Primary Priority norma Mail Secondary Priority normal Mail Prints Cutoff 0 Settings amp General Print Settings Back Print Line 1 Template Order ORDER FNAME YLNAME Erea S n Back Print Line 2 Template Date MONTH DAY YEAR g Products
235. m in calibrating daily and you may incorporate it into a lab s routine maintenance schedule similar to what you may already do for your minilab printer Q Can I calibrate without a densitometer A Yes there are manual methods for printing out several pages and choosing settings to apply on the printer The process does take longer though and is very subjective Lucidiom recommends that a densitometer be used for the best calibration of the printer Q What are the alcohol wipe and black bag for that came with the new toner A Use the alcohol wipe to clean all four LED heads each time you replace toner The LED heads are long metal strips on the underside of the printer cover As you lift the cover you will notice a black plastic frame that moves over the LED strip To clean open the cover almost all the way so the LED heads are exposed and then use the wipe to go up and down each strip 2 3 times If you don t replace toner very often these heads should be cleaned at least once a week The black bag may be used for disposing of old toner cartridges Q What do I do when pages stick together or when I get paper jams A The screen on the printer will flash to indicate where the paper is stuck Open the indicated drawer or panel and remove any paper then close it back up Tips Make sure to keep the printer in an area where humidity is at a minimum Also you should fan the pages on all four sides prior to putting the media into the tray
236. ma button on the Product Selection screen and then choose from the available fulfillment options as described in Chapter 2 2 Select Order a DVD Cinema on the up sell screens after placing an order in the prints workflow After all options in the up sell screens are selected you will be taken to the DVD Cinema workflow DVD Cinema Once you have selected an option you will be taken to the Order a customized DVD Cinema slideshow with selected Image Multi Select screen photos music and effects for only 0 00 P Use the Image Multi Select screen to indicate which photos ARTAN A Order a DVD Cinema you would like to include when creating your EQ Pro product Image CD DVD Option 45 J Gran Hey F n fe jing photo 67 of x Le F 4 Continue Photo Index Screen 46 Description of Features 1 Touch a thumbnail to select it Selected images will have a green checkmark over them Use the rotate button in the right corner of each thumbnail to rotate the image in 90 degree increments 3 This area reports the numbers of photos you have selected You can select up to 200 images for a DVD slideshow 4 Use these buttons to scroll through your list of images If a scroll button is disabled faded either the end or the beginning of the image set has been reached 5 Press the Select All button to select all the photos
237. materials not transferred Modification reverse engineering reverse compiling or disassembly of the Software is expressly prohibited However if you are a European Union EU resident information necessary to achieve interoperability of the Software with other programs within the meaning of the EU Directive on the Legal Protection of Computer Programs is available to you from Lucidiom upon written request EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You agree that you will not export or re export the Software or accompanying documentation or any copies thereof or any products utilizing the Software or such documentation in violation of any applicable laws or regulations of the United States or the country in which you obtained them TERM AND TERMINATION This License Agreement is effective until terminated You may terminate it at any time by destroying the Software and documentation together with all copies and merged portions in any form It will also terminate immediately if you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License Agreement Upon such termination you agree to destroy the Software and documentation together with all copies GOVERNING LAW This License Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Virginia and by the laws of the United States excluding their conflicts of laws principles The United Nations Conventions on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods 1980 is hereby excluded in its entirety from application to this
238. me field enter Copal or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Windows Printer Interface option in the top left corner to display the options for oY i SS p this interface set wi File Help Printer Configuration Printers a Copal Windows Printer Printer Name ym_galaga West Printer winspool NeO5 24 Add Printer Band Output True Reprint photo on error False Continue Job After Item Failure False Debug Mode False Border Alignment Settings ep General Print Settings a Print Station Settings g Products Printed Here Index Book Settings x Product Matrix All Fulfillments 4 Kiosk Settings N Fulfillment 1 Express N Fulfillment 2 Pick Up N Fulfillment 3 Mail JE APM Add On Components a Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen Windows Printer Interface General Settings e Printer Name Select the Windows printer driver name desired from the drop down menu e Band Output This feature sends blocks of lines to be printed to the Windows spooler which results in faster printing especially for enlargements This should only be set to True for large format printers 211 e Rotate Variable Length This will rotate the image to save on paper usage This should only be set to true Copal Windows Printer O General Settings Printer Name m_galaga West Printer winspool N
239. ment to use for gift product Gift Settings Settings V Enable Gifts Add On Require Approval for Gift Orders Fulfillments in which to offer gift products IY Fulfillment 1 Express Use As Default Customer Delivery Options In Store Pickup w M Fulfillment 2 Pickup Use As Default fF Fulfillment 3 Mail amp Use As Default In Store Delivery Options Do Not Charge for In Store Delivery Charge same Gift Specific S amp H Fees for In Store Pickup as for Ship to Customer Delivery Charge Flat Fee for In Store Pickup In Store Delivery Charge 0 00 Gift Settings orders by selecting the appropriate fulfillment using the radio buttons to the right of the fulfillment options Customer Delivery Options Select the delivery options available to the customer for receiving their gift item The options are In Store Pickup Mail Delivery or Both Pickup amp Delivery If the option Both Pickup amp Delivery is selected the customer will be prompted to select from both options while placing their order In Store Delivery Options Do Not Charge for In Store Delivery No charge will apply for orders that are picked up at the store Charge same Gift Specific S amp H Fees for In Store Pickup as for Ship to Customer Delivery The shipping fee entered for each product under the Gift Products section will apply regardless of whether the order is mailed or picked up at the stor
240. ments in the way in which they are presented here For more information on fulfillment configuration please see Chapter 6 Fulfillment 1 Express Designed to offer prints of one X You have three service options or two commons sizes e g 4x6 and 5x7 printed to an express dye sublimation printer while the customer waits Fulfillment 2 Pickup Designed for prints and creative products that are available for next day pick up by the customer Using this option you can have customers Available products and prices are Pick up your photos here the next Photos are printed and mailed to i listed below business day Available products whatever address you specify return to the store or to another remote location to pick up mee pesos ar fetes below rome pryda DEE their photos Fulfillment 3 Mail Delivery Design for prints and creative products that may be processed at your photo lab an associated remote lab or at a central fulfillment lab that od Select Service Screen is part of Lucidiom s network To choose a fulfillment option simply press the panel for the service desired This will take you to the ordering options for the product you have selected or the thumbnail screen to choose images for the product you wish to create Note Once you choose the fulfillment option certain workflows may no longer be available after placing the item in the shopping cart This is due to the fact that the products in a differe
241. mer phone number e Render DPI Enter the desired render DPI in this field The default is 300 169 MFD Gretag MasterFlexD El General Settings Hot Folder MFD XXXX HotFoldersEx Images Aspect Ratio Match FillWithCrop Schema WMFD XXXX HotFoldersEx TrxHotFolderOrderSchema xml Inspect Orders False Apply LDC True Print File Name On Back False Wait For Result File True Time Out Seconds 120 Succeed On Timeout False Print Index False Index Width 4 00 Index Height 6 00 Debug Mode False Assigning Products to the Masterflex Interface After the Gretag Masterflex interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print C sowa iii ix File Help 1 Click on the Products Printed Printer Configuration Here option mn the Primary ee Gretag Pare T Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment express pickup mail Navigation Pane 7 Send products to different printers based on their surface glossy matte 2 Inthe Customization Pane place Products 2x 3 Print a chec mark next to all of the aee Coi C 4x 4Print products that will be printed xSP C 4x 5 33 Print using the local APM printing 4x5 5Pint General Print Settings engine a Print Station Settings ps Ain Nl t Products Printed Here 4x 9 Print Index Book Settings x 10 Prin 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Nay Product Matrix Al Fuinens 4x 12 Panoramic Print 4 5 x 6 Print 5x 5
242. mponents Se Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen Noritsu QSS Hotfolder General Settings e Folder This should be set the same value as the HotFolder Directory path in the Noritsu QSS HotFolder software Default is C NoritsuQSSHotFolder If the folder is located on a separate machine on which Noritsu OSS Hot Folder software is installed the computer name needs to be included e g ComputerName NoritsuQSSHotFolder e Timeout Seconds Leave as default which is 60 OSS Noritsu Q55 Hotfolder Interface seconds ae instructed to change for L General settings troubleshooting purposes Folder coNoritsugSSHotFolder Time Out Seconds 60 e Paper Fitting Flag Defines what fit the QSS Paper Fitting Flag Real software should use for prints Options are Seiak 2 i Back Print 1 Order 0RDER S ibem gt I TEM Real Shrink and Crop Default is Real Back Print 2 ODM Surface Glossy l e CMS Flag When set to On the QSS software Surface Matte Success On Time Gut True Render Images False Render DPI 300 Product Paper Sizes 0 products configured will use the color management profile of the printer Set to Off by default e Back Print 1 and Back Print 2 Used to specify the desired back print format using the case sensitive parameters listed below Default is to print the APM order number and the item number ORDER ITEM 194 The following is a list of
243. n W Black T Shirt Small Black T Shirt Medium Biack T Shirt Larg Black T Shirt X Large E E ed t d k a 2 4 i j 5 E L d p J h Adit Shirt Lng Sleeve Sm Adit Shirt Lng Sleeve Med Adit Shirt Lng Sleeve Lg Adit Shirt Lng Sleeve X Lg irt Me arge Gift Product Selection 42 Creating a Gift Product After the appropriate template has been selected you will be shown a screen that displays an image of the gifting product with an area highlighted for the image placement If you wish to choose another gift press the Change Gift button to return to the previous screen and choose a new product To continue ordering the selected gift simply touch or click the area that says Touch to Enter Photo Touch the photo area to the left to select a picture y Change Gift Photo Gift Template Screen The Image Selection screen will appear and display all of the images on your media Select the image that you would like to use for the gifting product If you are selecting from a large number of images you can use the arrow buttons on the right side of the screen to scroll through the images Gifting products only support one image at a time 4 You have 85 photos Touch a photo to select it for your order A o oy Ames amp Image Selection Screen Once you have selected your image you will be returned to the Template screen Use t
244. n have auto only manual only or both auto and manual tools turned on for red eye and color You may set the crop to aspect correct cropping or you may set an aspect ratio Q If I make any corrections such as red eye removal color corrections or cropping will these be saved on the Image CD A All red eye and color corrections will be applied to the images saved on the CD but cropping changes will not be applied You can enable the option to save both the edited and original versions of the images to the CD via the Setup Wizard Please see Chapter 6 for additional information Q Can a customer order a CD DVD without ordering any prints A Yes a customer can order just an Image CD DVD on the Quick Order screen To turn on this screen open the Setup Wizard enable the Quick Order screen for the fulfillments that you have then save the changes Q My customers are getting warnings for their images what s wrong with the images they have A If a customer has small files that don t meet the minimum industry standard resolution requirements they are given a warning that the resolution of the photos may affect the quality of the printed image The requirements vary from size to size based upon the needs to print a decent image This warning can also be configured to prohibit them from printing images for a given size if they are too small 125 APM Software Windows Adding a Printer Q I want to add another printer to my APM can
245. nalize the order of Zoom Album The Zoom Album is a mini hard cover photo album 2 5 x 2 5 created from your customers digital photos Zoom Albums print on a standard inkjet printer using perforated sticker paper and they are assembled by hand using easy to follow instructions included with each creation kit Zoom Album templates are available through the Photo Folio workflow of the APM software To order Zoom Album supplies paper and covers please contact your regional sales representative Albums are created in the same fashion as a regular Photo Folio book as detailed in the previous section Each Zoom Album template is printed as a single page and then folded to create the individual pages of the book The APM software also offers the ability to create a custom photo cover for the book Zoom Album While the product configuration is similar to other Photo Folio products there are some additional steps needed to ensure printed pages are properly aligned for album assembly For more information on configuring Photo Folio products please see Chapter 7 on Configuring Add On Components For more information on configuring the Zoom Album product please contact technical support for the latest Answer Book covering driver settings and supported printers 58 Chapter 6 General APM Configuration Accessing the Admin Screens The APM software is extremely flexible and allows you to tailor the user interface to
246. name It is important to correctly format the tags with percentage symbols around the item and to enter the name correctly in all capital letters Q How do I know which folder s correspond with the order number printed on the receipt A Under the printer configuration section of the Setup Wizard there is an option to Use APM Order Number When this value is set to true the last 6 digits of the order number from the receipt are used in naming the order folders All images placed in that folder will correspond with that particular order For example if the order number 102501014 is printed on the receipt then all folders with the numbers 501014 correspond with that particular order Q How do I know which print channel to enter in the Setup Wizard for each size A The print channels are configured on each printer In order to ensure these are setup correctly in the APM software you will need to access the channel listing on your printer It is important to assign each size to a print channel so the printer will know how to handle each print size that is sent over to it for processing Q My orders won t transfer over to my printer The order folders end with err why won t they work A Please reference the appendix for the printer interface that you are attempting to print through and confirm that you have correctly configured all of the print settings Once the product has been added to a fulfillment it also needs to be config
247. nd can be accessed Make sure they are shared on the network and all users can access and change the files The default locations are APM XXXX Frontier FrontierTemp and APM XXxXX Frontier Frontierlmages where the XXXX is your APM ID number Q My order will send over to the PIC but it just sits there with a status of Busy or reports that 0 images are in the order A Make sure the image file location as shown in the Setup Wizard is accessible over the network from the PIC This may require installing the NETBEUI protocol and making sure that the PIC can access this folder without having to login to the network share using a username and password The busy indicator is the PIC reporting that it has received the order but it cannot access the images Make sure the Windows Firewall is turned off at the kiosk and no other firewall applications are running Alternatively you can set the image file location as a directory on the PIC machine rather than the kiosk Q My order comes over to the PIC and I can see the images but for some reason certain sizes do not print Where can I find a listing of the correct Fuji product codes for my machine A Make sure that the right Fuji product codes are entered for each size in the printer configuration of the Setup Wizard This applies to the Code and Border Code fields for each size in the product rendering settings Please note that these values are case sensitive for example 4x6
248. nitors all applications in the APM software suite When the APM is turned on or restarted the Hardware Attendant automatically launches all of the necessary applications for the APM to run properly The Hardware Attendant may be set to automatically shut down or restart the APM each night Kiosk The Kiosk application is the main component of the APM Itis the interface used by your customers to place their orders in store Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard component is the tool used to add and configure products pricing and printer interface settings in the APM software Print Server The Print Server is used to connect an APM to a local printer that is directly connected to the APM or accessible through a local network As orders are placed at the APM they are routed to the local printer and printed immediately Dispatcher The Dispatcher controls communications between the APM and the APM Network as well as print fulfillment centers The Dispatcher monitors the APM identifies files to transmit such as an order session or registration file and initiates a connection to transfer the files The Dispatcher communicates using standard File Transfer Protocol FTP Remote Update The Remote Update component contacts the APM Network daily to search for new software updates When an update is available Remote Update automatically downloads and installs it the next time the APM machine is restarted Remote Logger The Remote Logger is a diagnos
249. ns 0 00 0 Q Select which type of disc you would like to burn Use the Image CD DVD Option and buttons to increase or decrease the number of disc sets you would like to order Example If the software calculates that 3 CDs need to be created to account for all the images in an order and the quantity box is set to 2 then 6 discs will be burned 29 DVD Cinema This option is only available if the software is licensed for the DVD Cinema component Once this option is checked and after all other order options have been chosen you will be taken directly to the DVD Cinema ordering workflow Once the DVD Cinema creation is complete you will return to the Shopping Cart Card Catalog This order option gives your customers the ability to create a proof book product with thumbnails of their images Settings that can be configured in the Setup Wizard include the default size of the card catalog number of rows and columns to use on each page for thumbnail display and photo EXIF data to include with each photo Your store s custom logo will be printed on the cover provided you have configured one in the Setup Wizard For DVD Cinema Order a customized DVD Cinema slideshow with selected _ photos music and effects for only 0 00 eal Order a DVD Cinema Image CD DVD Option Card Catalog Get a proof book of your photos with just one touch for as low as 19 95 Order a Card Catalog quick book Ca
250. nstructed for troubleshooting purposes C8 Fuji C8 PrintPix NC1000 A General Settings Hot folder FRONTEND C8Spool Printing Mode Fuji C8 Device name SP1SRGB ID APM Resizing method Wait for print Indicate success on timeout Timeout Seconds Configure Product Channels 5 products configured Fuji C8 PrintPix NC 1000 General Settings 152 Product Setup within the Fuji C8 PrintPix NC 1000 Interface The print sizes for glossy and matte as setup in the C8 PrintPix NC 1000 software on the Frontier will also need to be setup in the interface within the APM software in order to properly process orders 1 Select the Configure Product Channels line to highlight it the area around Configure Product Channels will turn blue 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side 3 A window called Product Channels will open which will allow for adding editing and deleting product channels As an example highlight the 4x6 Print 2001 product and click Edit Product Channels 4x6 Print 2001 4G Sx Print 2002 SS7G 8x10 Print 2003 8x106 3 55 Print 2006 SK3G 8x12 Print 2010 812G Delete Edit Product Channels within the C8 Interface 4 Change the channels as necessary for all four settings including Glossy No Border Glossy Border Matte No Border and Matte Border Note The settings are case sensitive and must be typed in exactly as they appear in the C8 software Produc
251. nt 3 enon a the aoe vor ng eee Add window There are options to Edit 4x5 Print 445 33 Print __ Fat or Delete each product 2024 Print 4 For each product configured for D si me Delete a Workflow only the paper width in mm 8x10 Card d b fed 4x8 Card needs to be spected 9x12 Card b D Workflow Product Configuration Window Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail 144 Assigning Products to the D Workflow Interface After the D Workflow interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print Tox File Help 1 Click on the Products Printed Printer Configuration Printers Here option mM the Primary 4 de ames hierie Tl Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment express pickup mail Navigation Pane 7 Send products to different printers based on their surface glossy mattel Products 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a checkmark next to all of the 3 iz xA Print riage ij 4x 5 25 Print fed 4x 5 33 Print products that will be printed 23 3m p Settings x 7 Prin using the local APM printing k ciar rae ii
252. nt The PIC PRO software is not deployed on the Fuji Frontier very frequently This interface should not be used unless you are certain you have the PRO software as the PIC 2 6 interface described in Appendix D is used in most installations Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the PIC machine across the local area network and vice versa Note If a firewall is enabled on one or more of the machines it may need to be reconfigured to let each machine writes files to the other 2 The Fuji Machine must have the ability to pull files from the APM and or Lab 50 machine s 3 The APM and or Lab 50 machine should be able to access to the data folders on the PIC machine Example LabServer1 Order Data Note This may require creating a new user account to match the account on the PIC machine 4 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options MV Enable this fulfillment Print Settiags ssc I This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab
253. nt in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options MV Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting up the Noritsu DPOF Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to Noritsu DPOF Interface This process includes the following steps a pa Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings Product setup from within the interface Assigning printable products to the interface Pulling the order into the Noritsu software 178 Editing the Noritsu DPOF Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Se
254. nt workflow may not be configured for the selected fulfillment iojedoiew Shopping Cart Once your products have been created and ordered the Shopping Cart screen displays all of the products RI y pice pct sips wing i 2e currently added to the order To continue shopping for more products click on the Continue Shopping button to return to the Product Selection screen You may i Pha cP 0 Pe Pee configure the APM to limit the number of items in the 7 11x8 5 Hard Cover 20 Page Black Linen cart via the Setup Wizard Note Once you choose to order through a service option the available product selections will be enabled or disabled based on that service option For instance if you order one 4x6 print through the Fulfillment 2 Pickup service option and the Passport product is only an available through the Fulfillment 1 Express option Check Out then you will not be able to select the Passport product Shopping Cart Screen until you start a new order 16 Use the Edit button next to each product to go back to the editing screens or touch the Remove button to delete a product from your order Press the Back button to return to the order options for the last product that was created Once you have added all of the products you would like to order press the Check Out button to finalize the order Order Summary amp Payment After checking out the Summary and Payment screens will appear to allow verifi
255. ntro Movie Play the jpgs instead of the intro movie C Scatter jpas between existing scenes Play jpgs all together at the beginning Hide all jpas Browse your APM for the jpas you wish to use in the intro movie Required size 1024x768 They will play in the order in which you define them Browse Browse Browse Browse Browse Browse Browse Browse Browse Browse Browse TEEPE EERIE ALAA Browse Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Remove Branding Intro Movie You can also customize the APM with your business logo and or a custom Flash movie To do this click on the Customize Logo option in the Primary Navigation Pane underneath the Branding section 75 Customizing the Logo 1 Check the Use Custom Logo in APM Software and on receipt option 2 Press the Change Logo button and locate your image file on the local hard drive Note The image must be in JPEG BMP or TIFF format 3 Press the Open button in the dialog box after selecting your image Your custom image will then be applied Customizing the Intro Movie 1 Check the Use Custom Intro Movie option Press the Change Movie button and locate your movie file on the local hard drive Note The file must be a compiled Flash movie in SWF format Additionally the custom movie should be 1024x768 pixels have a graphical background built into
256. o Burn At Kiosk PDF Printer Kodak Stack Scanner ue Theme amp Intro Movie R Customize Logo N Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up A Fulfillment 3 Mail ee APM Add On Components a Printer Configuration ae Setup Wizard Screen Kiosk Settings Once the Setup Wizard has opened the Kiosk Settings section is selected in the category navigation pane and kiosk information is shown in the customization pane This provides an overview of the software version APM ID number basic system information and licenses activated for use on the kiosk This section also controls the following settings from the primary navigation pane e Location Settings Use this screen to enter basic store information e Lab 50 Integration Used to configure integration with the Lab 50 software for membership pricing and discount updates e User Interface Settings Configuration for thumbnail settings media detection and languages e Product Selection Settings Use this screen to set the four featured products at the top of the Product Selection Screen e Cropping Settings Use this screen to select a fixed dual or exact mode of photo cropping These settings are fully explained on the screen for each option e Promotions amp Coupons Use this screen to add edit or delete coupons e Pickup Locations Use this screen to add edit or delete pickup locations e Pricing Model Use this scr
257. oduct Code The PIC Product code to use for processing Image CDs at the printer The default value is CD Product Setup within the Fuji PIC 2 6 Interface Each product size available in the APM and or Lab 50 software will need to be configured to match with the appropriate paper sizes that are setup in the PIC software Each product has its own internal APM Product ID Product Rendering Settings Configuring Products guong eh E E N dene oa 1 Select the Canvas line to highlight it the area around Canvas will turn blue 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side 3 This will launch the Product Rendering Settings window There are options to Add Edit or Delete each product Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y mm B ma B oa BA oa S oa BA ma BA ma BA m GA a GA m GA m mm B m A oa A oas S mas SA mam SA ma E ma A m A m A m Adding Editing Products 1 Click the Add button or select an existing product and click the Edit Product Rendering within the Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 Interface button Select the product from the Name pull down menu Enter the Width and Height in inches Ex 8x12 Width 8 00 and Height 12 00 Enter the DPI in the field labeled DPI The default value is 300 If Image Intelligence is used on the PIC Select Y in the Optimize field Set the Retouch and Orient Fields to 0 SS N 159 7 Inthe Code field enter a Product Rendering the Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6
258. oducts to the interface 187 Editing the Noritsu NetOrder Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it Select Print Server Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch oS e Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Noritsu NetOrder In the Printer Name field enter NetOrder or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Noritsu NetOrder Interface option in the top left corner to display the options for this interface OS oe e O semwa ix File Help Printer Configuration Printers a NetOrder Noritsu NetOrder Interface QSS IP Address di Add Printer Time Out Seconds Debug Wait For Print Matte Surface 2 Glossy Surface 1 Index Print False Back Print 1 S ORDER _ ITEM _ PRODUCT FINISH OTY Back Print 2 Add Product To add a product please click here and then on the three dots to the right Product Paper Size 2006 3 1 2 x 5 Print Product Paper Size 2011 4 x 5 Print Product Paper Size 2012 4 x 5 33 Print f General Print
259. ofitWatcher com will take you to the same website For the purpose of the Dispatcher APM ProfitWatcher and APMNetwork are interchangeable The Dispatcher has several connections that send various types of statistical information to the site You should not change any of the connections APM Dispatcher Connection Tabs Log Records events as the occur using the Dispatcher It may be used to troubleshoot connectivity issues to the APM Network private FTP servers or the APM Order Agent Service 103 APM Anywhere Used to transmit orders for APM Order Agent Orders The Orders connection sends order data products ordered quantities etc to the Lucidiom servers Note Images are not sent with this data Stats The Stats connection sends statistical information to Lucidiom for viewing on APMProfitWatcher com This information may include but is not limited to the time spent on each screen where the customer touched the screen order progress before quitting the help features used the type of media the customer used etc Registration The Registration connection sends a diagnostic message every several hours to confirm that the kiosk is connected to the APM Network and APM ProfitWatcher website and that the APM is up and running This is most useful for remote kiosks where an APM owner can log into the network http www apmprofitwatcher com and confirm that the remote APM is still connecting and working as it should be Updates The
260. older path where orders will be placed y Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up y Fulfillment 3 Mail ue APM Add On Components A a aiil ae Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 170 Noritsu DPOF General Settings Folder Enter the UNC path to the desired folder location where it stores all the incoming orders for Noritsu to pick up Default is C NoritsuDPOFPrinter Other examples that would work would be Labserver APMIncoming D APMOrders etc If the folder location is on the network make sure that this folder is shared out and set to allow other users and computers to modify the files DPOF Noritsu DPOF Interface El General Settings Wait For Response Timeout Seconds Use APM Order Number Suceed On Timeout Purge Complete False 180 False True False Back Print 1 Back Print 2 Render Images True MORDER So Yo TEM So False Net Order Compatibility Supports Duplexing Debug Mode MCR COT Ver mats GE a CR VER 2 00 False False VUO VAM VUQ VNM ATR VUQ VER 01 00 NORITSU KOKI OSSPrint GE 01 00 GEN CRT NAME AFM Use MOC for CD ROMs Add Product CECRI Chi EN REY False To add a product please click here and then on the three dots to the right Wait For Response If set to True the APM software will wait for a printed status from the Noritsu software to determine if the current order was
261. om Album Q Can I use any printer to print Zoom Album Products A Lucidiom currently supports the Canon Pixma 6700D and Canon Pixma iP4500 as printers for the Zoom Album product There have been known issues with certain printers and manufacturers in the past Q Can I use this printer I have setup for the two products for other purposes A Yes but it is best to keep it a dedicated printer for these products APM Software Customizing Receipts Q Can I print more than one receipt at the time of the order A Yes printing more than one copy of the receipt is possible Please see Chapter 6 for more information Q Can I change the text on my receipt A Yes the text can be changed To make changes to the text use the Setup Wizard to customize the settings for each of the fulfillments This is also covered in Appendix R of this manual for more advanced customization Custom Text Q Can I customize the text on the screens A Yes Please see Appendix R of this manual for further information Using My Lab s Logo Q Can I create my own intro movie A Yes you can insert your own intro movie The file will need to be a Flash swf file Please see Chapter 6 for more information on using your own intro movie Q Can I add my logo to the software A Yes the Setup Wizard allows you to choose a jpg bmp or tif file as your logo The logo you import will be used in the intro movie on the receipt and on certain products such as
262. om a front top down perspective view of the tray the paper is fed into the printer through the right hand side of the printer The paper may be fed long edge or short edge first For paper that is not a 1 1 ratio long edge feed should be the default setting This excludes Folded Cards and 12x18 products e Long Edge Feed The longest edge of the paper is fed into the printer first For example with 8 5x11 or A4 paper the 11 inch side is facing the right hand side of the printer This usually refers to a portrait orientation e Short Edge Feed The shortest edge of the paper is fed into the printer first For example with 10x7 or A5 paper the 7 inch side is facing the right hand side of the printer This usually refers to a landscape orientation e Binding The edge long or short on which the finished product is bound For example on an 11x8 5 book the binding is short edge whereas the binding on an 11x8 5 calendar is long edge Short Edge Binding Short Edge Feed Long Edge Binding e Booklet Type Refers to multiple images or layouts being printed on a single side For example you can print an 8 5x11 book on 11x17 paper and fold it in half This setting can either be two up portrait or two up landscape referring to the orientation of the layouts on the page 116 Scoring Refers to a pre made fold crease in the paper This paper type is typically used i ee for the folded card and flip book products
263. on Pane underneath the Branding section The APM software comes with several preset themes the default color palette is Spring To change the theme simply click on the desired theme The software will be displayed in the new theme the next time it is started Select a color palette puogsaecn PELET Fiia anya nann Q E CECH ae 8 Melee F Spring C Summer Autumn Se E e oe 2 ak DRI Ea punn en ak DEREI Ea EELE rE Plate Fg aspas npananssay amTanana Q gi 0go eee EEEE F Q 335 lo C Tech Luci Q P aree rr aV OEREELETE ELEC FEL O kse Platinum Branding Themes 74 Intro Movie To customize the APM intro movie click on the Intro Movie option in the Primary Navigation Pane underneath the Branding section This option allows the APM to show customized JPEGs throughout the intro movie that continuously plays when the software is not in use To add custom content to the intro movie 1 Create a JPEG file sized 1024 x 768 pixels and save it on the kiosk s hard drive 2 To add this image to the intro movie click on the Browse button and find the image saved on the hard drive 3 You may add up to 12 JPEG files Use the radio buttons above the browse boxes to customize how the selected JPEGs are presented to the user 4 To remove a JPEG file from the movie simply hit the Remove button Customize Logo Branding Intro Movie M Customize I
264. on the screen 6 Use the options in the Sort By tabs to order the thumbnails by the method indicated e Name orders the thumbnails alphabetically from A Z ascending based upon the filename of the images This is the default selection e Oldest sorts the thumbnails from oldest to newest based upon the file creation date and time of the image e Newest sorts the thumbnails from newest to oldest based upon the file creation date and time of the image Note The Oldest and Newest tabs use the actual file creation date time of the image file to determine the sort order On some cameras this may differ from the date time that the image was actually taken 7 Use the options in the Show tabs to filter which thumbnails are displayed based upon the chosen method e All Photos shows all images that have been loaded into the APM software This is the default selection e By Date Range filters the images that are shown based upon a specified date range When selecting this tab a window will display options to specify the date range Use the and buttons to change the dates When finished press Filter e Folder filters the thumbnails based upon certain subdirectories on the inserted media When selecting this tab a window will display a list of the subdirectories of all the media inserted To filter by a particular subdirectory select it and press Filter Select a date range Select a folder Summer 2008 42 photds ea ee i Re 2009
265. on to choose and design each layout page manually This screen may be skipped depending on your configuration settings See Chapter 7 on configuring the Photo Folio Add On Component for further information The option to add additional pages to your folio product may be displayed as well This page presents the opportunity to up sell your customers additional pages to expand their book product to include more photos as well as the ability to increment pricing based on additional pages The option to add pages will vary from product to product and is also available during product creation Note You can define a price for additional pages on a per product basis in the Setup Wizard 53 F TA x Please select an option below then press Continue Manual Placement Start from scratch and design each page yourself selecting from the available photos backgrounds and layouts Save time Let the software automatically place the selected photos for you You can still make full adjustments to photo placement and layout after they Continue Autofill Options Editing EQ Pro Products Please select an option below then press Continue Wow you have a lot of photos We recommend that you add more pages to your product Yes add 30 more page to better fit all my photos 50 Pages 20 Pages 29 99 29 99 No only want the selected number of pages Continue Add Pages Screen Once you ve defined a style and c
266. ondary Priority and set the desired priority The options are not set high normal low hold The orders that are set to fall into the priority path category based on the number of prints will be sent to the location set in DKS Alternate Priority Path 4 If any order from any fulfillment is supposed to go to an alternate folder i e DKS Alternate Priority Path then set the priority in the Priority to Alternate Path field The options are not set high normal low hold The priority for this field will typically be the same setting as the Express Secondary Pickup Secondary and Mail Secondary Priorities If the priority is not set then the orders will default back to the folder set in DKS PATH Note For more information on this each field has an explanation at the bottom of the screen when you click on it in the Setup Wizard Product Setup within The DKS Interface Each product needs to be configured with the correct paper magazine size in the DKS Configuring Products x Please select the product from the drop down list and then the 1 Select the Products Configured line to aes ict EE Can highlight it the area around Products rare ow x i Configured will turn blue 2 Click on the small button labeled that So D e i e l ei 1523x102 6x4 102x152 4x6 appears on the right hand side 3 This will launch a dialog with a listing of 178x127 7x5 127x178 5x7 configured products There are opt
267. ons for each product For proper operation make certain that every print product you are offering for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns 98 File Help Printer Configuration Products Printed Here Printers i A Bee ala SHEEN IER aaa IV Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment express pickup mail Sob IV Send products to different printers based on their surface glossy matte Fulfillment 1 Express Fulfillment 2 Pick Up Fulfillment 3 Mail Wallet Print Wallet Print Wallet Print 3 5x5 Print _ 3 5x5 Print 3 5x5 Print 4x5 Print 4x5 Print 4x5 Print 4x5 33 Print 4x5 33 Print 4x5 33 Print 4x6 Print 4x6 Print 4x6 Print 4x8 Print 4x8 Print 4x8 Print 4x12 Print _ 4x12 Print 4x12 Print 5x5 Print 5x5 Print 5x5 Print 5x7 Print 5x7 Print 5x7 Print lt lt General Print Settings 6x6 Print 6x6 Print 6x6 Print La Pri i i 6x8 Print 6x6 Print 6x8 Print 6x9 Print 6x9 Print 6x9 Print 8x8 Print 8x8 Print 8x8 Print zw ent 1 Express 8x10 Print 8x10 Print 8x10 Print ss Product Matrix Fulfillment 2 Pick Up 8x12 Print _ 8x12 Print 8x12 Print ova Product Matrix Fulfillment 3 Mail 8x14 Print 8x14 Print 8x14 Print BE 9x12 Print 9x12 Print 9x12 Print 10x12 Print 10x12 Print 10x12 Print 10x13 Print 10x13 Print 10x13 Print ese 10x15 Print 10x15 Print 10x15 Print Iv 11x14 Print _ 11x14 Print 11x14 Print i Kiosk Settings 12x12 Print _ 12x12 Print 12x12 Print 1
268. or Quantity False Render Images True Rendering DPI 300 Debug Mode False Create Type Subfolder False Product Rendering Configuratior 22 products configured Settings General Print Settings a Print Station Settings g Products Printed Here Index Book Settings s7 Product Matrix All Fulfillments i Kiosk Settings y Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up pi y Fulfillment 3 Mail ae APM Add On Components Se Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 205 Generic Hot Folder General Settings E General Settings Hotfolder Path c 4PMHotFolder File Name Template ORDER gt _ ITEM _ PRODUCT FINISH A QTY Create Order Subfolder False Order Subfolder Suffix Copy Order XML File False Duplicate For Quantity False Render Images True Rendering DPI 300 Debug Mode False Create Type Subfolder False Product Rendering Configuration 22 products configured Hot Folder Path The folder in which order images will be placed By default this is set to C APMHotFolder but it can also be a UNC type location such as StorageServer APMOrders As long as the machine can see the folder and write to it then the Hot Folder path can be anywhere on the network File Name Template Used to specify the desired back print format using the case sensitive parameters listed below The default is ORDER _ ITEM Y
269. or is on but the computer is off or the monitor cable has come loose Q I touch the screen but it does not respond properly What do I do A If you find that the touch area is not aligned with the buttons so that you have to press to the right of a button for instance to get it to press then you need to calibrate the touch screen This can be done through the Setup Wizard which is accessible through the hidden menu from the Intro Looping Movie screen of the APM kiosk software You can also use the driver outside of the software to make modifications and troubleshoot the touch screen Q How do I keep my kiosk clean A To clean the APM you may wipe it down with a damp cloth Do not use abrasives or liquid cleaners on the APM Never use products that contain ammonia on the LCD screen Q What do I clean my screen with A Because the APM uses a touch screen monitor fingerprints gather quickly and the APM screen will need to be cleaned regularly To clean the screen use cleaning wipes made especially for LCD screens alcohol not ammonia based which can be purchased at a computer supply store A cotton ball with rubbing alcohol on it may also be used to clean the monitor Media Devices Q The screen indicates my card is not recognized or it is recognized but there are no images on it what do I do A If one of the media devices is not working or you repeatedly get an error that says No Images Found when you know
270. or not an accepted type a message will be displayed Once the card is swiped and read the cardholder s information is displayed in the box and the order can be finalized 17 11x8 5 Hard Cover 20 Page Black Linen 29 99 each DVD Cinema 14 99 each 24 x 36 Poster 39 99 each 12 x 12 Scrapbook 3 99 each 4x6 Prints 29 each 1 5x7 Prints 1 49 each 8x10 Prints 3 99 each 1 8x12 Prints 3 99 each Order Summary Screen finishing your order ENE Payment Instructions Screen Continue Submit Order Pay cash check or credit when you pick up By default the APM software will prompt the customer to pay at the counter after placing their order Once the payment method has been selected press the Submit Order button to finalize the order Finalizing the Order Entering Customer Information Touch a line then enter your contact information After submitting the order a screen will appear prompting for the customer contact information This First Name LEE g g 265 CYLONIA WAY screen is optional and can be turned on and off via the Setup Wizard see Chapter 6 Additionally the fields ty CAPRICA State CA ZipCode 28977 themselves can be marked as optional as denoted phone 555 343 2122 Emai LEE GALACTICA COM beneath the field names If a field is required then it must be filled in before continuing When finished press the Continue button Note At this time keybo
271. ose from the PRINT ALL of your photos OR available fulfillment options as described in Chapter 2 a Purchase 10r2 CHOOSE photos to print complete sets of prints of every photo on your j Preview your photos Send and choose the sizes You will then be presented with the Quick Order and quantities you 1 4x6 of each 284 want 0 50 2 dite 68 PERS Choose Photos O ee ee Screen This screen may or may not be displayed based on the fulfillment option you selected You can select which fulfillments display the Quick Order screen using the customization tools in the Setup Wizard 1 00 with a pe or by itself for only a Add a CD to your order index print to your or cooks ki r only 95 The Quick Order screen provides the following ordering options Continue e Single set of all the images on the media for a Quick Order Screen specific size e Double set of all the images on the media for a specific size e Image CD DVD containing all the images on the media e Index photo of all of your images e Choose Photos the user can see all of his her images and select the photos to order You can change the order options including the quick order product promotions and pricing by using the Setup Wizard Note To place an order containing just an Image CD or Index Print no individual prints select either of those buttons on the Quick Order screen and press Continue
272. otocols such as SNMP are enabled to allow proper communication with other devices Lucidiom has documents available on all the ports and protocols that the APM software and Lab 50 use Lucidiom generally recommends that a firewall is installed at your router thereby protecting all of the machines on your network FIP Q What is FTP A FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol It is a means of transferring files across the internet The typical setup includes an FTP client and an FTP server The APM Dispatcher can act as an FTP client and allows for the creation of a connection to upload the orders to an FTP server Q How do I configure an FTP server A Lucidiom s APM Order Agent removes the need for an FTP server though you can still use one if you d like There are several ways to setup an FTP server but Lucidiom s technical support is limited to configuring the kiosk software to interact with your FTP server and cannot provide support for individual server configurations The 123 Windows operating system comes with FTP server capabilities but they must be installed and configured There are also several third party FTP applications available Other considerations to keep in mind for running an FTP server are the limitations and restrictions that your Internet Service Provider ISP may have in place as well as proper configuration and maintenance APM Dispatcher Q What is the APM Dispatcher A The APM Dispatcher is an FTP and f
273. ou will be presented with a list of the available collections under your account Choose a collection from the available list by checking the box next to the collection name or choose Create A New Collection if you wish to make a new album This will automatically create a new collection in your account You can use the arrow buttons to scroll up and down the list of available collection You can also toggle the privacy for the images in the collection with the buttons below Select Keep the photos private to mark the album as private or Allow others to see them to mark the album as public The privacy option selected will overwrite the current setting for a pre existing collection that is selected 31 If wish you to notify your friends and family of the new pictures you re about to upload choose the Add Friends button on the right This will allow you to enter the email addresses of your friends and family and they will get an invite to view your uploaded pictures Use the button to add a new address and enter the address using the keypad when prompted Once an address is entered if you decide you don t want to send the invite email to a particular address simply check the box to the left of the address Once all addresses have been entered select the Enter button Press Continue to finish the order or the Back button to return to the order up sell screen Choose a collection from your account Share Your Photos
274. oubleshootine sriuisn oirra aa Alanine Paes dal Aa eas sioh Males dah Seda na ea tel Neale 138 General Scaniier IroublesSNoOlNE sruron tetas east ecclesia tac ii ladle EE acdc iit aa vee ast eda teeat 139 Kodak Stack SMI I a isis E EE E E E i eRe cates aim cae cede hie den and aie dental atest 139 POD DOTHAN A Aofa D WOrk OW ronssin a E tata aenae 141 Frered MOS aE EA AEE E ERE AEN E EEEE E a EAE TE ESEN A aE e a sane G EN 141 Setting Up the D Workflow Using the Setup Wizard sssssessersesseeesesresseeseeseeuresseeseerresseeseeueesseessessesressteseestesreeseeseerresreseesees 141 Editing the D Worktlow Inte riace Senes nossiiienneiierariri ena R E E E R 141 Product set p within the Acta D W Orlow Iter tae tesenn EE TETE 144 Assignne Products to the D W orktlow Intertace sevtesistcavises seststoadesesscestetetted Sease e a SENEN 145 Appendix B Copal Dye Sup Patten isso cass sicse dae cahacesasia sade a dee atsaven cin sdeagataseva deans Stes a asesncussadaarel desaetadede teens 146 PPE ROC SILOS a crsicies ceases E E A 146 Seting up Copal Dye sub Printer Using Setup Wizard rarse roni eion aie EA E A A O Sentient 146 Editing the Copal Dye Sub Printer Interlace Seting S senarna ere ii ETEA EE ETO 147 Assioming Frod cts tothe Copal Dye Sub Mtera vsasinecsssisssseswtionerovesverciedsocsiarannnsnne menses incidents 148 Appendix C F Frontier C8 PrintPix NC 1000 iniinis ain a a pliauieies siete 150 Py FOE O CSIC nero E E R 150 Setting up the Fuji C8
275. our kiosk please contact the Lucidiom sales department or your regional sales representative for the latest available software components and pricing In addition to setup and configuration settings you will also find answers to frequently asked questions and troubleshooting tips Lucidiom Technical Support If you experience any problems with your APM and are not able to find the information or help you need in the manual or FAQs provided here please visit the Lucidiom website at www lucidiom com and click on the Support link to access the latest available information By using the APM Profit Watcher aka APM Network credentials you have been assigned you can login to the www lucidiom com site to view the latest downloads manuals and marketing materials available If you require further information or assistance contact our Technical Support Specialists Email support lucidiom com Phone 703 564 3400 select option 5 The APM Network enables advanced APM support and lt 4 _Lucidiom troubleshooting Using an internet browser on your APM you can access the remote technical support feature on the fem you LARENA Representative and click Lucidiom website at www lucidiom com 911 This feature Geni ta pated allows a Lucidiom support specialist to connect to your kiosk from our offices to provide hands on assistance and resolve issues quickly You can also access this feature by entering 911 on the key code screen instead of the a
276. ox oe i E 198 Enter the location for the Polling Folder where you Account Properties would like the orders from the APM or Lab 50 to go Beso to and where Photogize can then harvest them This can be a mapped drive letter such as E or a folder on the hard drive such as C APMOrders Lower the Poll Every to your preferred time The default is 5 minutes but it may be better to lower it to 3 minutes or less depending on the amount of expected orders coming network bandwidth and expected print turn around time Click OK to save your settings Go to the Polling Folder location and confirm that a file called server xml is there Niote It may take some time for the server xml to be created and Photogize may need to be closed then reopened for it to generate Open the server xml file by double clicking on it It should open in either Internet Explorer or Notepad Make a note of the number of products and record the lt name gt for the product as this will be used to match up the APM products with the Photogize products Itis important to keep in mind that this file is based on the products setup in Photogize and T may be unique to each and every lab See the sample below for reference lt product gt lt name gt 4x6 Matte lt name gt lt description gt Standard Print in Matte Finish lt description gt lt device gt Generic MiniLab lt device gt lt widthinches1000 gt 6000 lt widthinches1000 gt lt heightinche
277. pages the types and quantities of paper used and a record of printing activity Both printers are used in conjunction with the APM software to print the Photo Folio products offered as part of the EQ Pro package The core products in Photo Folio are e Banners e Envelopes e Folded Cards e Multi Page Calendars e Notepads e Photo Books e Posters amp Collages e Scrapbook Pages The following are generally included with purchase please check your purchase order to confirm e 5 paper trays including a Multipurpose manual feed tray e Duplex unit for auto double sided printing of pages up to 240gsm weight e On site installation e 2 year on site warranty Also included is a 5 year limited warranty for the LED heads and a 90 day warranty for each consumable part that is replaced Toner spillage abuse to printer and parts and broken equipment drums due to improper installation are not covered under warranty Please contact your Lucidiom sales representative for further information regarding the purchase of this product 115 Printer Terminology When referring to the EQ 9800 9850 later in this chapter there are certain common terms that need to be defined for a full understanding of printer operation These terms include e Duplex Two sided printing Both the EQ 9800 and EQ 9850 come with a duplex unit installed standard e Paper Feed This refers to the edge of the paper that is being fed into the printer first Fr
278. pentenciewet a S 2 Manufacturer Technical SUPPO eedirirerr eaen E E EO E REER 3 MIE ALEVE Sof are DUNE Ce CONS e E E E io shai A 4 APM INGE WV OL dtc acai E E EE E R O E sla EEEE E E E ENE TEES 5 AEN TOAN AEE a a A A A E a N RTS CSE Tee ererir er 5 Chapter 2 Usine REAR M ects at ccct cess tecti seceatss spb babe vde cou eae chew dn naedGndsdsesdi coast sue sbaeabivanil lt Gus cbavaben 6 Overview Of a Typical Traian girs seseatiete i teste aes ouastaste dis Sec uacaeee eauabuastseabiea Moe utentes at 6 Cetine startede te tales cairtes us iaba ad Satintvis el E aloe WD ate vaste their asa east sia Ueeawaxauatteadealnacnieals Siac 6 lnsertne Medid issie a e arr morte rte peor oT PTT Tov Te ore mene IDE OP oT Serer rer oF Tee NTRP REDE SNP rn eTL Tie ener TCE TS Poor erro CenrTT 8 Additional TTP OLE CY tl OAS tases stot lost a a E E T ORE oath duces A E E AE R 8 Addmo More FOL sie ada ets 8 ade Oa etic a acc satiate Sage cuca a ages ssa ces cocatloda da edt ated ecacs toasted ade ctaseohelals deedicaal 11 g 0 0406 ss a1 Qi6 0 qc C1 Kasai OOo ote re Rat eT nC ree TERT TT SORT A RUN RE ares PIN aCe PE Tre A ee wey rey 12 Frodict Select Onn VV Or ctl OW ise esis ceca caches Saatchi hc REA E av ie ca esa ane REO aaa tec aes 14 Help and rder ms a a Ronee eR on ne otee Ce ete AR one rT mee Bree REN SAT PT NT OR OR arts CIN eRe PET On ire PCa roe me ee ery 15 Panting and Futliiment Opi Onis serctesccciesucscstssterte pein a E asiuangachuamanas 15 STOO C Ar
279. perly but the orders are not getting over to Dworkflow on another computer Why A The most common issue is that port 5001 is blocked on the machine in question There are instructions in Appendix A on how to change these settings You may also need to make sure that any data going through this port is allowed to pass through any firewall software that may be installed on your machines Q I have a lot of orders that are for mixed sizes and I always have to change magazines Is there a way I can sort or release the orders to save time A Yes but this requires that you setup Order Masking on the d workflow software rather than the APM or Lab 50 software The d workflow software will take the orders sent to it and reorganize them to let you release it in sections Fuji PIC Troubleshooting Q I get the following error when launching the software Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 Could not load driver settings Destination Order Folder not specified or cannot be created A Make sure you can access the PIC on the network The user account needs to be FRONTIER with password FRONTIER The default destination folder is PIC ADPCPrints Q I get the following error when launching the software Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 Could not load driver settings Order file temporary location cannot be created or Image file folder could not be created A Be sure that the order file location temp and image file location directories are created a
280. placement The APM 1000 and the APM 1100 are different models but when it APM 1000 Rear APM 1100 similar comes to opening their respective cases for card reader and CD drive replacement the methods are very similar E keyboard and printer cables if any from the system at the top corners of the back of the base of the system e Once they are unscrewed remove the speaker covers on each side e Unscrew the two screws above the hard drive that are on the side of the system where the hard drive sits 241 Flip the unit on its side and then use the screwdriver to release the plastic catches to remove the front bezel surrounding the card reader and CD drive Once the front bezel is removed carefully and slowly slide the card reader and CD drive out Step 2 Replacing the Card Reader and or CD Drive Card Reader Replacement Detach the USB cable from the back of the reader Unscrew the two smaller screws using the smaller screw driver to release it from the frame Take out the old card reader and replace it with the new one Screw the new card reader back in using the screws that were there before Slide the frame back in CD DVD Drive Replacement Unscrew the two small screws holding the CD drive together that are on the right side if you are facing the front of the drive Carefully detach the drive Replace it with the new drive Screw the small screws back in and then slide the frame back in Unscrew screws to repla
281. pose tray used to print odd paper sizes or sizes that are too small to fit into a tray Although the printer can be configured in a variety of different ways these settings are recommended for ease of use with the Lucidiom software and to save time during configuration If you choose to change these settings please keep in mind that for optimal printer functionality it is best to keep the largest paper sizes reserved for the bottom trays moving up from tray to tray with the sequentially smaller sizes This can prevent unwanted jams and errors in the printer These tray settings also assume that the printer itself is configured properly with the recommended color profile and media settings Please contact Technical Support for the latest Answer Book to ensure your printer is configured correctly All 11x8 5 A4 and A5 trays should be set to feed long edge when possible this excludes 12x12 and 12x18 sizes and all scored products including 5x7 cards and Flip Books Recommended Imperial Tray Settings Tray Product Type Paper Size Paper Type Paper Feed Binding Tray 1 5x7 Folded Cards 10x7 801b Cover Short Edge Short Edge 7x5 Folded Cards Tray 2 11x8 5 Books Letter 100Ib Text Long Edge Short Edge 8 5x11 Books Long Edge Tray 3 11x8 5 Calendars Letter 801b Cover Long Edge Long Edge Tray 4 12x12 Books 12x12 100lb Text Long Edge Long Edge 12x12 Calendars Short Edge Tray 5 12x18 Calendars Tabloid Extra 80lb Cover Short Edge Long Edge
282. printer interface 1 Click on the Product Matrix All geo Fulfillments option in the Primary 3 recon fad ae Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Noritsu DPOF interface from the Kosk Settings Fulfillment 1 Express drop down menu _ a Fulfillment 2 Pick Up 3 If there is more than one Product E ratttiment 03 0108 Matrix option repeat for each ABE Apr Add on Components A Eo Printer Configuration matrix HAMIN 4 To assign multiple products to a 3 Product Matrix Screen single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 184 Pulling Orders into the Noritsu Software The DPOF interface is used by the APM Geir Onley Dipl ar Lara 8B software to create the same order Initializing x structure generated from a Noritsu CT 1 or Noritsu CT 2 machine Pace Ss j Each product channel size will have its PIP own folder so keep in mind that there may be several folders of images for anaron J _____ pa uaa Processor Status each order Front Prt tee tte ee ra ic It e To import an APM order into the ae sae Baa Noritsu software 1 Select the Network CT 1 button or C a similarly named feature in the a agi Noritsu software ea E z 2 Click on Start Pee ig 1020 TA 2am B 120m
283. ptions on this screen will vary between APM hardware models Duplicate drive letters are not allowed for drives that are enabled If you duplicate drive letters you will be prompted to make a change before you can continue To enable a drive select the drive letter from the pull down list and check the Enabled checkbox To disable remove the checkmark 71 Device Settings Device Settings You also use this screen to enable disable Bluetooth CompactFlash Enabled B Iv Enable Bluetooth and Infrared options by checking un checking the boxes Enabled uh M Enable Infrared Enabled Note If the APM software was purchased as Enabled software only and some devices do not share the same drive letter and or the system does not display all of your components these options can be edited in the XML files Please contact Lucidiom Technical Support for additional information 4 Enabled Enabled DVD ROM 1 Enabled USB Device 1 Enabled USB Device 2 Enabled USB Device 3 Enabled Hard drive 1 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled pal nal tel tel tel tal tel edd el tel el Device Setup Screen Sound Settings Click on the Sound Setup option in the Primary Navigation Pane to change the volume of the voice prompts in the APM software Sound Settings Press the Test button to listen to a sound sample Press and drag the sliding scale bar to adjust the volume The volume ranges from 0 mute to 100 Sound Settin
284. r the fulfillment or the product finish e If Send products to different printers BF rutiiment 2 express based on the fulfillment is checked GP Futiment 2 Pick Up BP Fustitment 3 raii the Product Matrix option in the aE APM Add On Components Primary Navigation Pane will expand a Printer Configuration from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments Products Printed Here Screen e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product 219 Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns Ki ox The last step involves assigning the E i z j ae printed products to the printer interface cz ge GS KiS OKS i 1 Click on the Product Matrix All set Seely eee Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the KIS DKS interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each T Kiosk Setting matrix Letto m Fulfillment 2 Pick Up 4 To assign multiple products to a BP Futfiiment a3 main single printer right click anywhere E Apt Add On Components in the Customization Pane and use E lennin the context menu options such a
285. r DPI in this field The default is 300 This is only used if Render Images is set to True Debug Mode If after changing all of the settings the Generic Hot Folder interface does not work come back to this screen and set this to True The default value is false Create Type Subfolder If this is set to True the software creates subfolders within the output folder for each product that the customer ordered For example if the customer orders 1 4x6 and 1 8x10 it creates two subfolders one for 4x6 product and another for 8x10 The default value is false Example C APMHOTFOLDER 1231441233 4x6 and C APMHOTFOLDER 1231441233 8x10 Print Non Image Items This setting specifies whether non print items such as an Image CD should also be output to the hot folder The default value is false Product Rendering Configuration This is used to define the products that should be Product pi S Width Height 2211 2024 Print 2016 10x15 Print 2012 4 5 33 Print 2011 4x5 Print 2010 8x12 Print 2006 3 5x5 Print 2005 12818 Print 2004 11 14 Print 2003 8x10 Print 2002 5x Print 2001 4x6 Print Product Rendering Settings Window sent to the hot folder See the next section for detailed instructions Product Setup within the Hot Folder Interface Each product to be printed also needs to be added to the product rendering settings This must be done for each and every product that will go to this interface Selec
286. r first name e LNAME Customer last name e PHONE Customer phone number 164 e Debug Mode If after changing all of the settings the PIC PRO 2 6 interface does not work come back to this screen and set Debug Mode to True The default value is False e Timeout in Minutes The amount of time in minutes to wait for the PIC to accept an order before displaying an error The default value is 10 Product Setup within the Fuji PIC PRO 2 6 Interface Each product size available in the APM will need to be configured to match up with the appropriate paper sizes that are setup in the PIC software Each product has its own internal APM Product ID Adding Editing a Product 1 Select the Add Product line to highlight it Select Product To Add 2001 4x6 Print the area around Add Product will turn o bls Fuji Product Code 4x6 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side 3 Inthe Dialog box select a product from the drop down menu 4 Enter the Fuji Product Code and make sure to enter it as it is configured in the PIC PRO software as it is case sensitive 5 Repeat for all products Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to acco
287. r interface does not work come back into this screen and set this to True Default is False e Wait For Print If set to True the APM software will wait for a printed status from the Noritsu software to determine if the current order was successfully printed before sending a new order Default is False e Matte Surface and Glossy Surface Check that these numbers match up with how they are setup in the QSS software on the printer Default is 2 for matte and 1 for Glossy If they are different than the default then enter the correct values for both Matte Surface and Glossy Surface e Index Print If an index print is needed for every order then select True If not then leave it as False If an order calls for index print while this setting is false it will still print an index print e Back Print 1 and Back Print 2 Used to specify the desired back print format using the case sensitive parameters listed below Default is ORDER _ ITEM _ PRODUCT FINISH OTY The following is a list of available case sensitive parameters that may be used e ORDER Order Number e PRODUCT Product Name e PROD ID Product Id e FINISH Finish option glossy matte e OTY Quantity e ORIG_FN Original File Name e ITEM Item Index e YEAR Current 4 digit year e MONTH Current 2 digit month e DAY Current 2 digit day e FNAME Customer first name e LNAME Customer last name e PHONE Customer phone num
288. r of items in cart per order 10 2 Use the drop down menu below to set the maximum number of items in the shopping en ae cart per order The APM can support up to 10 products Per Order shipping charge Per Order service fee Service Fees e Per Order shipping charge Gives the ability to add a shipping fee to each order that is placed in the selected fulfillment Payment Settings Screen e Per Order service fee Gives the ability to charge a service fee for each order that is placed in the selected fulfillment Kiosk Text Settings For each fulfillment you can easily customize the text that is displayed in your fulfillment options and on the bottom portions of the receipt text To customize the text for a fulfillment 1 Select a Fulfillment Option 1 2 or 3 from the Category Navigation Pane From the Primary Navigation Pane choose the section of text you would like to change The options are Fulfillment Title Fulfillment Description and Order Completion Text including the bottom text on the receipt 9 Once the section of text has been selected use the language pull down menu for the language that needs modification Default is English 10 Type the new text into the text box 11 Repeat for each section of text that needs to be changed not shown in figure 12 When finished select File gt Save from the upper left corner of the screen to save your changes 13 Repeat for each language that need
289. r options and Order Settings V Prompt customer for name amp address information Required Fields Iv First Name pickup locations Siac cs M Address e Prompt customer for name amp address Mm City information Enabling this feature prompts a M State Province M ZIF Postal Code W Phone Number MW Email Address customer to enter their personal information at the end of an order Each of the fields in the Required Fields section will be displayed when the customer is prompted to enter information however the fields that are not checked will be labeled optional and may be left blank when placing an order e Choose Photos Only If this option is enabled Optional eleens the customer will be taken to the thumbnail Offer customer choice of pickup locations screen directly after inserting their media Quick Order Options Choose Photos Only gt Choose Photos and Print Al Order Settings Screen e Choose Photos and Print All This option enables the Quick Order feature of the APM software The customer will be presented with an intermediate screen after they insert their media before they can choose their photos This screen allows for quick ordering of one particular size i e 4x6 for all of the images on the media device e Offer customer choice of pickup locations Enabling this option gives the customer the ability to choose where they want to pick up their order Pickup locations are defined under the
290. r the language to be modified hit enter a couple times underneath the lt english gt tag to create extra lines 9 Onone of the new lines create a tag with the language Ex lt german gt 10 Hit Enter a couple times to create some space and then create a closing tag Ex lt german gt 11 Paste ctrl v the copied section where the extra spaces were just created 12 Doasearch for the text that you wish to modify using the existing text as the search parameter 13 Click Find next to bring up the section of the text that will be modified It should have a gt right before it 14 In the section between the gt and the lt string gt for that line edit the information between these characters to include the desired text 15 You may remove the text strings from the section that you are not going to edit 16 Repeat Steps 12 14 for each language string until all desired changes have been made 17 If multiple languages are going to be modified repeat steps 7 15 for each language 18 Save the file 19 Open the apmlang_custom xml file in Internet Explorer to check for any errors and to ensure that there are no syntax errors that would prevent the file from being parsed properly Internet Explorer will point out any mistakes you have made Common mistakes include omitting a double quotation mark or not including the end tag End tags start with a forward slash ex lt string gt or lt receipt gt 20 Start up the Kiosk so
291. rd Catalog Option information on configuring the Card Catalog product please see Chapter 6 When the option is selected and after all other order options have been chosen you will be presented with a screen prompting for input of a title for the card catalog Once a title has been entered press Continue The next screen will give an option to Include only photos to print or Include all of my photos Choose an option and then set the desired quantity When finished select Continue to finalize the order Note If the Quick Order screen is used as outlined earlier in this chapter then the Include all of my photos option will be the only option that appears Note This product will only print on the EQ 9800 9850 series of printers Enter a title for your Card Catalog gt 000000000000 TOWE RITA KU BS J Car SX 20000 J OC e K XZXxXCXVXBXNXMX X Caps Lock Special Space Clear Next 3 Card Catalog Title Entry 30 Choose between including all photos or only those you have selected to print ar only photos selected to Continue Card Catalog Selection EQ Upload This order option gives the ability to upload photos directly Pore Upload your photos directly into your PHOTOFINALE com to an online Photo Finale collection for a given account You account to store and share with friends and family can either chose to upload all of the photos in a given order or upload
292. re that there is a green light above the Online button If not then press the Online button 131 Q What driver should I use A Use the latest windows drivers that the manufacturer has available While the drivers on the supplied CD are sufficient the latest ones posted on the manufacturer s site may offer more functionality and improvements To configure the software to print to this driver setup a generic windows printer driver in the Setup Wizard Q There is a white border on one side of the print what should I do A The APM software drops the image on the printer driver at that point the output is completely dependent on the printer First check to make sure that the latest driver and or firmware is installed for the printer If there is a white border on one side of the print then that may indicate that the paper is loaded incorrectly Check the printer reload the paper and make sure that the paper guides are not bent If the issue persists then there may be some other options such as adjusting the size to greater than 100 to account for the difference Directions on how to do this will vary from printer to printer Q How do I stop an order once it is sent to the express printer A To cancel an order once it has been sent to the express printer minimize the APM software from the admin screens to get to the Windows desktop Find the icon for the APM Print Server in the taskbar near the clock The icon will look like a printer
293. ree OM Hotfolder kerfa OF 20 Ad Prier 4 General Prik Settings se Priek Station Settings I Products Printed Here omy Product Matrix Al Fullieents BA Futittene nt 1 Express EA ruiriiment 2 Pick Up FA i uifiiment 3 Maal f Pe APM Add Un Components a Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen SilverWire Silverwire OM Hottfolder interface El General Settings Order File Location Destination C OMHotfolder DFI 200 Silverwire OM HotFolder General Settings e Order File Location Destination The folder in which order images will be placed By default this is C OMHotFolder but it may also be a UNC type location such as StorageServer APMOrders As long as the machine can see the folder and write to it then the Hot Folder path can be anywhere on the network 228 e DPI Enter the desired output DPI in this field The default value is 200 Assigning Products to the Silverwire OM HotFolder Interface After the Silverwire OM HotFolder interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print SetupWeuard y 5 x Ble tep 1 Click on the Products Printed Here Printers Motfolder Inter option in the Primary Navigation ee OF STO l Seed products to diferert prieters based on the fulliment express pickup mall T Send products to Gtferert printert based on thee sutlace igionty mattel Pane 2 Inthe Customizat
294. rehensive and robust option for cropping Cropping Settings Screen and is the recommended setting 65 Promotions amp Coupons Click on the Promotions amp Coupons option in Promotion Details the Primary Navigation Pane This screen m Information configures promotion and coupon codes that customers can apply to their order Once these Coupon Code are setup the option to apply them appears at the Description end of an order E l art Date 4 30 2009 Exp Date 4 30 2009 Note These promotions and coupons are m Criteria unrelated to those you may have setup in Lab 50 Order Totat Product Quantity Minimum Coupon Code Setup Product 1 Click the Enable Coupon Codes checkbox Click on the Add button m Promotion 1 On the Promotion Details screen enter the Percent Discount coupon code description and the start and end dates of the promotion The code is limited to 24 letters and or numbers 2 Inthe Criteria section enter the C Dollar Amount Discount Free Product Product requirements for the coupon These can be based upon an order total or product quantity 3 Inthe Promotion section select the type of promotion along with the percent amount or quantity of the discount When you are finished press Return Adding a Promotion or Coupon 4 Repeat these steps for adding additional codes editing or deleting codes Pickup Locations
295. rences gt Downloads The default download location is the Desktop Note The content files tend to be rather large so if you do not have a high speed internet connection you will want to contact your Regional Sales Representative to order disks for installation Additionally some files will not properly extract using the default Windows zip program Lucidiom recommends a third party application such as WinZip for extracting the content files to your machine 114 Chapter 10 The EQ 9800 9850 Series Printers Printer Overview The EQ 9800 and EQ 9850 are laser printers sold by Lucidiom They can produce exceptional 1200x1200 DPI duplexed pages up to 12x18 inches in the standard paper trays or up to 12 9x47 24 inches in the multipurpose tray Retailers can calibrate the printer just like they do with regular photo printers via the EFI Fiery RIP software to deliver consistent quality color every time The EQ 9800 9850 is the ideal solution for producing a wide range of documents on a variety of paper weights and sizes Single Pass Color technology and the straight through paper path allow for faster print speeds minimal paper jams and smooth handling Productivity features like Auto Media Detect automatically adjust the printer to EQ 9800 9850 your required media type and Auto Color Balance ensures that output remains consistent from start to finish Also included is Job Accounting software that allows tracking of printed
296. ric hot folder may be setup to drop the files in folder for manual processing General Workflow Q How do my orders get from the APM to Lab 50 A There are several ways to configure the APM and Lab 50 to communicate with each other By default the APM saves the order locally to a shared folder Lab 50 looks in that folder and pulls the order over the network to the Lab 50 machine which then processes it to the printer s Dye Sublimation Printing Windows Driver Q I hooked up my USB printer to a different USB port and it installed the driver again Now my prints don t print how do I get my printer to work A Any time you insert a USB printer into a USB port other than the one that it was originally installed on the system thinks it is a new piece of hardware To fix this simply delete the old driver for the printer and locate the newly installed driver and rename it to the name of the original driver Restart the machine and the prints will now print to that printer It may also be necessary to check the Windows printer settings in the Printer Configuration to make sure that it is still pointing to the correct printer driver and that the appropriate APM products are setup to print to it Q Can I use dye sub printers that are connected to another machine to print orders from the APM A Yes the printers will need to be shared on the machine they are connected to and the APM and the Print Server computer will need to be able to se
297. ricing for this product and fulfillment checkbox in the Customization Pane Enter the order quantity in the Qty field Enter the price per print when the customer reaches the specified quantity of ordered prints for that size in the Price field a YS Increment Pricing Photo Folio products also allow for incremental pricing This special pricing is used when a customer chooses to add additional pages to a Photo Folio product For example if a customer has more images than will fit into a 20 page photo folio book the software will prompt them to add additional pages to the book at the set increment price per page Note Quantity pricing is applied when multiple copies of the same product are ordered Increment pricing refers to pricing on each additional page that is added to a single order item To add a base increment price simply enter a price into the Increment Price field To enable increment pricing on top of quantity pricing Select the product from the list in the Primary Navigation Pane Click on the Enable Quantity Pricing for this product and fulfillment checkbox in the Customization Pane Enter the order quantity in the Qty field Enter the price per Folio product when the customer reaches the specified quantity in the Price field ae aS SS Enter a per additional page increment price in the Increment Price field Quantity Pricing M Enable Quantity Pricing for this product and fulfillment Removing a Product
298. rinter interface E jans Arinaer i b S RO rat Pin Hotloider Intatacs e oT P F ll we 1 Click on the Product Matrix All C E 6 Pml Halk Ini Fulfillments option in the Primary ado Walda e003 OIO wel aa Pand Hove irautea Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Hot Folder interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single A Fulfillment 1 Fxpress printer right click anywhere in the E retttment 2 Pick up Customization Pane and use the E rettament 03 ran i APM Add On Components context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to ea Printer Configuration Product Matrix Screen 209 Appendix M Windows Printer The Windows Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to print orders generated from an APM toa printer s that are setup using a Windows driver Prerequisites 1 The Windows driver for the printer needs to be properly installed and configured to print the correct size on the APM if the APM is to print locally or it should be installed on the machine running Lab 50 if that program is being used to manage the orders for printing 2 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is s
299. rix option repeat for each matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 203 Appendix L Generic Hot Folder The Generic Hot Folder interface allows the APMor Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format that can be manually queued in any printer The Generic Hot Folder interface is one of the few interfaces that work with both JPEG and PDF files Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able access the Hot Folder drop location whether it be locally on the machine or across the network 2 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot on below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options MV Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting Up a Hot Folder Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the AP
300. s Setting Up the Photogize XConnect Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Photogize XConnect Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable products to the interface Editing the Photogize XConnect Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer 1 Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 2 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it 200 3 Select Print Server 4 Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Photogize XConnect In the name Printer Name field enter PG or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Photogize XConnect Interface option in the top left corner to display the options for this interface ov St oS SNS SetupWizard File Help Printer Configuration PG Photogize XConnect PG Photogize XConnect Harvest Folder c RasterFolder Sy Add Printer Configure Translations 0 products configured Time Out Second
301. s Set ALL formats to or Set all Product Matrix Screen unassigned formats to 220 Appendix O PDF Printer The PDF Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to print orders generated from an APM directly to an EQ 9800 9850 printer The PDF Printer interface inherently works with the EQ 9800 9850 but an additional license update may be purchased in order to use the interface with printers other than the EQ 9800 9850 Prerequisites There are several important configuration items that must be configured in order to work properly with the PDF interface 1 The printer must be setup properly and configured to use the correct paper sizes and media types See Chapter 10 for recommended tray configuration settings 2 The APM and or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the printer across the local area network a valid IP address need to be set on the printer and vice versa 3 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol must be enabled on the printer to allow the Setup Wizard to send queries to the printer 4 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot on below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options IV Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM F Monitor Printing
302. s screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer 1 Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side etree of the screen to expand it A falliment 1 xpress 3 Select Print Server 4 Press the Setup Wizard button and the By rament 3 0100 Setup Wizard will launch Ienleatitinnenee a L Onge yot nave the SED V zari open Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Konica DPOF In the Printer Name field enter Konica or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Konica DPOF Interface option in the top left corner to display the options for this interface MPR i DPOF Konica DPOF Interface E General Settings Configure Product Channels 3 products channels configured Folder c QDIF 3 QDPRINT Back Print Order ORDER item oITEM GEN CRT Konica RISUPER VUQ VNM Konica RISUPER Wait For Print False Use APM Order Number False Render Images False Render DPI 200 Debug False Purge Days 7 173 Konica DPOF General Settings e Folder Enter the location of the desired DPOF folder where the orders will go The default is c QDIF 3 QDPRINT Note It is recommended that the QDIF 3 folder be shared out so that the Konica printer can s
303. s Starting polling 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM Orders Starting polling 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM APMPhotos Starting polling 2005 10 31 09 40 43 PM APM Anywhere Starting polling APM Dispatcher View of the Log tab If you are transferring orders from a remote location you can configure the APM Dispatcher to transfer the APM orders to an FIP server at your lab You can create as many connections as you need to transfer the orders 104 APM Dispatcher Connections Exit Log APM Anywhere APMPhotos Orders Stats Registration Updates Configuration PS Status Support Fulfilment Connection Settings M Use FTP Server myFTPServer com Auto stat Vv User Name APMFTPUser Passive E Password m Port 21 m Hotfolder Settings Hot folder to scan C APM_TRANSFER Orders Fufilment g Scan folder every 5 Minutes Seconds Backup Folder C APM_TRANSFER Orders Backup_fufflment a APM Dispatcher View of a New Connection Adding a Connection 7 Se aS 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Open the APM Dispatcher Click on the Connections menu Select New Connection Name the connection and then click on the OK button Enter the Server name Enter the Username and Password that have been configured at the FTP server Note This user needs to have read and write access to the FTP site as it will be uploading images to it Check Auto
304. s e View and track orders e Create customized sales and product reports e Keep track of the average order amount Keep an eye on things You can access APM ProfitWatcher online at This site is for Lucidiom s APM customers to view information and statistics about APMs they own If you are an APM owner log in to see your data and statistics If you forgot your username or password please contact Support www APMProfitWatcher com from any internet enabled For more information visit vevwew lucidiom com computer Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 0 and up are supported Bome 8 ee Chapter 2 Using the APM Overview of a Typical Transaction To receive high quality photographic prints greeting cards scrapbook pages folio books or other products from your digital images Sign into your Photo Finale account if available Insert digital media or choose from additional import options Select products and or photos Select a fulfillment option Options vary by store but as an example these options may be One Hour Processing Next Day Pick Up or Mail Delivery Create your products and or order your photos see Chapters 3 5 for further details Use the Shopping Cart to order additional products Review your order and select a payment option Finalize and submit the order oS A N D pi Getting Started An informational movie loops continuously while the APM is not in use and when the
305. s 600 Leave Order On Cancel False Debug False Settings eq General Print Settings a Print Station Settings Products Printed Here Index Book Settings sx Product Matrix All Fulfillments Kiosk Settings Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up bes y Fulfillment 3 Mail Pi APM Add On Components Fs Se Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen Photogize XConnect General Settings e Harvest Folder This should be set to the same value as the Polling Folder path in the Photogize XConnect setup Default is C RasterFolder If the folder is located on a separate machine on which Photogize is installed the computer name needs to be included e g ComputerName RasterFolder e Configure Translations This is used to match product setup between Photogize and the APM See the next section for detailed instructions e Timeout Seconds Leave as default Px Fhotogize xConnect ae is 600 seconds unless L General Settings instructed to change for Harvest Folder ciiRasterFolder troubleshooting purposes Configure Translations 0 products configured Time Gut Seconds 600 e Leave Order On Cancel Indicates eee ee eae Debug False whether or not to leave the order in 201 the hot folder for printing later when a user cancels the job The default value is False e Debug If after changing all of the settings the Photogize
306. s FTP site or VPN folder Lab 50 will then need to be configured to look to this folder to access these orders e This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 connected via APM Order Agent This setup is typically used when one or more APMs are not on the same local network and or placed at a remote location Orders are transferred via the Lucidiom APM Order Agent service This fulfillment option requires the additional purchase of an APM Order Agent license It also requires Lab 50 at the receiving lab to download and process the orders Please contact your regional sales representative for details In this mode all printing and order management is performed by a remote Lab 50 installation not the APM The APM Order Agent servers are maintained and operated by Lucidiom When this option is used orders are dropped into the following folder C APM_TRANSFER Orders APMAnywhere After the order is placed in this folder the APM Dispatcher will then upload the order to the Lucidiom servers A computer running Lab 50 at the printing facility then downloads the order using the APM Order Agent service Order Options You can customize each fulfillment option to include some all or none of the following order options and you can change these settings at any time To enable or disable any of the following features check or uncheck the appropriate checkbox 78 Order Options M Image CO DVE White Borders Special Instructions IY
307. s a variety of creative products for fulfillment through your APM These products include single and double sided greeting cards scrapbook pages photo books calendars folded cards collages and more For information on adding any of the components outlined in this chapter please contact your regional sales representative for pricing information EQ Pro Add On Components The EQ Pro add on includes the following bundles and features e The Luci Bundle allows you to offer over 2 500 pieces of Luci content in the form of scrapbook pages designer cards wall art collages and banner prints e The Photo Folio Bundle allows you to offer double sided multi page products such as photo books folded cards envelopes calendars Zoom Albums flip books and notepads Lucidiom offers a continually upegraded set of EQ Pro templates that are available to all customers who purchase the license Additionally other third party providers sell EQ Pro templates that are compatible with the APM software Once the EQ Pro add on is purchased or for any new software installation a set of templates must be downloaded to ensure properly functionality There are two ways to obtain EQ Pro templates 1 Via the Lucidiom Downloader application see Chapter 9 for details on use 2 Via a content disc set purchased from Lucidiom The cost is 25 00 USD and can be obtained through your sales representative Choosing an EQ Pro Product Once templates are installed
308. s and click Print A page aac with 21 swatches will print to the printer Screen Setting 126 Dot Screen Measured S907 2 27 46 PM Place the printed page on a stack of 5 sheets of blank paper to prevent Aras NEST bleed through from the surface you are working on while conducting 3 Generate Measurement Page the calibration process Pit 4 Get Measurements Align the plastic guide strip up so that the center passes through the first Measure From File _ column of swatches Cyan Click Measure __ Restore Device Calibration Window Confirm that you are doing 21 patches and click Measure A window opens that request Please place the ES 1000 in its calibration cradle and click Ok Click Ok 121 aS SS a 7 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Measure the cyan swatches by starting the ES 1000 in the grey bracket atop the swatches Click the button on the device and wait for an audible beep If you cannot hear the beep then wait 1 2 seconds before dragging the device down the page While holding the button drag the device smoothly down the plastic guide until you have passed the last swatch then release the button To judge the correct speed from start to finish use a count of 4 When the scan has been successful a check will appear and the red cross will move to the next color When all four colors have been scanned click the Accept button Click Ok Click Apply Config
309. s been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print E RE Ble tiep i i Products Printed Here 0 1 Click on the Products Printed Here ee option in the Primary Navigation jaie B van der brerfoce I Send products to dilferert prieters based on the fullliment leepress pickup maii Pane Send products to Giferert printers based on thei surface iglosey matte 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a enn 7 checkmark next to all of the i products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish eA Fulfilment 1 Express E Fulfilment 2 Pick Up P rainament 3 crai e If Send products to different i apaa cana printers based on the fulfillment is a checked the Product Matrix option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three Products Printed Here Screen selections based upon the three fulfillments 208 e If Send products to different printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in the Product Matrix option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns The last step involves assigning the printed products to the p
310. s or her prints on all four sides before inserting them into the scanner to separate them and to reduce static No more than 20 prints at a time should be scanned Q How many images can I scan at a time A The software is setup to scan up to 20 images at a time with the Kodak scanner Q If my scanner has problems will I lose my images that I have scanned in already 139 A No all images are scanned in and once the problem with the scanner has been resolved the customer may add scans to the existing order Q The resolution is too low on my scanned images to product high quality prints Are there settings I can adjust to improve the scan quality A Make sure that you have configured the TWAIN driver to scan using the profile for photos The DPI may be increased to improve quality but it will also increase scan time for each print 140 Appendix A Agfa D Workflow The Agfa D Workflow interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format that D Workflow version 2 64 or higher can accept and print Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 software needs to be able to see the D Workflow machine across the local area network and vice versa 2 D Workflow must be on version 2 64 or higher and use 28k ATTY files on the APM Lab 50 and D Workflow machines 3 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer
311. s process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable products to the interface Editing the PIC 2 6 Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer 1 Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 2 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it 3 Select Print Server 4 Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch Once you have the Setup Wizard open Kiosk Settings 1 Click on Printer Configuration 2 Click on Add Printer a 3 Inthe menu at the right select the Fuji abo enn pei APH Add On Components Frontier PIC 2 6 4 Inthe Printer Name field enter PIC or any name you wish to use 5 Click the Add button 6 Click on the newly created Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 option in the top left corner to display the options for this interface A Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen Fuji Frontier PIC 2 6 Options e Order File Location Dest Enter the location of the ADPCPrints folder on the PIC using the UNC naming convention Note If the PIC machine is called PIC390 then the setting should be changed from
312. s to be modified 82 Fulfillmest Title Fulfillment Description Preview Preview Description Description The Fulfillment Title will appear at the top of a large button on the The Fulfillment Description will appear in the middle of a large button on Select Fulfillment screen The text should be 114 characters the Select Fulfillment screen The text can be up to 130 in 6 lines or or less in 5 lines or less and will be automatically centered less Text will be left ustified and vertically centered automatically Language Language Engish z Engish zj Text Text EXPRESS Photos are printed on a dye sublimation i 5 i Photos Printed printer while you wait Instantly Text Customization Screen Fulfillment Text Text Customization Screen Fulfillment Description Order Completion Text On screen Message Description The Order Completion text will be shown on the Thank You page after an order has been placed It should instruct the customer what to do next The text can be up to 80 characters Language English Text Please wait for your photos to be printed Receipt Message Description This message will appera at the bottom of the receipt The text can be up to 80 characters Lanquage E nglish v Text Please pick up your photos at the customer service counter They will be available shortly Text Customization Screen Order Completion Text 83 Adding amp Pric
313. s you wish quantities of 10 using the designated button Additionally if the A 1 option to choose between glossy and matte finish is available in Nr TN Q the given fulfillment the option will be presented here Photo Finish When finished press the Continue button to view a summary of Select a finish for your photos the order on the Shopping Cart screen a cossy nisn Matte Finish Use the Continue Shopping button to add more products to the order or click on Check Out to review the order on the Order Summary screen Press the Continue button to finalize the order Order Quantity Screen Scanning Print to Print and Stack Scanning There are two types of Scanning options available within the APM Software e APM Scanning Allows for customer to use a supported flatbed scanner with TWAIN Driver loaded onto the APM to input one image at a time into the APM software This option is included as part of the standard APM e APM Stack Scanning Add On This is an add on for an additional cost that allows for the Kodak 11210 11220 scanner to work with the APM software and input batches of prints usually 20 at a time into the APM software The Stack Scanner licensing and scanner are available at an additional cost Please contact your regional sales representative for more information The scanner you would like to use on your kiosk must be a supported scanner You can use the Setup Wizard to see the currently supporte
314. s1000 gt 4000 lt heightinches1000 gt lt unitpricepennies gt 49 lt unitpricepennies gt lt weightounces100 gt 5 lt weightounces100 gt lt numpricebreaks gt 5 lt numpricebreaks gt lt pricebreak from 1 to 24 gt lt qtypricepennies gt 49 lt qtypricepennies gt lt pricebreak gt lt pricebreak from 25 to 49 gt lt qtypricepennies gt 44 lt qtypricepennies gt lt pricebreak gt lt pricebreak from 50 to 74 gt lt qtypricepennies gt 39 lt qtypricepennies gt lt pricebreak gt lt pricebreak from 75 to 99 gt lt qtypricepennies gt 34 lt qtypricepennies gt lt pricebreak gt lt pricebreak from 100 to 999 gt lt qtypricepennies gt 29 lt qtypricepennies gt lt pricebreak gt lt product gt 199 fa ee Photogize Lab a Orders Archive 22296 B0 E 22297LM0 Ea E E 22296EB0 fg 22267DA0 fei 22295SF0 fg 22295M10 sf 22295SE0 fg 2229520 EG 22295440 fg 22294V0 fee 22294LU0 fg 222940 fs 22294E PO fg 2229460 ss i 22294ES0 fg 22294DF0 fej 22269HPO fe 22269640 io E 22269HY0 fg 22269LR0 lt io E 22269HT0 fg 22268NX0 E 22266VW0 Harvesting Oidess fi 22268XR0 EG 22269HX0 fg 22272150 a 22269MW0 sw Eg 22269N00 fg 2226960 fe 22270CM0 io E 22270FKO fg 22273BE0 fg 22273KM0 fe 2227700 fs 22270F TO bms Asa AE E 11 Once all of the product names have been recorded close the server xml file without saving any change
315. saeusuaeuees 88 Conneurne PRoto GINE ennn ops ister Seer re oreo E UR SSC ION I Tor TR ep rn a nep NE ePIC 89 Template Bro ets 17210 0 a aae a T rN an OTT Tee ir Her ramen ESOT eo 91 Soi qiateae ha tgteea ed glo eoyy ale ho rran ae Dyn meen erro A ers Porer ser acne Star rr es orem ners net es Tenn CS TIT ECE ate Ter TR orn ote n TE sent 91 Conn nnne Pass pOr e mee mee mre eae sey oot E ony RT Otero Roy OR Sony E er OT oO ne ere eta ee re an 92 COM AIS SC INS xcept stnctestexaaad ctataecenere reeves ter cans uscueei an ccusteebeatuedl cere aE 93 iv Conngurne VD Ciena eruen htc tet cto detest atic aetna athe acetates a a tt 94 Chapters Pinter Cnn ti oat ae isp 552s teca te cs casosca cts icce dase sec tapaccecunbes A panccasvamneespeunaoenes 97 Pantune COST VC W rset te orscew toast aesianeea tart onuuee ecalt eaue asec seneuene scat deanna bis stnue tebe aria tees 97 Step Lb Adding and Conhourimesd Printer TOET ICE cic iaa EE A E E 97 Diep 2 Sele CHAS Pitta DIS EOC CLS 5 5 ies caer bap tucaenOattcta E E A A E ses talents E 98 Sle a ASSON Ne aces TO Frodi mera y aere dated in oates T Mueller oale E dsb nates inuses De ales yeasts ils lain 99 SOMO ra iii Se UO eS AE RATE ATE E EEE N A TET Sop as onesies E T E TAE A A 100 Chapter 9 Supportine APM Applications iesise asiaa aa EEE aN ea S SEa 101 Hardware Arenda ocara E eta suisaunetsa wens tasitongnisueaueauassucatuuae 101 Hardware Attendant OPUONS iun E E A OO 101 Adding Appiecitions tothe H
316. same products but the two stores that do not have the equipment to print photo folio products would then use this setting to send those products to a different folder Orders in that folder could then be promptly uploaded to the fulfillment center while the rest of the products could be fulfilled locally at the store Setup of a Fulfillment Export Override Click on a Fulfillment Option 1 2 or 3 from the Category Navigation Pane Select a product from the listing Press the Override Fulfillment button in the Customization Pane When the Fulfillment Override window appears enter the folder path for the product using one of the four eS a primary export paths Press OK when you are finished Do Repeat these steps for each product that needs to be sent to another folder Tucidiom strongly recommends using only the following paths for the override functionality 86 For Local Printing using the APM Print Server use C APM_TRANSFER Orders Express For sending orders to Lab 50 across the Local Network use C APM_TRANSFER Orders Local For sending orders to Lab 50 at a Remote Location via APM Order Agent use C APM_TRANSFER Orders APMAnywhere For sending orders to the Lab 50 at a Remote Location via a private FTP server or VPN connection use C APM_TRANSFER Orders Fulfillment Important information about the Fulfillment Override settings e This feature works with Print and Creative Products onl
317. screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options IV Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting up the Fuji JobMaker Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the Fuji JobMaker Interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable products to the interface 230 Editing the JobMaker Interface Settings Sending orders straight from the kiosk Print Server 1 Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen 2 Enter the pass code default is 1234 3 Select the Setup Wizard Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer 1 Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50 Select the Fulfillment option on the left side z A re of the screen to expand it 3 Select Print Server 4 Press the Setup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch A Once you have the Setup Wizard open 1 Click on Printer Configuration Eai ean a Click on Add Printer k 3 Inthe menu at the right s
318. select the Backgrounds tab and select the desired background for the page Use the arrow buttons to scroll through all of the available background styles The button in the top right hand corner of the backgrounds tab may be used to see larger thumbnails of the available backgrounds Backgrounds Beal At anytime during the creation of a multi page product you can either add a new page before or after the page you are on or delete the current page To add a new page press the button in the box labeled Add or Remove Page A window will appear asking where you would like to insert the new blank page Choose Insert Before or Insert After or choose Cancel to return to the previous screen Once the page has been added you will automatically be taken to that page for editing Note You can define a price for additional pages on a per product basis in the Setup Wizard Backgrounds Tab If you wish to delete the page you are currently editing press the button in the box labeled Add or Remove Page A window will appear prompting for confirmation Press the Remove Page button to permanently remove the page you are editing Press the Cancel button to return to the previous screen Would you like the new page to be added before or after the current page i Are you sure you wish to remove the current page This action cannot be undone Additional pages cost 75 each Page Insert Prompt Page Delete Prompt 56 When you are done editin
319. sired and press Continue amp Customize your DVD Cinema options and then press Continue Give your slideshow a theme by selecting a creative frame Menu Backaround Show Style Your photos will be displayed inside the frame when the slideshow g ty plays on your TV r omm o 0 Fo a Music Show Speed QAF J Black Comers 2730 Out of My Mind o Med 8 sec F DVD Quantity O Continue Continue Frame Selection Screen DVD Options Screen Use the Back button to return to the Frame Selection screen When the options have been set use the or buttons to increase or decrease the number of DVD slideshow discs you wish to order When satisfied hit Continue The last screen allows you to enter a title for the DVD slideshow Use the keypad to enter the desired text Select Back to return to the DVD Options screen Enter a short title for your DVD When finished press the Continue button to view a OSNA summary of the order on the Shopping Cart screen QaXw Y F OOO PLL YI iw C x AXSy DXF XGN HY INK AY Ener Use the Continue Shopping button to add more pa K X ZYXXCXVXB Nyt M S2OE sn products to the order or click on Check Out to review the ce pioa soea soe ce i va l order on the Order Summary screen Press the Continue button to finalize the order Continue DVD Title 48 Chapter 5 EQ Pro Software The EQ Pro software provide
320. st be made for the type of book the size of the book and the template theme before product creation can begin Ordering some products such as prints will take you directly to the next screen because no additional parameters need to be defined 14 At any time during the selection process you can use the Breadcrumb Buttons at the bottom of the screen to backtrack to the previous selection or all the way back to the product selection screen Once these intermediate selections have been made you will be taken to the Select Service screen Breadcrumb Buttons Help and Order Hold At any time during the ordering process you can select the button located in the top right corner of the screen for detailed information about the options available on your current screen Once you are done reading the help information for the screen press the Close Help button to return to the ordering process Alternatively once in the help screen you can select the Hold Order button in the bottom right corner to place the order on hold This will override any timeout settings that normally restart the software when it is left idle for an extended period of time and the order will stay where you left it until you press the Return button Photo Index What to do on this screen i ete Kiosk On Hold 1 Use the and buttons at the bottom of the screen to add prints to your order When date dob ion a died nan fisher pirkes as A pe This APM is current
321. stom Screen amp Receipt Text This document provides instructions for customizing the layout structure and text of receipts printed out by the kiosk Files Used for Receipt Customization There are 3 main files that are used for customization of the receipt 1 apmlang_XXXX xml Static language template file updated in each new version of the software where XXXX is a language Ex apmlang_german xml 2 apmlang_receipt xml File that mainly determines the structure and layout of the receipt 3 apmlang_custom xml Customer specific language file that is used to overwrite text in the software that is normally pulled from the language template file The custom language file does not get overwritten during software updates Editing Text on a Receipt Editing the text of the receipt is done on a language by language basis To edit the text for the receipt do the following Make a backup copy of all xml files found in C APM Open the English language file C APM apmlang_english xml in Notepad Do a search within the file for lt receipt gt Copy the section from lt receipt gt to lt receipt gt by highlighting it and pressing ctrl c Close the language file Open the apmlang_custom xml file in Notepad ot OY it a a Do a search to see if there are any sections for the language that will be modified Example When doing a search for German do a search for lt german gt etc 8 If there are no preexisting language tags fo
322. successfully printed before sending a new order Default is False Timeout Seconds Leave as default which is 180 seconds unless instructed to change for troubleshooting purposes Use APM Order Number When set to True the order folders will then be renamed according to the last six numeric digits of the APM order number as shown on the printed receipt It is ideal to leave it as True so orders will be organized in a logical way through the printing process Succeed On Timeout Marks the order as successful when a timeout occurs Do no change unless instructed for troubleshooting purposes Default is True Purge Complete With this option set to True the orders that are successfully printed will be deleted from the folder location that is specified in the Folder field If False all the orders will be stored until manually get deleted This setting also requires that Wait for Response is set to True Default is False Back Print 1 and Back Print 2 Used to specify the desired back print format using the case sensitive parameters listed below Default is to print the APM order number and the item number ORDER YoITEM 180 The following is a list of available case sensitive parameters that may be used e ORDER Order Number e PRODUCT Product Name e PROD_ ID Product Id e FINISH Finish option glossy matte e QTY Quantity e ORIG_FN Original File Name e ITEM Item Index e YEAR Current 4
323. t Channels Product 10415 Print 2016 Cancel Glossy Mo Border Matte No Border GE 115M Glossy Border Matte Border 101586 10K 156M Product Size Channels 5 Click OK after all channels are made for that product 6 Repeat Steps 2 4 for each size as needed 153 Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Deleting a Product 1 Select the product to highlight it the area around the product will turn blue 2 Click on the Delete button that appears on the right hand side 3 Click OK in the confirmation box and the product will be deleted Assigning Products to the Fuji C8 PrintPix NC 1000 Interface After the Fuji C8 PrintPix NC 1000 interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 1 Click on the Products Printed lolx Here option in the Primary Navigation Pane ES E AAA cc at rs acl lana sa 2 Inthe Customization Pane place all E EE tiie on the aaa Cnet a checkmark next to all of the eee products that will be printed ae ne using the local APM printing P engine perre 7 3 The checkboxes at the top of the ros trons m
324. t Folder c MasterflexD HotFoldersEx Sy Add Printer Aspect Ratio Match FillWithCrop Schema c MasterflexD HotFoldersEx TrxHotFolderOrderSchema xml Inspect Orders False Apply LDC True Wait For Result File True Time Out Seconds 120 Succeed On Timeout False Print Index False Index Width Index Height 6 Debug Mode False Back print template HORDER _VITEM _ PRODUCT FINISH QTY 4 General Print Settings Render DPI 300 a Print Station Settings g Products Printed Here Index Book Settings Product Matrix All Fulfillments E Kiosk Settings P Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick Up y Fulfillment 3 Mail mi APM Add On Components cA Printer Configuration Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen 168 MasterFlexD General Settings Hot Folder Enter the location of the HotfoldersEx directory Default is C Masterflex HotfoldersEx but it should be changed to the actual directory where the images will be saved Aspect Ratio Match Set this field to the desired ratio Options are FillWithCrop or FitWithBorder Default is FillWithCrop Schema Enter the location where the HotfolderEx reference file TrxHotFolderOrderSchema xml is located on the Masterflex Inspect Orders Set to True if the orders are to be inspected prior to printing Default is False Apply LDC If you want local density control LDC to be applied prior to printing set this option
325. t Setup within the Noris DPOF In tertace os istitascactits esac cess iiin ase ashes E EEE Rach E 182 Assignme Products tothe Noritsu DPOF Interfate aes casts cas aired tii aid sie seed coated EEEE 183 P llinge Orders mto the Noritsu SOM Wane a3 scsi sia csad aop sc esac ais seo aetna aati bce cobs earned asec 185 Appendix Tc INOrits NetOrder isisa E E E 187 PPE LOCO EE E E EE AE EE TE AEE E IE OT EE P T E E NA E E E E 187 Seine up the Noritsu NetOrder With oep VV IZA d eenn T R 187 Editing the Nontsu NetOrder Interlaced Seine Siyari E OE 188 Product Setup within the Noritsu NetOrder Interface nesies einser enee neo Eaa ERE Na 190 Assigning Products tothe Noritsu NetOrder Interface wisisssissoisis ssasiinesesatisatdousabacuensibecuetstheseasibacseave tesuesistousebensseoneauacuousageasans 191 Appendix NOMS OSS TIOUE Olde sessen E an sscaapua A E ERE 192 PT POU C a E cada ay EN E E T E octal edt A TEN E TE EEE 192 Setting up the O55 H tF lder Usine the Setup VIZ and cearr re iE AAE ENN 193 Editne the O55 Lio older Inter ace Se WINE Soenna NNN A ctamays 193 Product Setup within the Noritsu OSS Hotf older Intertace sssuscacin ana E 195 Assionine Products tothe Nontst O55 HOUOlder Merate gessien E E E E EO 196 Appendix K Photopize XC Onn eCh scsi steht a A ha aesclasla Mia ela clad able 198 PPE ECC ISIUCS inua A R a Ge deuatuabectits basen tabenteds 198 petting Up Photog ize XC Onine Cb avossccstaid sheasit cect cals cae dccacedc aba chanced caeadla
326. t of the front of the machine 9 Remove the brackets from the old card reader and put them on the replacement Note Depending on the age of your APM 2000 there may be screws in the front to remove instead of the back 10 Slide the new card reader back into place and reconnect all screws and cables Removing Card Reader from Frame 247
327. t offer the glossy surface is there a way to change this setting A Use the macros in the File Name Templates to change the file name output Q After creating a Hot folder Interface the APM gives an error warning message Hotfolder Could not create verify the specified path XXXX yyyyy or Error Printer of D Prn1 was not found What does this mean A This warning message means that the path of the Hot folder is incorrect or the folder doesn t exist on your network The path should use the universal naming convention UNC to properly access the network folder Check the location in the Setup Wizard and make sure that the server name and folder share settings are correct A typo in the path name usually causes this error Q We set up a hot folder on the APMs but we can t see it across our network A Make sure the folder is shared and other users on your network have access to modify the folder The work eroup folder permissions and IP addresses specific to your network may need to be modified in order to connect to the folder over the network 137 Q Every time we reboot our APMs the hot folder we setup cannot be found A Make sure to use the computer name in the Setup Wizard as it may be that the network is setup to use dynamic IP addresses If IP addresses need to be used for the folder path make sure the machine hosting the hot folder is using a static IP address Q We can see the Hot folder across the net
328. t the Product Rendering Configuration line to highlight it the area around Product Rendering Configuring Products 1 Configuration turn blue 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side 3 This will launch the Product Rendering Settings window There are options to Add Edit or Delete each product 207 Addi diting Products ing Editing Products 1 To add a product click on the Add button To edit select a product and click Edit This will Cancel launch the Product Rendering window 2 Inthe Product field use the drop down menu to select the product Width Unis 3 For DPI 300 is generally used 4 Enter the Width and Height as indicated and if needed These fields will auto fill when the product is selected 5 Click OK when finished Product Rendering Window Height Units Deleting a Product 1 Select the size you wish to delete from the Product Rendering Settings window 2 Press the Delete button Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be 3 unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Assigning Products to the Hot Folder Interface After the Generic Hot Folder interface ha
329. tain sizes A Be sure that each size in the printer configuration has the correct PCN name associated with it in the Setup Wizard If the PCN name is not set correctly the particular size will not print Make sure that all sizes are accounted for and that all APM products have been assigned the correct print channel Hot Folder Interface Q Can I set up a Hot folder anywhere on my network A Yes as long as the APM and or Lab 50 have read write modify access to the remote shared folder it should be able to work Q You don t offer a direct interface to our minilab how do we set up the APMs so we can receive orders in our minilab A You will need to configure the Generic Hot folder interface if you are using a PIC version below 2 64 or the Kodak DLS Please see Appendix L for more information on configuring the Hot Folder Interface Q Can we create separate order folders within our hot folder setup A You can enable the Create Order Subfolder option by setting the value to True in the Setup Wizard In version 5 0 and higher you can also create order sub folders based on the product type Please see Appendix L for additional information Q Is there a way to change the filename that shows up in the Hot folder Interface A Use the macros in the File Name Templates in the Hot folder setup settings Please see Appendix L for additional information Q The orders in the Hot folder are showing Glossy in the filename Since we don
330. te This is an older interface and is rarely used Instead it is best to use the Noritsu DPOF interface and set it up for NetOrder compatibility mode However this interface is available for those who still wish to use it Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 need to be able to see the Noritsu machine across the local area network and vice versa 2 NetOrder mode must be properly configured and running on the Noritsu printer Please refer to Noritsu documentation for setup 3 If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM This is seen in the screenshot below taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard Main Options MV Enable this fulfillment Print Settings This fulfillment prints on a local printer connected to this APM l Monitor Printing This fulfillment prints at a Lab 50 Print Station connected via a LAN This fulfillment prints remotely connected via a private FTP server This fulfillment prints at a remote Lab 50 Print Station connected via APM Order Agent Setting up the Noritsu NetOrder with Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the NetOrder interface This process includes the following steps 1 Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings 2 Product setup from within the interface 3 Assigning printable pr
331. te change the price set for a CD in each fulfullment no matter how many CDs the order needs to span Fer CD use the CD price set in each fulfilment to calculate the price of a CO product based on how many CDs are needed to fill the order Indes Print Pricing i Flat rate charge the price set for an Indes Print in each fulfullment no matter how marny Indes Prints the order needs to span Per print use the Indes Print price set in each fulfillment to calculate the price of the Index Print product based on how many index print pages are needed to fill the order Pricing Model Screen 67 Image CD DVD Settings Click on the Image CD DVD Settings option in the Primary Navigation Pane This screen allows you to configure the APM for Image CD DVD creation at different locations change the files burned to CD or DVD and configure the drive letters The available options are the following e Offer Image CD Only This option will only allow the ordering of an Image CD in the APM software e Offer Image DVD Only This option will only allow the ordering of an Image DVD in the APM software Image CD DVD Settings e Offer Both Image CD and Image DVD Both Image CDs and Image DVDs can be ordered in the software and the choice will be presented to the customer Product Offering Offer Image CD only Offer Image DYD only Difer both Image CD and Image DVD e Burn Image CD DVD remotely via Back Lab Burner or supported
332. te this product click here and then on the three dots to the right Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Deleting a Product 1 Select the Delete this product paper size line to highlight it the area around Delete this product paper size will turn blue 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side Click OK on the confirmation box and the product will be deleted 190 Assigning Products to the Noritsu NetOrder Interface After the Noritsu NetOrder interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 1 Click on the Products Printed Here a E option in the Primary Navigation Printers Pane eee T ENET man geet 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a on I Send prod to tert rer based on the nulace saya checkmark next to all of the a products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish A Fulfilment 1 Diii e If Send products to di
333. tedalsebtncd be r a Saee E E E E AEE E a EAE EEA 198 Setting Up the Photogize XConnect Using the Setup Wizard sesssesssesssescscssssscssasscscscscscsssssesssesssesesesesssesssesesseeseseeees 200 Editing the Photoeize x Connect Interface Seti S sirsat ae et EE E N 200 Product Setup within the Photogize XConnect Interface seoseis a A E RR 202 ASsiomineg Products t heX Connect Interlace cscs eda uiwanactiseaeadana e E A 203 Appendix L Gonernc Hotl Folder aizius T E E E 204 Pereg eE a a E a ache nna ac esbcnua toads aches ead acta gt 204 setine Upa Hot Folder Usinie ie setip VV IZA 5 sccste fist acct n i Misl ores S A Mialeuies 204 Ecitine the HotFolder iterace Seu SS us snsirsssasch sued esis ai inl a EN E S T E N E 204 Product Setup within the Hot Folder Ute ta Ce sensisse nesd iiaeaae aa ra na eE iah enipe EEE Sap iaaa iae AA Aae Enean sumeseeecse cmencseeseneete 207 Assienine Products to the Hot Fold r Imerese aana aha iasa ea iae asai ee None iaaa AEDA OAA nii ea RUE Oae edu VONA 208 Append M Windows Pinle sansanonin iaaa a a E T a 210 Preregub ieS enn a ascites acaeecusciuasesesseuteuidLaieutscuutauedstaieutscuntaidsbaisutsceuteed bau sdssumtanid bats stssentensdel stu escumtauiel tier cassenernadits 210 Set ne Up a Windows Printer Using the Setup Wizard sirdies aeaa EEE E AA 210 Ediune the Windows Printer Intertace oeng S ensa T N NS 210 Assionine Products tothe Windows Titer Meer ACC cani N E TN 212 Appendik NAKIS DKS Printera E A N 214 Prer
334. teomact samansartsedabaact maaan eeremeneneaes 122 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting FA OS essa toes casas cacti secs dceccccisetevadedend ctGsesdcod saves a E E detects deeauseccascactiaus ise 123 Cle ede OGE SON o eae nee ee ene ean en ERE Se ke et nee Se CrE STE Cn ae O a ener ee nee Sree 123 ALM Sofware General SeuUIn es niaii E 124 APM Software WIA OWS cesna S EE suacevessuateueasuesedgesupeeunasuews A A SERNA E 126 APM ooa OO EO O a A mecsnosuatanuasvauesnesuaieenestes 126 APM Sottware CUS UO mia ni a O O 127 APM SOrtw ate Problems ENOS crceccan a E eam eneacaeecaneate 128 APM OET ACEN surea N A csuasnurasuessaaesaeasts 128 Hardware DPS rinna E E E E ucaaeucacae erase seco ssrvoscqunteeaoameamaans 129 Genera PAn A aeai N A E 130 Dye Sublimation Printing Wmdows DIVET rreson iiiar E EE EE E EE 131 Copal Eb E E re TE E R E EE Oe re 132 AGFA TDR VW Or BO Wr Fie aina A nti atetst ata mtectucae sean 133 b ve cal GA vob elles sle lg caree ene ere meen T emer mere er N 134 Noritsu CT Protocol DPOF QSS Hot Folder and Net Order ou ccccesssssssessssessssesssessssescsesseseseesessessseeseeessesesecseseeseensaees 135 FOF ronner PIG P26 arcs case E E Cabaiie Gath E EEEE 135 PROT IZE m a a a cariaranceidion str iaiaanid ea ottawierae sea ne nies 136 Ronica POP Titer ace a AA AEA N care E T ON Rite cocaine ied acetals I ESEE AA I tack detains 136 Hot Forder Miera ocre a etectless Sa anes ea ie Nites tah ET ana tate TE 137 EO 9800 O 9550 Tr
335. tes stiri nssnanweiaouemiinstaisventdi E NE E 227 Assigning Products to the Silverwire OM HotFolder Interface oe eessessssssssssesssesssssesessssscsesesessscssssasasasacasacscssecaeasess 229 APOE Pu JOD IVA eisena a i EE a E 230 PP PERCCUISIESS eno nan E EN 230 Detling upthe Fuji Job Maker Usine the Setup Wizard eiiieaen i a EEEE EA O 230 Editing the Job Maker mteriace oe UNa S nonna N emeueucecnusueeanat 231 Product setup within the Fu Job Maker Tretia ce miana N EN 232 Asso nine Froducts tothe Fu JopMaker MICTICE ienn N 234 Appendix R Custom Screen amp Receipt TX sissscsdivcssinccssivssticssusncdsatous oseaan aaaea opus aoaoina saaan 236 Files Used for Receipt C Ustni zati Oisin E A 236 Editing LEF On ATR CCC UO hentia a a tes 236 Editing the Text Formatting om tTEREGEID usinisi e a eaa 238 Moving a Ine OF TOXt Witte RECP nnn E A 238 Addmo New Text tothe ReCID inns a a A 239 Appendix S Replacing the CD Drive and Card Reader iiieoo asi a na 241 P rereguistes Lil Daiipenein i r E TA E T E E E E A E T T R 241 APM 1000 and 1100 CD Drive amp Card Reader Replacement e sesssesseseessessessesressesressesresresresresresresresreseesresreseereeseeseeneereenes 241 APM 1200 CD Drive amp Card Reader Replacement o svsciecsstctanes ietes eae E ET 243 APM 2000 and APM 2700 CD Drive amp Card Reader Replacement 00 eeeesesssssssssesesesesesesesesescscssasasasasacacasacssaeeseeess 246 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TER
336. text in the receipt this same set of instructions can be used to change any element of text on any screen within the software To add the text for the receipt or edit the text for any language string do the following 1 Make a backup copy of all xml files found in C APM 2 Open up the language template for the language text strings that will be modified in Notepad Example c APM apmlang_english xm Do a search within the file for lt receipt gt Copy the entire section from lt receipt gt to lt receipt gt by highlighting it and pressing ctrl c Close the language file Open the apmlang_custom xml file in Notepad 7 os ot eS Do a search to see if there are any sections for the language that will be modified Example When doing a search for German do a search for lt german gt 8 If there is not a preexisting section for the language to be modified you will need to create one Hit enter a couple times underneath the lt english gt tag to create extra lines 9 Onone of the new lines create a tag with the language Ex lt german gt 10 Hit Enter a couple times to create some space and then create a closing tag Ex lt german gt 11 Paste ctrl v the copied section where the extra spaces were just created 12 To create a text string to be added to the receipt the following information will need to be added within the lt receipt gt of the language that will show it A string ID an English equivalent optional and the
337. text itself Sample lt string id txtSubtotal en Subtotal gt Subtotal lt string gt 13 Create an extra line of space somewhere between the lt receipt gt and the lt receipt gt in the apmlang_custom xmI file 14 Create the following shell as a template in the extra space lt string id en gt lt string gt wn 239 15 In the id section enter an identification for the text that starts with txt 16 In the en an English translation can be optionally added or it can be left blank 17 Between the gt lt characters enter the text as it should be shown on the receipt 18 Repeat steps 13 17 for each of text to be added to the receipt Example Adding New Text to the Receipt Old Text Pickup Hours are from 2pm until 6pm lt receipt gt lt string id txtPickupHours en Store Pickup Hours are from 2pm until 6pm gt Store Pickup Hours are from 2pm until 6pm lt string gt lt receipt gt 19 Save the apmlang_custom xml file and close 20 Open apmconfig_recerpt xml in Notepad 21 Locate the section of the file where the new customized text will appear on the receipt 22 Hit enter to create a new line 23 Use the following sample as a guideline lt item name footer type text pts 10 face times new roman bold false italic true align center gt txtThankYouFooter lt item gt 24 Create an empty template using the following items lt item name type pts face
338. that featured product Alternatively use the tabs in the middle of the screen to see a list of all available products This screen will default to the By Product tab displayed a panel of additional products that may be ordered Use the arrows to the right and left of the panel to navigate through the available products Note If a product is configured as a featured product it will not show up in the By Product tab PEO N N F erg A 4 Photo Books Mini Books Photo Book Notepads Folded Cards Note Cards Posters amp Covers Collages A a r RA r Ww ere s Da im FlipBooks Proof Books Calendars Flat Cards Envelopes Scrapbook Banners Pages By Product Tab You can also select the By Occasion tab to see a panel of products specific to occasions such as holidays birthdays and weddings Use the arrows to the right and left of the panel to navigate through the available occasions By Product By Occasion 444 2OmWOen Birthday Classic Book Father s Day Halloween Invitation Mother s Day Qemuk Christmas Easter Graduation Hanukkah Kids New Year s By Occasion Tab Once you have chosen a product from a Featured Products button the By Product tab or the By Occasion tab the software will take you to the configuration options for that product Some products will require additional selections to define the ordering parameters For example when ordering a Photo Book selections mu
339. the APM Dispatcher APM Network The APM Network is a central server that tracks each order as it moves through the various stages of the fulfillment process namely order placed order received by printer order processed order printed order packaged order waiting to ship order shipped and order delivered The APM Network is used to gather and analyze data such as customer information ordering behavior and sales trends Each APM gathers detailed usage statistics as a customer places an order including the amount of time spent on each screen the type of digital camera the customer used and the media type from which the order was placed The APM then transmits those statistics to the central server where they are parsed and stored in the master database and displayed on the website www APMProfitWatcher com APM ProfitWatcher When you purchased your APM you should have been given a username and password to this site These credentials may be found in the front of the manual or by contacting technical support By connecting your APM to mS Tas sie vals the internet you have access to a powerful data analysis Q O AG Powe k B S St WOO Ss i A Address http www apmnetwork com x Go tool the APM ProfitWatcher This tool gathers data from a B al APM Network e onnecting your APMs to you Lucidiom your APM and offers many benefits Use APM ProfitWatcher to e View sales and product figure
340. the Index Print and Card Catalog CD Software Q Can I replace the viewing software burned onto the CDs with an alternate viewing program A Yes however Lucidiom cannot support any viewing software other than the default viewing software provided by Lucidiom Please contact Support for detailed instructions Q What exactly gets burned onto the Image CD DVD created by the APM A The APM Image CD DVD includes Photo Finale viewing software When a CD DVD is ordered it burns all of the images or selected images only as well as non image files avi mov moov mpg mpeg mp4 wmv aac ac3 aif aiff asf divx dv mp2 mp3 qt wav wma on the media card This CD DVD can then be used to order prints via the APM at a later time 127 Sales Tax Q How do I change the sales tax on the APM A The sales tax can be changed in the Setup Wizard By default the APM uses the state tax rate of the store location or the rate indicated on the Site Survey you filled out after you purchased an APM Please see Chapter 6 for more information on changing the tax rates APM Software Problems Errors Images Not Found Q When I start over on the APM it tells me that my images are not found Why does it not see them after I start over A Any time the APM starts over the media ejects from the system This is done to protect the media from possible corruption by Windows if the media is removed improperly While it may not physically be ej
341. this be done A Yes To do this load the Windows print driver and then rename it Use the Setup Wizard to continue to assign print products that will output on that printer Please see Appendix M for more information on configuring a windows printer through the kiosk software Q What can I do to calibrate my screen with what prints out on my printer s A You can install third party software to calibrate your screen and prints but Lucidiom does not support it APM Software Folio EO Pro Content Q Do I have to update my content after I update the APM software A Depending on the nature of the update you may need to update the content for certain add on components The directions provided with each update should always be followed to ensure you have the correct content installed for your software version Q Can I create my own content A Yes you can create your own content Lucidiom requires that you attend our free two day training and certification course which is held every four to six weeks at our headquarters in Vienna VA Please contact your regional sales representative to inquire about upcoming classes JPEG versus PDF Q What is the best format for output of the Folio content A Both are excellent The option to create either JPEGs or PDF is done for compatibility reasons If you are printing the photo folio pages and products on Minilab or Dye Sublimation printers then the JPEG option is best If you are using
342. this interface It is also best to account for both Glossy and Matte finishes even if only one is available The following steps explain how to do this Select Product To 4dd 2001 4x6 Print i Cancel Adding Products ance T DPOF Settings 1 Click on Add Product to Print Channel Product Width je highlight the line the word Add Product will turn Size Letter Product Height 4 blue 2 Click on the small button ao TER glossy 2 labeled that appears on the right hand side This will launch a dialog box DPI ivi th ti ala acu tom filial Adding a New Noritsu DPOF Product for the new product 3 Use the drop down menu to select the product to be added Set the Print Channel to the matching print channel that is used on the Noritsu machine for this product P 5 The Size Letter is a string that will be appended to the end of the order folder name Normally this can be anything you wish to set However keep in mind that if two different products use the same Size Letter then order directories might get overwritten Note Preferably we suggest the Size Letter be a value relating to the actual product and finish and starting with a dash for readability Example 4x6G is used for 4x6 Glossy product 6 Enter the Print Size of the paper magazine that will be used for this product Example 4R is referred to as 4 inch paper 7 Set the Product Width and Product Height to the
343. tic tool that can be used to log all actions taken by the APM software and its components It may be enabled to track the performance of the software and for troubleshooting purposes RAS Server The RAS Server is used by APMs that rely on a modem connection to access the internet The RAS Server receives requests from the Kiosk Dispatcher and Remote Update components to initiate an internet connection RAS Server dials the modem if the machine is not already connected and also terminates the modem connection after a specified period of inactivity Copy Order The Copy Order tool allows for the copying of orders to and from one stand alone system to another This tool is used only in these instances and requires some advanced setup by manually editing an xml file called copyorder xml SaveConfigDlg The SaveConfig dlg exe file saves the kiosk configuration settings to a USB drive media card or any drive letter setup for use in the APM This allows for backing up the system settings as well as for copying the configuration from one system to another The systems must be the same hardware and must be running the same software version in order to use the same configuration settings EQUpload The EQ Upload application is used in conjunction with the new order option for Photo Finale Web Uploads When an order is placed that includes the PF Web Upload product the EQ Upload application is the tool that sends the order to the server rather than using
344. tion to Support Q Next Menu Save Restore Configuration Admin Screen 3 of 3 Send Log Files to Support This option will send logs of any crashes that have occurred in the software to support Please use this only when requested by support Send XML Configuration to Support This option will send the current configuration settings to support Please use this only when requested by support 60 Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to customize the user interface fulfillment options add on components and printers for the APM You can use the Setup Wizard to customize the following features in your APM user interface Appearance customization e Payment settings Card Catalog Settings e Photo IQ options Cropping settings e Pickup locations Custom store branding e Pricing models Fulfillment options e Printer configuration Image CD DVD settings e Product Selection Settings Location settings e Products pricing and fees Lab 50 Integration e Promotions and coupons Order options e Receipt settings Passcodes and order limits e User interface settings To access the Setup Wizard 1 2 3 4 Access the looping intro movie Touch the lower left corner of the screen to access a hidden menu At the next screen press 1 2 3 4 the default passcode and then press the Enter button Hit the Next Menu button then the APM Setup Wizard button Note When you launch the Setup Wizard from the Admin screen the APM softw
345. to True Wait For Result File Set to True if you only want to print when the current order has been completed Depending on the setup of the Masterflex software this may need to be set to False Time Out Seconds If the Ethernet connection between the printer and the APM and or Lab 50 machine is slow then change this to a higher value from the default of 120 Succeed On Timeout Leave as False unless otherwise instructed for troubleshooting purposes Print Index If the index is to be created at the Printer instead of the APM and or Lab 50 machine set this option to True and then set the Index Width and Index Height to the proper sizes in inches Debug Mode If after changing all of the settings the Masterflex interface does not work come back to this screen and set to True Default is False Back Print Used to specify the desired back print format using the case sensitive parameters listed below The default is ORDER _ ITEM _ oPRODUCT FINISH OQTY The following is a list of available case sensitive parameters that may be used e ORDER Order Number e PRODUCT Product Name e PROD ID Product Id e FINISH Finish option glossy matte e OTY Quantity e ORIG_FN Original File Name e ITEM Item Index e YEAR Current 4 digit year e MONTH Current 2 digit month e DAY Current 2 digit day e FNAME Customer first name e LNAME Customer last name e PHONE Custo
346. to enter text then press the Apply Text button Once the text appears on the page use the Color Font and Size buttons to adjust the text appearance You can also use the Edit Text button to change the text entered To make additional changes to the text click on the More Options button Select the alignment of the text by pressing the Left Center or Right buttons to align the text within the background Toggle the Text Background or Text Shadow boxes to show or hide these options Choose Previous Options to return to the main text editing pane Note Most EQ Pro products do not allow you to reposition text on a page Fill out the page with photos and text G gt y Fill out the page with photos and text Switch between different layouts and backgrounds A ed Switch between different layouts and backgrounds Adjust Text Position ete Color Text Editing Screen Additional Text Options To change the layout for the page you are currently editing select the Layouts tab and choose the desired layout for the page Use the arrow buttons to scroll through all of the available layouts The button in the top right hand corner of the layouts tab may be used to see larger thumbnails of the available layouts 55 Note If you have already inserted photos into a page and change the layout the APM software will automatically reposition those photos once the layout has changed To change the background
347. to fail Product Rendering X Presdiock 2001 4x6 Print Width 6 00 DPI 200 Cancel Height 4 00 Code 4x6 Bordered Code 4x6BD Adding a Product within the JobMaker Interface 233 Deleting a Product Select the product you would like to delete by clicking on it to highlight it Click on the Delete button Repeat for each product you would like to remove Click OK when finished oN Assigning Products to the Fuji JobMaker Interface After the Fuji JobMaker interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 1 Click on the Products Printed i REE Here option in the Primary Navigation Pane EITA T Send products to different printers based on the fuliliment express pickup mal 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the Send products to different pinter bared on thee suface iglognyy matte ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish eA Fulfilment 1 Express EA ruitament 2 Pick vp e If Send products to different A creer co printers based on the 1 Pelee fulfillment is checked the Product Matrix option in the 2 Printer Configuration Products Printed Here Screen Primary Navigation Pane will expand from on
348. ts of the APM ID are shown e The folder contains images from order number is 72851070 e The suffix letter is g and in this instance g maps to Noritsu print channel 9 Again for user readability it is preferable to use suffix letter like 4x6G that includes the product name as well the finish option To print an order 1 Select the folder you want to print then click Yes OK All images for that size channel will appear in the editing screen to operate 3 Make the necessary corrections and send the images to print The software will then mark the order as printed and the APM or Lab 50 will delete the folder if Purge Complete setting is turned on in the Setup Wizard 4 Repeat for each folder to print until one whole order is completed Note Order folders that have the same 6 numeric digits indicating the fact that they are from the same order 5 Assuming that all sizes and finishes are setup properly then the images will print and the back print will show the information configured to print Note These instructions may differ depending on the model of the Noritsu machine you are using and the software you have installed Please contact Lucidiom technical support if you require further assistance 186 Appendix I Noritsu NetOrder The Noritsu NetOrder interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format a Noritsu machine running in NetOrder mode can accept and print No
349. ts to the order or click on Check Out to review the order on the Order Summary screen Press the Continue button to finalize the order Special Instructions Screen 32 Chapter 4 Standard APM Components For the standard APM software license the prints creative collections plus scanning passport and gifting modules are included with every APM license In this chapter we will cover the standard components which encompass creative collections scanning passports and photo gifts If you purchased your kiosk previous to version 6 0 you may need to purchase an upgrade bundle to enable these options on your APM Creative Collections Plus The APM Creative Collections Plus component formerly known as APM Greetings enables customers to create basic single sided multi image greeting cards on the APM This was the original creative template system for the APM software and legacy support for these types of cards still exists Note Cards that use Creative Collections templates are referred to as Exclusive Cards in the APM software and will be referred to as such for the rest of this section Before exclusive card products can be ordered templates must be installed on the system They can be obtained from Lucidiom or other third party providers as long as their templates are in the Lucidiom format Templates purchased from Lucidiom will automatically install into the correct folder on the APM If you have templates that you or other des
350. tup Wizard button and the Setup Wizard will launch oS e Once you have the Setup Wizard open Click on Printer Configuration Click on Add Printer In the menu at the right select Noritsu DPOF In the Printer Name field enter DPOF or any name you wish to use Click the Add button Click on the newly created Noritsu DPOF Interface option in the top left corner to display the options for this OS a a meS interface ioixi File Help Printer Configuration DPOF Noritsu DPOF Interface Printers E General Settings a DPOF Noritsu DPOF Interface Folder c NoritsuDPOFPrinter ga Add Printer Wait For Response False Timeout Seconds 180 Use APM Order Number False Suceed On Timeout True Purge Complete False Back Print 1 HORDER AIITEM Back Print 2 Render Images True Net Order Compatibility False Supports Duplexing False Serene Deeg Pe 4 General Print Settings JUO VNM NORITSU KOKI ta Print Station Settings Products Printed Here z5 Product Matrix All Fulfillments GEN CRT NAME APM Use MOC for CD ROMs False Add Product To add a product please click here and then on the three dots to the right 2006 3 1 2 x 5 Print glossy 2006 3 1 2 x 5 Print matte 2001 4x 6 Print glossy 2001 4x 6 Print matte 2002 5 x 7 Print glossy Product Channel 2002 5 x 7 Print matte Product Channel 2003 8 x 10 Print glossy prrrrrer Kiosk Settings The f
351. uage Specific Templates Load all templates for all languages Load only neutral non4tanguage specific templates Load only neutral nontanguage specific templates plus templates for the languages specified below 2 Use the Language Specific Templates settings to load All templates for all languages Neutral non language specific templates or Neutral non language specific templates plus templates for the selected languages Template Localization Options Note The Template Localizations are based on settings specified in the XML files for the template If the template does not have any information regarding Country and or Language restrictions it will be considered a non country and or non language specific template Configuring Photo Folio To enable Photo Folio on the APM 1 Click on the APM Add On Components option in the Category Navigation Pane 2 Click on the Folio option in the Primary Navigation Pane 3 Click on the Enable Folio Add On checkbox at the top of the Customization Pane You can also configure the following options e Automatically Auto Fill With this feature enabled all photo folio products will be auto filled with the images selected by the customer rather than presenting the auto or manual fill selection screen e Require Employee Approval for Folio Orders When this option is enabled the kiosk software prompts for the order approval passcode after a Folio order has been completed S
352. unt for an offered product will cause orders to fail Editing Products 1 To edit products that are already set up in the list first find the corresponding product ID and click on the sign to expand the list Refer to the previous section on details of each field Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Deleting a Product 1 Select the Delete this product line to highlight it the area around Delete this product will turn blue 2 Click on the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side 3 Click OK in the confirmation box and the product will be deleted 165 Assigning Products to the Fuji Frontier PIC PRO 2 6 Interface After the Fuji Frontier PIC PRO 2 6 interface has been properly configured the next step is to choose the products you wish to print 1 Click on the Products Printed Here option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 Inthe Customization Pane place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers b
353. uration Demo and PS Test Pages ii i Lu MARE Color Swatch Page In certain instances you may be required to print pages from the printer for diagnostic and support purposes These pages give vital information about the printer status setup and color quality These should be printed on plain 201b letter size paper not glossy paper The unit is hard coded to print these information pages on plain media To print simply replace the paper in Tray 1 with plain paper and switch back when finished If these pages are printed on glossy media you may have fusing issues which can cause toner to adhere to and dirty the fuser causing print quality issues N z Ready to print Press ENTER to switch to the menu mode Load plain paper into Tray 1 as described above Use the V key to scroll down to the Print Pages function Press ENTER Use the V A and ENTER keys to select either the Configuration Demo or PS Test Page options Press ENTER The page you selected will be printed 122 Print Pages Suspend Printing Resume Printing Chapter 11 Troubleshooting FAQs General Questions These are general questions about the APM More information can be found on the Lucidiom website www lucidiom com SUD port Windows Update Q On my other computers and my computers at home I sometimes use Windows Update to download updates for my system Can I do this with the
354. ured for printing in the Printer Configuration section of the Setup Wizard If you are using the NetOrder Interface make sure that port 5000 is open in the Windows Firewall Fuji Frontier PIC Pro 2 6 Q My Fuji machine is not named PIC I do not have an ADPC folder Everything is set correctly but orders are not coming over A There is a distinct difference between PIC and PIC Pro interfaces PIC Pro does not operate in the same manner as the regular PIC interface PIC Pro machines are usually named Labserver1 and have shared folders such as Digin and Merge Data Be sure that you are using the PIC Pro interface rather than the regular PIC interface when setting things up Q My order comes over to the PIC and I can see the images but for some reason certain sizes do not print A Make sure that the right Fuji product codes are entered for each size in the printer configuration of the Setup Wizard This applies to the Code and Border Code fields for each size in the product rendering settings Please note that these values are case sensitive for example 4x6 is different from 4X6 135 Q Orders are printing on my PIC Pro but the images come out misaligned or have strange problems with the border A You may need to make adjustments to the borders that are printed You can manually change the alignment in the Border Alignment section of the printer configuration in the Setup Wizard Photogize Q I have m
355. urned on you may want to try turning those off Lastly if you go to the properties of the network adapter on your APM and or Lab 50 machine you can check the Power Management settings by right clicking on My Computer and selecting Manage Click on the Device Manager then right click on your network card to select Properties In the Properties window select the Power Management tab and uncheck the option Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power Q Xconnect gives the error there s an unprocessed order A This warning message comes on when there are orders that have not been printed Once you clear the archive folder it should disappear Konica DPOF Interface Q I have my interface set up and orders are being placed correctly in the C QDIF 3 QDPRINT folder but the Konica machine doesn t see any orders A Be sure that the C QDIF 3 QDPRINT can be accessed over the network Make sure that you can see it from the Konica machine and all users can access and change the files 136 Q Orders are not transferring even though I have everything set up correctly A Be sure that the GEN CRT and VUQ NUM fields are set correctly for the printer configuration in the Setup Wizard The default is KonicaR1SUPER for a R1 but if you are using a QD 21 these fields need to be set to Konica QD 21 Keep in mind that these fields are case sensitive Q My order transfers to the Konica but there is a problem printing cer
356. ve forward 13 To replace the card reader undo the large screws from the bracket 14 The card reader should slide forward 245 APM 2000 and APM 2700 CD Drive amp Card Reader Replacement A magnetic Phillips screw driver is recommended Note On some of the newer APM 2000s and on all of the APM 2700s the card readers can be replaced by opening the front of the case and removing the screws in the front and the cables in the back Step 1 Open the Case 1 Disconnect all cables on the rear of the kiosk 2 Remove the back plate There are four screws one in each corner Pull the back panel away from the machine On the right side is a power cord with red yellow and black wire unplug it On the left side are two ribbon cables You may want to unplug them to lay the back panel flat Keep an eye on how they are plugged in the one on top has the blue tape facing towards the inside of the machine while the one underneath has the blue tape facing outside Reaching in from the back of the kiosk remove the screw that is holding the left card reader bracket in place Unscrewing Frame from Chassis 246 Now remove the screw from the right bracket Remove all connections from the back of the card reader There will be two power cords and a USB cable Unlock the front of the kiosk and pull the drawer all the way out Step 2 Remove Replace the Card Reader and or CD Drive 8 Slide the card reader ou
357. vigation Pane Printer Configuration Prinsers zi Copal Copal Dye Sub Printer a Add Printer Settings ee General Print Settings go Print Stabon Settings j Products Printed Here Index Book Settings Fulfillment 1 Express y Fulfillment 2 Pick up I Fulfillment 3 Mail aE APH Add On Components a Printer Configuration 4G 2001 4x6 Print S10 2003 8x1 0 Pris 4x Cand 4001 4x6 GC Axl Card 4003 0x10 GC i Flot Conds BDM 4E Flat Canda Bx 0 Wal bet GUUS 8x10 Wal Ad Cowal Copal Dye Sub Ponte Ope Lops Dye ous e Copal Copal Dye Sub Printes Copal Copal Dye Sub Prater Product Matrix Screen 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Copal Dye Sub interface from the drop down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Matrix option repeat for each matrix 4 To assign multiple products to a single printer right click anywhere in the Customization Pane and use the context menu options such as Set ALL formats to or Set all unassigned formats to 149 Appendix C Fuji Frontier C8 PrintPix NC 1000 The Fuji C8 NC 1000 interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format a Fuji Frontier PrintPix NC 1000 machine can accept and print The machine must be running in C8 mode to accept Fuji C8 orders Prerequisites 1 The APM and or Lab 50 must be able to see the Fuji Frontier across the local area n
358. width and height of the product 8 Use the Finish dropdown to select either Glossy or Matte for the finish option Note Regardless of whether both glossy and matte channels are available for a particular size it is necessary to add the size twice once for glossy finish and once for matte If only one finish is available for a product then the size must still be added twice but can be assigned the same Print Channel number 9 Set the DPI to 300 which is the default value 10 Hit OK to finish adding the product Editing Products 1 To edit products that are already set up in the list first find the corresponding product ID and click on the sign to expand the list Refer to the previous section on details of each field 182 Note Make sure to account for all products not just the print products For example 8x10 Prints 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software Therefore each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail Deleting a Product 1 Select the Delete product channel line to highlight it the area around Delete product channel will turn blue 2 Click the small button labeled that appears on the right hand side 3 Click OK in the confirmation box and the product will be deleted io x File Help Printer Configuration DPOF Nor
359. work but new orders are not getting sent to it A Double check the Hot folder settings to make sure that you have assigned products to it Also make sure that you have enough HD space on your host PC Q Our Hot folder orders have print failed or xxxxx err A Check that all of the product sizes are setup correctly to print to the Hot folder For example if you order a 5x7 but you didn t specify in the hot folder to print a 5x7 the order would have the err extension There should be a Canvas rendering setting for each product such as 4x6 Print 4x6 Greeting Card and 4x6 Page Q Our Hot folder orders seem to take a long time to transfer over A You may set the option to render images to false in the Hot folder Interface setup to speed up order processing Q My APM orders are printed using the hot folder driver My APM is setup to delete orders after a certain number of days will the files in the hot folder also be deleted A No the images that are sent to the hot folder are not automatically deleted These will need to be deleted manually EQ 9800 EQ 9850 Troubleshooting Q The printer s color is off Is there something I can do to calibrate the printer A Please reference Chapter 10 for information on calibrating your printer Q How often should I calibrate the printer A Every time you replace a consumable item such as a drum toner or fuser the printer should be recalibrated However there is no har
360. xt to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine 3 The checkboxes at the top of the Customization Pane allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers based upon either the fulfillment or the product ruttament 01 Express finish BM ritament 2 rk up y Fulfillment 3 Mail Gi APM Add On Components e If Send products to different i Peer ontgaan printers based on the fulfillment is checked the Product Matrix Products Printed Here Screen option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections based upon the three fulfillments e If Send products to different ae printers based on their surface is checked the listing of products in p aame one aeons sera mika pace expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product Note For proper operation make certain that every printable product for each fulfillment is checked for all available columns A Fulfillment 1 Fxpress The last step involves assigning the 4 YA Fulfillment 2 Pick Up printed products to the printer interface A Fulfillment 3 Mail H Arr add On Components 1 Click on the Product Matrix All a S Fulfillments option in the Primary Navigation Pane 2 For each product listed click on the Printer column and select the Photogize XConnect interface from the drop Product Matrix Screen down menu 3 If there is more than one Product Mat
361. y e It will not work with Gifting products CDs or DVDs e Make sure the paths used are typed correctly and if the path is a shared folder then make sure the folder has the appropriate permission levels set to allow the kiosk to write modify and rename files from across the network e The product must also be setup properly in the Lab 50 software at the remote location in order to process correctly Fulfillment Overr ide Enter the overridden fulfillment path for this product C APM_TRANSFER Orders APMAnywhere WARNING The fulfillment path should only be overriden in special droumstance and with extreme care Please ALWAYS consult support Note You should not attempt to override the fulfillment path for CD or DVD products x m Order Export Override Path 87 Chapter 7 Add On Component Configuration APM Add On Components This section covers the configuration of APM Add On components in the Setup Wizard Please see the previous chapter for detailed instructions on accessing and using the Setup Wizard Each of the following features requires the proper licensing to function in the software If you are not licensed for any of these features it will be noted in the section you are attempting to change Please contact your regional sales representative to purchase these add on components for your APMs Configuring Creative Collections To enable Creative Collections and Luci on the APM ot iS a a
362. y APM and or Lab 50 software configured to use Photogize but the products are not showing up correctly in Photogize A This normally happens if the product names are different in Photogize To fix this compare the settings from your server xml file located in the polling folder for Photogize with your configuration settings in the Setup Wizard For more information on product configuration please see Appendix K Q The APM and or Lab 50 software is not sending my orders to Photogize Why are they not getting there A Either the XConnect feature is not set to auto harvest and or the polling folder used by XConnect and the APM Lab 50 software do not match Q We have correctly setup everything on both the APMs Photogize machine but we cannot harvest orders A Make sure that you are running version 2 1 or higher of the Photogize software Q After creating the polling folder location there was no server xml file generated A You may need to completely close out of the Photogize software and re open it to see the server xml files Q We are getting an error when we try to print an order A Make sure that the APM product codes match up with the names and or products codes configured in Photogize Q Photogize is timing out or falling asleep A You may need to adjust the timeout settings via the Setup Wizard You may double the setting from the default value of 600 to 1200 Also if you have any screensavers or power saving options t

Prerequisites - Photo Finale Wiki

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents